AutoCAD LT 2012 User's Guide February 2011
© 2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
Contents Get Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Find the Information You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Access Help and Other Sources of Information . . . . . Overview of InfoCenter and Autodesk Exchange . Learn the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the Product Readme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Join the Customer Involvement Program . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Ribbon . . . . . . Display and Organize the Ribbon . Customize the Ribbon . . . . . . Cursors in the Drawing Area . . . . . . The ViewCube Tool . . . . . . . . . . . The UCS Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Saved Searches in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . Browse Folders with Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Results in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sort and Group Results in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . Customize the View in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . Perform Tasks with Files in Content Explorer . . . . . . . . . Perform Tasks with Objects in Content Explorer . . . . . . . Streamline Searches with User-Created Properties in Content Explorer . . . . . .
Specify Search Paths and File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Chapter 8 Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Repair a Damaged Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Create and Restore Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Recover from a System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Control the Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Chapter 9 Change Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 12 Create Single-View Drawings (Model Space) . . . . . . . . . . 291 Quick Start for Model Space Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Chapter 13 Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) . . . . . 299 Quick Start for Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand the Layout Process . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Model Space and Paper Space . . . . . . Work in Model Space . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Name Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties . . . . . . . . Override Layer Properties in Viewports . . . . . . . . . . Filter and Sort the List of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconcile New Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use New Layer Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Current Color . . .
Override Object Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Grid and Grid Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) . . . . . . . Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap . . . . . . . . . . Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . Combine or Offset Points and Coordinates . . . . . . . . Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) . . Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) .
Prevent Objects from Being Selected . . . . Select Objects by Properties . . . . . . . . . Customize Object Selection . . . . . . . . . Group Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erase Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard . . . . . Modify Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choose a Method to Modify Objects . . . . Modify Objects Using Grips . . . . . . . . . Move or Rotate Objects . . . . .
Chapter 21 Create and Modify Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Define Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Blocks Within a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks . . . . . . . . Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks . Nest Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Annotate Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 Chapter 24 Work with Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 Overview of Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . Scale Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Scaling Annotations . . . . Set Annotation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . Create Annotative Objects . . . . . . . . Display Annotative Objects . . . . . . . Add and Modify Scale Representations . Set Orientation for Annotations . . . . . . . . Chapter 25 . . . . .
Insert Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Update Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Use Hyperlinks in Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Work with Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Overview of Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Assign Text Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 Set Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Existing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify A Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions . Override a Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Geometric Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Reference Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projected Tolerance Zones . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Color-Dependent Plot Style Tables . Use Named Plot Style Tables . . . . . . . Change Plot Style Settings . . . . . . . . Preview a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Files to Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . Plot DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot DWFx Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot to DXB File Formats . . . . . . . . . Plot to Raster File Formats . . . . . . . . Plot Adobe PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Adobe PostScript Files . . . . . . . . Create Plot Files . . . .
Resolve Referenced Drawing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolve Missing External References . . . . . . . . Resolve Circular External References . . . . . . . . Resolve Name Conflicts in External References . . Track External Reference Operations (Log File) . . Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings . Overview of Demand Loading . . . . . . . . . . . Unload Xrefs in Large Drawings . . . . . . . . . . Work with Demand Loading in Large Drawings . . Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes . . . . . .
Export MicroStation DGN Files . . . . . . . . . . . Export WMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Raster Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications . Work with Drawings in Earlier Releases . . . . . . . Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats . . Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT . . . Work with Custom and Proxy Objects . . . . . . . . Chapter 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Using Markups for Design Publish Drawings for Review . . . . . . Insert Markups . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Markups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Respond to Markups . . . . . . . . . . Republish a Markup Set . . . . . . . . . Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 . 1500 . 1501 . 1501 . 1506 . 1508 Render Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Information 1
2
Find the Information You Need 1 There are various ways to find information about how to use this program, and multiple resources are available. This AutoCAD LT is often intuitive, but when you do need to look something up, you can save time and avoid frustration if you use the Help system to find information. The Help system is organized in a structured design that makes information easy to locate.
Autodesk Exchange for AutoCAD LT Autodesk Exchange provides a web-based experience directly within the product. Included are tabs that access the following sources of information: ■ Home. Provides a wide variety of content, including announcements, expert tips, videos, and links to blogs. When enabled for online access, the Home tab also includes access to the Knowledge Base, Communication Center, and Subscription Center. ■ Help. Opens the AutoCAD LT Help system.
Autodesk Official Training Courseware Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) is technical training material developed by ----- Autodesk. You can purchase AOTC from your local reseller or distributor, or you can order it online from the Autodesk Store. e-Learning Autodesk e-Learning for Autodesk Subscription ----- customers features interactive lessons organized into product catalogs.
Join the Customer Involvement Program If you participate in the Customer Involvement Program (CIP), specific information about how you use AutoCAD LT is forwarded to Autodesk. This information includes what features you use the most, problems that you encounter, and other information helpful to the future direction of the product. See the following links for more information. ■ Learn more about the Autodesk Customer Involvement Program: http://www.autodesk.
Get Information from Drawings 2 You can retrieve general information from a drawing including identifying information and the number of objects that it contains. There are types of information stored in a drawing that are not specific to objects within the drawing, but provide useful information to help you understand the behavior of the drawing, the settings of system variables, the number of objects, descriptive information, and so on.
Quick Reference Commands DWGPROPS Sets and displays the file properties of the current drawing. TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing. System Variables CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format. DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. SAVENAME Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing. Count Objects Within a Drawing You can count objects within a drawing using the QSELECT command.
3 In the Object Type list, select the type of object you want to count. 4 In the Properties list, select a property that belongs to the type of objects you want to count. 5 In the Operator list, select = Equals. 6 In the Value list, select the property value of the type of objects you want to count. 7 Click OK. The number of objects displays at the Command prompt. Quick Reference Commands QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria.
10
The User Interface 11
12
Tools in the Application Window 3 Use the Application menu, ribbon, and other elements in the application window to access frequently used commands, and control the operation of the product. The Application Menu Click the application button to search for commands, as well as access tools to create, open, and publish a file. Search for Commands Perform a real-time search for commands on the Quick Access toolbar, in the application menu, and on the ribbon.
Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Access Common Tools Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.
■ Close AutoCAD LT NOTE You can also close AutoCAD LT by double-clicking the Application button. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Browse Files View, sort, and access supported files that you have recently opened. Recent Documents View the most recently used files with the Recent Documents list. Files display in the Recent Documents list with the most recently used file at the top by default.
Pinned Files You can keep a file listed regardless of files that you save later using the push pin button to the right. The file is displayed at the bottom of the list until you turn off the push pin button.
To change the number of recent documents listed 1 Click Tools ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the Open and Save tab. 3 In the Application Menu ➤ Number of Recently Used Files text box, enter the number of recent documents to be listed. You can choose any number between 0 and 50. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
To change the preview display options for currently open documents 1 Click the Application menu and then, click Open Documents. 2 Under the Search text box, click the Display Options menu. 3 Select a display option.
NOTE The preview display option you choose remains in both the Recent Documents and Open Documents quick menus. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Preview Documents View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents lists.
When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is displayed along with the following information: ■ Path where the file is stored ■ Date the file was last modified ■ Version of the product used to create the file ■ Name of the person who last saved the file ■ Name of the person who is currently editing the file You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list.
View Undo and Redo History The Quick Access toolbar displays options to undo and redo changes to your file. To undo or redo a less recent change, click the drop-down button to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Add Commands and Controls Add unlimited tools to the Quick Access toolbar. Tools that extend past the maximum length of the toolbar are displayed in a flyout button.
To add a ribbon button to the Quick Access toolbar, right-click the button on the ribbon and click Add to Quick Access toolbar. Buttons are added to the right of the default commands on the Quick Access toolbar. Move the Quick Access Toolbar Place the Quick Access toolbar either above or below the ribbon using the Customization button. See also: ■ Quick Access Toolbars ■ Toolbars on page 36 To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar 1 Right-click the Quick Access toolbar.
Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. The Ribbon The ribbon is a palette that displays task-based tools and controls. Overview of the Ribbon The ribbon is displayed by default when you open a file, providing a compact palette of all of the tools necessary to create or modify your drawing. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window.
System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT Determines whether the horizontally docked ribbon is set to the height of the current tab or a predetermined height.
Some ribbon panels display a dialog box related to that panel. The dialog box launcher is denoted by an arrow icon, , in the lower-right corner of the panel. The dialog box launcher indicates that you can display a related dialog box. Display the related dialog box by clicking the dialog box launcher. To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed, right-click the ribbon and, on the shortcut menu, click or clear the names of tabs or panels.
automatically closes when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded, click the push pin, , in the bottom-left corner of the slideout panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you select a particular type of object or execute some commands, a special contextual ribbon tab is displayed instead of a toolbar or dialog box. The contextual tab is closed when you end the command. Checkboxes Checkboxes allow you to toggle an option on or off.
Radio Buttons Depending on the available space in the vertical or horizontal ribbon, radio buttons can collapse into a single button. A single radio button works as a toggle, allowing you to cycle through each item in the list, or as a split button, where the top half of the radio button is a toggle button and clicking on the arrow icon in the lower half displays a drop-down of all items in the list.
To minimize the ribbon 1 The first button toggles the between the full ribbon state, the default ribbon state, and the minimize ribbon state. 2 The second drop-down button allows you to select the minimize ribbon state. These are the four minimize ribbon states: ■ Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles are displayed. ■ Minimize to Panel Titles: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab and panel titles are displayed.
System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONBGLOADRIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls whether ribbon tabs are loaded into memory by a background process during idle processor time. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab.
■ You can change the order of ribbon tabs. Click the tab you want to move, drag it to the desired position, and release. ■ You can change the order of ribbon panels. Click the panel you want to move, drag it to the desired position, and release. ■ You can convert toolbars into ribbon panels using the Customize User Interface Editor. See Ribbon in the Customization Guide. See also: ■ Ribbon To associate a tool palette group with a ribbon tab 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. RIBBON Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Closes the ribbon window. System Variables MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab.
Cursors in the Drawing Area In the drawing area, the appearance of the cursor changes depending on what you are doing.
This tool is available in most Autodesk products, and provides a common experience when you switch between products. Alternatively, you can use the 3DORBIT command to drag 3D views, and right-click for additional 3D viewing options. See also: ■ Use 3D Navigation Tools Quick Reference Commands NAVVCUBE The UCS Icon The drawing area displays an icon representing the XY axis of a rectangular coordinate system called the User Coordinate System, or UCS.
You can control whether the UCS icon is visible, and change its appearance, with the UCSICON command, Properties option. See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 455 ■ Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) on page 458 ■ Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon on page 462 Quick Reference Commands PLAN Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate system. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
Other Tool Locations 4 Use common tools in the classic menu bar, toolbars, tool palettes, status bars, shortcut menus, and Design Center to find more commands, settings, and modes. Access the Classic Menu Bar Display pull-down menus from the classic menu bar using one of several methods. You can also specify alternate menus. The classic menu bar can be displayed at the top of the drawing area. The classic menu bar is displayed by default in the AutoCAD LT Classic workspace.
See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 180 ■ “Pull-down and Shortcut Menus” in the Customization Guide To display the classic menu bar ■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click the Customization drop-down menu ➤ Show Menu Bar. Quick Reference System Variables MENUBAR Controls the display of the menu bar. Toolbars Use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars, and display tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars.
NOTE You can choose from a list of toolbars from the View tab, Windows panel on the ribbon. A toolbar displays as floating or docked. A floating toolbar displays anywhere in the drawing area, and you can drag a floating toolbar to a new location, resize it, or dock it. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. A toolbar docked at the top edge of the drawing area is located below the ribbon. You can move a docked toolbar by dragging it to a new docking location.
Status Bars The application and drawing status bars provide useful information and buttons for turning drawing tools on and off. Application Status Bar The application status bar displays the coordinate values of your cursor, drawing tools, and tools for Quick View and annotation scaling. You can view the drawing tool buttons as icons or text. You also can easily change the settings of snap, polar, osnap, and otrack from the shortcut menus of these drawing tools.
3 In the Tray Settings dialog box, select or clear the following display options: ■ Display Icons from Services. Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed. ■ Display Notifications from Services. Displays notifications from services such as Communications Center. When the Display Icons from Services option is cleared, this option is unavailable.
Drawing Status Bar The drawing status bar displays several tools for scaling annotations. Different tools display for model space and paper space. When the drawing status bar is turned on, it displays at the bottom of the drawing area. When the drawing status bar is turned off, the tools found on the drawing status bar are moved to the application status bar. When the drawing status bar is turned on, you can use the Drawing Status Bar menu to select which tool to display on the status bar.
When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool. The Command Line Window Enter Commands on the Command Line You can enter a command by using the keyboard. Some commands also have abbreviated names called command aliases. Commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts are displayed in a dockable and resizable window called the command window. The bottom line of the command window is called the command line.
Display Valid Commands and System Variables By default, AutoCAD LT automatically completes the name of a command or system variable as you type it. Additionally, a list of valid choices is displayed from which you can choose. Use the AUTOCOMPLETE command to control which automatic features that you want to use. If the automatic completion feature turned off, you can type a letter on the command line and press TAB to cycle through all the commands and system variables that begin with that letter.
You also can repeat a command by entering multiple, a space, and the command name, as shown in the following example: Command: multiple circle To cancel a command in progress, press ESC. Interrupt a Command with Another Command or System Variable Many commands can be used transparently: that is, they can be entered on the command line while you use another command. In the Command Reference, transparent commands are designated by an apostrophe in front of the command name.
To change the automatic completion options for the command line 1 Right-click anywhere within the command window. 2 On the menu, click AutoComplete. 3 Click an option. Quick Reference AUTOCOMPLETE Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the Command prompt. MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.
Enter System Variables on the Command Line System variables are settings that control how certain commands work. They can turn on or turn off modes such as Snap, Grid, or Ortho. They can set default scales for hatch patterns. They can store information about the current drawing and about program configuration. Sometimes you use a system variable in order to change a setting. At other times you use a system variable to display the current status.
2 To change the status of GRIDMODE, enter 1 for on or 0 for off. To retain the current value of the system variable, press Enter. To see a complete list of system variables 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Set Variable.. 2 At the Variable Name prompt, enter ?. 3 At the Enter Variable(s) to List prompt, press Enter. Quick Reference SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables. Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window You can edit text in the command window to correct or repeat commands.
To see more than one line of command history, you can scroll through the history or resize the command window by dragging its border. For commands with text output, such as LIST, you might need a larger command window, or you can press F2 to use the text window. Use the Text Window The text window is a window similar to the command window in which you can enter commands and view prompts and messages. The text window displays a complete command history for the current work session.
3 Right-click in the command window or text window. Click Paste to Command Line. The text is copied to the Clipboard and then pasted on the command line. After you press Enter, the commands are executed in sequence, like a script. You can also use Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to copy and paste text. To display the text window ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Text Window. The text window is displayed in front of the drawing area. Quick Reference COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.
System Variables LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session. Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line You can display prompts on the command line instead of using a dialog box, or switch back again. This option is useful primarily when using scripts.
FILEDIA and EXPERT are useful when you use scripts to run commands. To use the command line version of a command ■ For most commands, enter minus (-) in front of the command. ■ For dialog boxes that open and save files, set the FILEDIA system variable to 0. Quick Reference GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area. System Variables ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. CMDNAMES Displays the names of the active and transparent commands.
Undock, or float, the command window by dragging it away from the docking region. The docking region is an edge of the AutoCAD application window that allows you to dock a toolbar, palette, or the command window. You can move the floating command window anywhere on the screen and resize its width and height with the pointing device. Dock a floating command window again by dragging it to the docking region of the AutoCAD LT window.
To float the command window ■ Click the move handle (the double bars) on the left edge of the docked command window and drag the command window away from the docking region until it has a thick outline. Then drop it in the drawing area of the AutoCAD LT window. To make the floating command window transparent 1 In the floating Command window, click the Properties button and select Transparency.
To hide the command window ■ Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line. NOTE Some commands and system variables return values at the command line, so you may want to display the command line in those instances. To display the command line when it's hidden, press Ctrl+9. Alternate method: Quick Reference COMMANDLINE Displays the Command Line window. COMMANDLINEHIDE Hides the Command Line window. System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent.
You can customize right-click behavior to be time-sensitive, so that a quick right-click acts the same as pressing Enter, and a longer right-click displays a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus can be customized using a customization (CUIx) file. The main CUIx file is called acadlt.cuix by default. See also: ■ “Create Submenus” in the Customization Guide To display a shortcut menu 1 Move the cursor over an area, feature, or icon. 2 Right-click your mouse, or press the equivalent button on your pointing device.
5 Under Command Mode, select one of the following options to determine what happens when you right-click in the drawing area while a command is in progress: ■ Enter. Turns off the Command shortcut menu. Right-clicking is the same as pressing Enter. ■ Shortcut Menu: Always Enabled. Displays the Command shortcut menu. ■ Shortcut Menu: Enabled When Command Options Are Present. Displays the Command shortcut menu only when options are currently available in the Command prompt.
■ 2. History of recent input for the current command is displayed in the shortcut menu. ■ 4. History of recent input for all commands in the current session is displayed in the shortcut menu. ■ 8. Markers for recent input of point locations are displayed in the drawing. The default value is 15. 3 (Optional) At the Command prompt, enter cmdinputhistorymax. 4 Enter a value to control how many unique values entered at a prompt are remembered and available to be displayed as recent input.
TRAYSETTINGS Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray. U Reverses the most recent operation. ZOOM Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. System Variables CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. INPUTHISTORYMODE Controls the content and location of the user input history.
Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images You can create a tool by dragging objects from your drawing onto a tool palette. You can then use the new tool to create objects with the same properties as the object you dragged onto the tool palette. Tool palettes are tabbed areas within the Tool Palettes window. The items you add to a tool palette are called tools.
Insert Blocks and Attach References You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when you click and place a block or xref. This option ignores the angle specified under Rotation in the Tool Properties dialog box. The rotation angle prompt does not display if you drag the block or xref, or if you enter Rotate at the initial insertion Command prompt. Blocks that are placed by dragging from a tool palette must often be rotated or scaled after placement.
■ Create Task-Based Workspaces on page 180 ■ Add Content with DesignCenter on page 85 ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows on page 163 To open a block on a tool palette in the Block Editor 1 If the Tool Palettes window is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 On the block icon’s shortcut menu, click Block Editor. NOTE A block on a tool palette may reside in another drawing. The drawing that contains the block definition is opened in the Block Editor.
3 In the Flyout Options dialog box, select the tools that you want to hide or show on the flyout. Click OK. (You must select at least one tool.) 4 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click OK. To be prompted for a rotation angle when placing a block or xref from a tool palette 1 In a tool palette, right-click a block or xref tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, under Insert, click Prompt for Rotation. 3 In the drop-down list, select Yes. 4 Click OK.
PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. Create and Use Command Tools You can create a tool on a tool palette that executes a single command or a string of commands. You can add frequently used commands to a tool palette. When the Customize dialog box is open, you can drag tools from a toolbar or the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor to a tool palette.
NOTE Even though you will not make any changes in the Customize dialog box in this procedure, it must be displayed when you add command tools to a tool palette. 3 In the program, drag a command (button) from a toolbar to the tool palette and, without releasing the button on the pointing device, move the cursor to the place on the tool palette where you want the tool. A horizontal line appears to indicate where the tool will be located. 4 Release the button on the pointing device.
5 In the Tool Properties dialog box, change the name and description to appropriate strings for the macro or script. 6 Under Command, in the Command String box, enter a string of commands or a script. 7 Click OK. To use a command tool 1 On a tool palette, click a command tool or drag and drop the tool into the drawing that you want to use. 2 Follow any Command prompts that are shown. Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.
it over a docking area at the side of the application window. A docked window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the drawing area to be resized. Selecting this option also makes Anchor Right and Anchor Left available. ■ Anchor Left or Anchor Right. Attaches the palette window to an anchor tab to the left or right side of the application window. The palette window rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it.
NOTE Rollover behavior is available only when the Tool Palettes window is undocked. To change the transparency of the Tool Palettes window 1 In the Tool Palettes window, at the top of the title bar, click the Properties button. Click Transparency. 2 In the Transparency dialog box, under General, adjust the level of transparency for the Tool Palettes window when it does not have focus. 3 Under Rollover, adjust the level of transparency for the Tool Palettes window when it has focus. 4 Click OK.
System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. Control Tool Properties You can change the properties of any tool on a tool palette. Once a tool is on a tool palette, you can change its properties. For example, you can change the insertion scale of a block or the angle of a hatch pattern. To change tool properties, right-click on a tool, and click Properties to display the Tool Properties dialog box.
■ General properties. Override the current drawing property settings such as layer, color, and linetype. You can expand and collapse the property categories by clicking the arrow buttons. Specify a Different Icon for a Tool You can replace the icon for a tool with an image that you specify. This is useful when the automatically generated icon is too cluttered to be easily recognizable. To replace the image, right-click the tool in the tool palette and click Specify Image.
To change the property of a tool on a tool palette 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, click any property in the list of properties and specify the new value or setting. ■ Properties listed under the Insert, Attach, or Pattern category control object-specific properties such as scale, rotation, and angle. ■ Properties listed under the General category override the current drawing property settings such as layer, color, and linetype.
NOTE If you specify an image for a tool that has a flyout, that image is displayed on the tool palette for each tool on the flyout. To restore the image, name, and description of a flyout tool to the default settings 1 On a tool palette, right-click a tool. Click Properties. 2 In the Tool Properties dialog box, right-click in the image area. Click Remove Specified Image. 3 Click in the Name box and delete the text. 4 Click in the Description box and delete the text. 5 Click OK.
TPSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. Customize Tool Palettes You can add tools to a tool palette with several methods. You can create new tool palettes using the Properties button on the title bar of the Tool Palettes window and add tools to a tool palette with the following methods: ■ Drag any of the following onto your tool palette: geometric objects such as lines, circles, and polylines; dimensions; hatches; gradient fills; blocks; xrefs; raster images; tables.
■ You can associate a customizable tool palette group with each panel on the ribbon. Right-click the ribbon panel to display a list of available tool palette groups. NOTE If the source drawing file for a block, xref, or raster image tool is moved to a different folder, you must modify the tool that references it by right-clicking the tool and, in the Tool Properties dialog box, specifying the new source file folder.
Read-Only Tool Palettes If a tool palette file is set with a read-only attribute, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons. To apply a read-only attribute to a tool palette, right-click the tool palette (ATC) file in one of the following locations: ■ Windows XP: :\Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD LT 2012\\\
To display the tool palette group associated with a ribbon panel ■ Right-click a ribbon panel and click Show Related Tool Palette Group. To add text to a tool palette 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Text. 2 In the text box, add the text you want to display in the window. 3 If necessary, drag the text to the appropriate location in the window. To add a separator line to a tool palette 1 Right-click a blank area inside the Tool Palettes window. Click Add Separator.
For example, if you have several tool palettes that contain hatch patterns, use CUSTOMIZE to create a new palette group called Hatch Patterns. Then add all of your tool palettes that contain hatch patterns to the Hatch Pattern group. When you set the Hatch Pattern group current, only the tool palettes in that group are displayed in the Tool Palettes window.
To copy a tool palette from one group to another 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, under Palette Groups, select the tool palette that you want to copy. 3 Press Ctrl while you drag the selected tool palette to another group. A copy of the tool palette is displayed in the new location. 4 Click Close. To display a tool palette group 1 Right-click the title bar of the Tool Palettes window.
TPNAVIGATE Displays a specified tool palette or palette group. Save and Share Tool Palettes and Tool Palette Groups Export and import tool palette files (XTP) and tool palette group files (XPG) to share with others. NOTE For read-only tool palette files, a lock icon is displayed in a lower corner of the tool palette. This indicates that you cannot modify the tool palette beyond changing its display settings and rearranging the icons.
WARNING If you share tool palettes with someone who is not using the same AutoCAD-based product or release in which they were created, it is possible that the tools might not work properly or be accessible. To export a tool palette or tool palette group 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the Customize dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Export a tool palette. Under Palettes, right-click a tool palette. Click Export. ■ Export a tool palette group.
TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window. DesignCenter You can drag content from any source drawing to your current drawing. You can drag drawings, blocks, and hatches to a tool palette. Source drawings can be on your computer, on a network location, or on a website.
ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Understand the DesignCenter Window You can control the size, location, and appearance of DesignCenter. The Organization of the DesignCenter Window The DesignCenter window is divided into the tree view on the left side and the content area on the right side.
■ When DesignCenter is floating, use Auto-hide to set it to roll open and closed as the cursor moves across it. The DesignCenter Toolbar The DesignCenter toolbar controls navigation and display of information in the tree view and the content area. For information about these buttons, see the ADCENTER command. The same navigation and display options are available on the shortcut menu. Right-click in the DesignCenter content area to display the menu.
Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Access Content with DesignCenter The tree view in the left portion of the DesignCenter window and the four DesignCenter tabs help you find and load content into the content area.
Right-clicking in the tree view displays a shortcut menu with several related options. DesignCenter Tabs and Autodesk Seek The Open Drawings, History, and DC Online tabs, and Autodesk Seek provide alternate methods of accessing content. ■ Open Drawings. Displays a list of the drawings that are currently open. Click a drawing file and then click one of the definition tables from the list to load the content into the content area. ■ History. Displays a list of files opened previously with DesignCenter.
To change the source of the content displayed in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter window, click one of the following tabs: ■ Folders. Lists your local and network drives. ■ Open Drawings. Lists the drawings that are currently open. ■ History. Lists the last 20 locations accessed through DesignCenter. ■ DC Online. Displays online content from the Web. ■ Autodesk Seek.
To display the contents of the Favorites folder in DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button. When you are working in the tree view, you can use the Folders tab to navigate to the Favorites folder. To organize your DesignCenter Favorites folder 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, click the Favorites button. 3 Right-click the background in the content area. Click Organize Favorites.
Double-clicking an item in the content area displays successive levels of detail. For example, double-clicking a drawing image displays several icons, including an icon for blocks. Double-clicking the Blocks icon displays images of each block in the drawing. Add Content to a Drawing You can add content from the content area into your current drawing using several methods: ■ Drag an item to the graphics area of a drawing to add it using default settings, if any.
Add Items from DesignCenter to a Tool Palette You can add drawings, blocks, and hatches from DesignCenter to the current tool palette. ■ From the DesignCenter content area, you can drag one or more items to the current tool palette. ■ From the DesignCenter tree view, you can right-click and, from the shortcut menu, create a new tool palette from the current folder, drawing file, or block icon.
2 In DesignCenter, use one of the following methods: ■ Drag the item from the search results list into the content area. ■ Double-click the item in the search results list. ■ Right-click the item in the search results list. Click Load into Content Area. 3 In the DesignCenter content area, double-click the Blocks icon. To load the content area of DesignCenter with a symbol library 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Home.
To open a drawing from DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In DesignCenter, do one of the following: ■ Right-click the drawing icon in the DesignCenter content area. Click Open in Application Window. ■ Press Ctrl and drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to the drawing area. ■ Drag the drawing icon from the DesignCenter content area to a location anywhere outside the drawing area of the application window.
ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. System Variables ADCSTATE Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. Retrieve Content from the Web with DesignCenter Online DesignCenter Online provides access to pre-drawn content such as blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturers' content, and online catalogs.
In the DesignCenter Online window, two panes are displayed—a right pane and a left pane. The right pane is called the content area. The content area displays the items or folders that you selected in the left pane. The left pane can display one of the following four views: ■ Category Listing. Displays folders containing libraries of standard parts, manufacturer-specific content, and content aggregator websites. ■ Search. Searches for online content.
■ Random Number Identifier. DesignCenter Online assigns a random number identifier to each person who uses the feature. This identifier is used to retain your Collections and your Settings views each time DesignCenter Online is used. Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from DesignCenter Online to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved.
Understand DesignCenter Online Content Types With DesignCenter Online, content is categorized into folders. In the DesignCenter Online folders, you can retrieve discipline-specific content. The content that you can retrieve includes the following: ■ Standard Parts. Generic standard parts that are commonly used in design. These parts include blocks for architectural, mechanical, and GIS applications. ■ Manufacturers.
When you click a folder or an item inside a folder, the contents are displayed in the Content area. When you click a block, graphical and descriptive information about the block is displayed in the preview area. Search for Content When you search for online content with DesignCenter Online, you can query items with Boolean and multiple-word search strings in the Search view. You can access Search by clicking the magnifying glass or by choosing Search from the drop-down heading at the top of the left pane.
content area. The content is displayed in the preview area along with information about the content. You can drag the block directly from the preview area into a drawing or tool palette, or you can save it to your computer to be used later. See also: ■ Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings on page 1496 To search for content in DesignCenter Online 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Search.
To download content to your drawing 1 In DesignCenter Online, at the top of the left pane, click the heading, and then click Category Listing. 2 In the Category folders, click a content item to display it in the Preview area. 3 Drag the image from the Preview area into your drawing or tool palette. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
■ Pinpoint specific block references or text strings and automatically navigate to the containing file ■ Open any file from Content Explorer and zoom to any attribute within it ■ Save search parameters for instant access to design content that meets your design needs ■ Customize how search results are displayed to streamline your work environment NOTE Folders on the local computer or a network computer must be specified as watched folders before their contents can be cataloged and indexed.
NOTE Refer to the Content Service help for more information. Personal vs. Public Content Service Content Service is installed as either a personal service or a public service, depending on how it will be used. Personal Service ■ Whenever AutoCAD is installed, Content Service is automatically installed on the local system as a personal service. This means that you are going to be using AutoCAD to access design files and will be managing watched folders with Content Explorer in AutoCAD.
AutoCAD users on other machines will be able to search them and access them. NOTE Refer to the Content Service help file for more information on using Content Service on a network machine. Understand the Content Explorer Window Content Explorer is a powerful indexing and searching application with a compact and efficient design similar to the AutoCAD External References Manager window. Just as with other secondary windows in AutoCAD, you can configure transparency, auto-collapse, and docking preferences.
Image Feature Description Back Recalls the last results you viewed. The last results can be from browsing, searching, or recalling a saved search. For example, you’ve performed a search that returned multiple results. You double-clicked on a file to browse its contents. Click Back to return to the search results.
Image Feature Description You can click Back until you reach the first search performed since starting the Content Explorer session. Up Climbs the breadcrumbs path one step at a time. You can click Up until you reach the top level for the specified content source. Home Click Home to return to the top level of the Home. This view shows the local folders that are currently watched and indexed. Watched folders on the local machine can be added and removed at the top level of Home.
Image Feature Description Only the current content source is searched. Results are displayed based on the current filter settings. Recent Searches Click Search to perform a search. Click the Search drop-down arrow to display previous searches. Saved Searches Click Saved Searches to save the current search string. Select the saved search drop-down to display the list of saved searches. You can also delete saved searches, edit the names of existing searches, and save new searches in this context menu.
Image Feature Description everything is being displayed, based on your filter requisites. View Options Click View Options to cycle through icon size. Click the View Options drop-down arrow to configure the icon size, whether the folders are displayed in thumbnail or detailed view, which labels are displayed, and how the results are grouped. Configure Settings Click Configure Settings to add, remove, enable, and disable content sources.
To Determine State of Content Explorer Window ■ Enter CONTENTEXPLORERSTATE on the command line to retrieve a read-only variable indicating whether the Content Explorer window is open or closed. Understand How Content Is Indexed When a folder is specified as a watched folder, the Content Service, a companion component to Content Explorer, indexes all of the design files and design objects in the folder, including associated metadata.
Stage Icon Displayed Description 2 Thumbnail and DWG-specific file properties have been discovered. During this stage, all objects and any text in the drawing, including block attributes, are being indexed. You can now search for DWG properties, but you cannot explore the content within the file. 3 File is completely indexed. You can now explore or search for content within the file. ! There was an issue while indexing this file.
■ Tablestyles ■ Textstyles ■ Xrefs ■ Hyperlinks View Indexing Statistics in Content Explorer You can review the indexing status of your files on the Statistics tab of the Configure Settings dialog. To review the indexing statistics in Content Explorer 1 In Content Explorer, click Configure Settings. 2 On the Configure Settings dialog, select either your local computer or a network content source and click the Statistics tab.
NOTE The Statistics tab is also available in the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console. Refer to the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console help for more information. Understand Watched Folders A watched folder is a folder which has been selected for monitoring and indexing by the Content Service. A content source may be the local machine, Autodesk Seek, or designated network location. When you search a content source that is a local or network machine, all watched folders are searched.
files are read-only. However, users will not be able to access read-only content; they will only see content if they browse to it or if it meets search criteria. ■ If the top level of a folder hierarchy is shared and specified as a watched folder, all of the subfolders are watched and indexed, regardless of the share setting. If you do not want content inside a folder hierarchy to be shared, move it to a private location or build a new hierarchy of data to share.
You can search only one content source at a time. When searching your local drive or a network computer, you can search all watched folders for that content source at the same time or drill down to a specific folder for a smaller number of files and objects to search. Select content sources from the source drop-down menu. The content source type currently selected is represented by a unique icon. Icon Content Source Home. The Home content source represents all watched folders on the local drive.
See also: ■ Understand the Home Content Source on page 112 ■ Understand the Seek Content Source on page 114 ■ Understand the Network Content Source on page 117 To add a content source Add a new content source to the list of available sources for searching. 1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings icon. 2 On the Configure Settings dialog, click the Add Network Content button. 3 Enter the name of the computer on the network that you want to add to the Content Source list.
The network computer is added as an available content source. To remove a content source Remove content sources which you no longer want to browse or search, or which are no longer available. 1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings icon. 2 In the Content Sources list, right-click on the content source and select Remove. The content source is removed from the list and is no longer available for browsing or searching.
Understand the Home Content Source Home represents the local file system folders that are currently being indexed and monitored. Folders added to Home are watched for file system events, such as Add, Save, and Delete. An indexing process keeps a current catalog of the files and objects located in the watched folders. You can easily locate files in the specified folders based on search criteria, such as the date last updated, the author, a property value, or the file type.
Feature Description button on the Browse for Folder dialog box. NOTE Folders already added to Home for indexing are displayed with a red check mark and are grayed out. Remove Right-click on a folder and select Remove to remove the selected folder location from the Home content source. You can also drag a folder from the Home content source and drop it outside of the window to remove it from the Home. A folder which has been removed is no longer indexed.
NOTE Adding a folder to Home does not move the folder or its contents. To remove a folder from Home 1 Launch Content Explorer. 2 Click the Home icon to go to the Home content source. 3 Right-click on the folder you want to remove from Home and select Remove from the context menu. The folder is removed from Home and is no longer indexed. NOTE Folders removed from Home are not deleted from the file system.
content and insert it directly into your drawing. You can also access the external web site by clicking View products at Autodesk Seek. Access the products online by clicking View Products at Autodesk Seek. A web browser opens directly to the Autodesk seek site online. The results are displayed according the search you entered in Content Explorer. NOTE Refer to the section on Autodesk Seek for more information.
NOTE Click the Back button to return to the previous view. To insert and open content 1 Launch the Content Explorer window. 2 Click the Seek icon to go to the Seek content source. 3 Enter your search parameters in the Search field. 4 Navigate to the product that you want to insert into your drawing. 5 Perform one of the following actions: ■ To open and insert–Right-click on the file and select Open to download and open the file.
Understand the Network Content Source A network content source represents the file system folders that are currently being indexed and monitored on a network machine. Folders shown in a network content source are watched for file system events, such as Add, Save, and Delete. An indexing process keeps a current catalog of the files and objects located in the watched folders.
NOTE Folders on a network computer must be set as shared to be added as watched folders on that network computer. Only a network computer running Content Service can be added as a network content source in Content Explorer. If the network machine does not have AutoCAD or an AutoCAD vertical installed, you can specify watched folders for that machine through the Autodesk Content Service Administration Console. These folders must be set to shared before you can add them as a watched folder.
To add or remove watched folders with Content Explorer 1 In the Content Explorer window, click the Configure Settings icon. 2 Click Add Watched Folder to launch the Add Watched Folder dialog box. 3 Navigate to the folder that you want to add, select it, and click OK. The folder is added to the watched folder list. 4 To remove a folder, right-click on the folder in the Watched Folders list and select remove. The folder is no longer available for searching or browsing with Content Explorer.
NOTE If the folder you are looking for is not listed, verify that it is configured as a shared folder. 7 Click OK to add the selected folder to the watched list. Content Service will now index and monitor all activities in that folder. 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each folder that you want Content Service to watch. New watched folders automatically appear in the specified Network Content source in Content Explorer. 9 To remove a folder from the watched list, right-click the folder and select remove.
NOTE The search feature is relative. If you have browsed to a subfolder, Content Explorer will search files and folders within the current folder only. Search results for local and network content sources are displayed 100 to a page. Search results for the Seek content source are displayed 20 to a page. Search with Wild Cards You can use wild cards when specifying search criteria. Wild Cards * Represents any number of characters within a string. ? Represents a single character within a string.
For example, enter author:jsmith in the Search field to find all of the DWG files where the author was JSmith. More than one property:value pair can be used in a search string. For example, you can search for all of the drawing files identified as seating which were created by jsmith by entering objecttype:seating author:jsmith in the Search field. You can create custom properties and values for your files on the AutoCAD properties dialog box.
Operators AND Searches for x AND y in any order. The search granny AND smith returns anything containing both words. OR Searches for either x OR y. The search granny OR smith returns anything containing either word. NOT Searches for x but NOT y. The search granny NOT smith returns anything containing granny but not smith. "" Searches for the exact phrase contained within the quotation marks. The search "granny smith" returns everything containing the exact phrase granny smith.
Save, Edit, and Delete Searches in Content Explorer Saving and reusing previous searches can save you time. You can manage your saved searches in the Saved Searches drop-down list. The five most recently entered search strings are stored in the search field drop-down list. When you enter text that matches the beginning characters of a previously entered search string, that search string is recommended.
2 Click the Save Searches icon. 3 Enter a name for the saved search in the field. The search is added to the Saved Searches list. To use a saved search in Content Explorer Use saved searches at any time for fast access to your indexed files and objects. ■ and then select a saved search. Click the saved search drop-down The search is performed. Configure any sorting, icon size, or other settings to suit your needs.
TIP Perform a search for files recently modified and then save the configuration as a default search. Whenever the Content Explorer window launches, a fresh search is performed and the files you have been using most recently are displayed. Navigate a saved search in Content Explorer After performing a saved search, you can see the search that was performed by examining the breadcrumbs path. You can also return to a previous search or determine the folder path that was searched.
■ Click the back button to return to the previous browsing results. NOTE If your browse results are not what you expected, try changing your filter settings. Using breadcrumbs ■ When browsing, a breadcrumb path records your steps. ■ Click a breadcrumb to jump directly to that location. ■ Click the first breadcrumb to return to the top level of the content source that you are searching or browsing.
■ If the filter icon is illuminated , click the filter icon to disable it and see all objects regardless of date and time. To filter by type in Content Explorer 1 Click the Filter drop-down and select the Type tab. 2 Select the check boxes for the types of objects you want to display when you search or browse. By default, all objects are displayed when searching and browsing. 3 Once all of the settings are determined, click outside the filter menu to apply the results.
■ Type ■ Date Created ■ Date Modified ■ Location Click on a column to sort the results based on that column. Click the column again to reverse the sort order. Group Results Sometimes even after refining a search, it might be handy to group the results based on a certain property type. You can group results by Name, Type, Date Created, or Date Modified. When Group By is turned on, the results are collected together based on the column selected.
To display results without grouping them 1 Click the View Options disable all groupings. drop-down ➤ Group By ➤ None to 2 Click outside the Group By menu to apply the changes. To expand and collapse groups After selecting how results are grouped, you can control whether grouped results are hidden or displayed. ■ Click a group heading to expand or collapse that group. ■ Right-click a group header and then select Expand All or Collapse All to act on all the groups on the page.
To configure the display of folder results 1 Click the View Options drop-down and select either Thumbnail View or Detail View from the context menu. 2 If Thumbnail View is selected, you can also choose to display the column headers or the text labels for the folders by selecting their respective check boxes. Perform Tasks with Files in Content Explorer Once you locate your content, you can perform different AutoCAD tasks with the files.
Task Access Generally, the command will automatically highlight and zoom in to the text, except in these cases: ■ The text is a file-level property so there is nothing to highlight on the screen. ■ The text is an object definition property that has not been instantiated in the file. For example, a block attribute for a block that has not been inserted would not be higlighted. NOTE You can instead examine the properties on the block to see the text.
Task Access NOTE This feature is available only for block references. Go to Folder Right-click on an object and select Go to Folder to go directly to the folder containing the object. Right-click on a block definition and select Go to Folder to go directly to the parent file containing the block definition. Open Drawing Right-click on an object and select Open to Open the drawing containing the selected object.
Task Access Insert Right-click on the object and select Insert to insert the object into the current AutoCAD document. You can also drag and drop the object from the display window into the current document window to insert it. Properties Right-click on the object and select Properties to view a read-only list of the properties stored in the index for the object.
Tab Description the file is contained in a watched folder, when the file is saved, these properties are indexed and can be searched using Content Explorer. TIP The property values for the properties contained in the Summary tab are searched automatically with a general search string. Fill in these values as soon as possible so that you can start refining your searches using the property:value search feature. Statistics The Statistics tab displays the created and modified dates for the file.
If the file is already contained in a watched folder, the new property is automatically indexed. The property and value can be searched using Content Explorer. View Properties on an Indexed File or Object You can view which properties have been indexed on a file or an object. Knowing which properties have been indexed allows you to create stronger search strings. 1 Right-click on the object or file for which you want to view the properties and select Properties.
NOTE Properties in bold are default properties. TIP Advanced users can add custom properties to the basic search list by accessing the Connect.Service.exe.config file and following the instructions under the heading. 2 Select another object or file to view its properties as well.
The properties window automatically updates to display the properties that have been indexed on the selected file or object. Use Saved Searches with User-Created Properties in Content Explorer When the Saved Searches feature is used in conjunction with properties and searching, you can create fast access to the files you use most often. For example, if you frequently use furniture files when designing, you can add a FURNITURE TYPE property with suitable values, such as SEATING, to your furniture files.
If you accidentally uninstall the service, the Content Explorer interface will no longer work within AutoCAD. To reinstall Content Service 1 Launch the AutoCAD installation wizard. 2 Click the Tools and Utilities button. 3 On the Configure Settings screen, select one of these options under Autodesk Content Service: ■ For Personal Access - Select this option if you intend to use AutoCAD with Content Explorer on your personal machine.
■ The Content Service may have stopped running. Check to make sure that it is still running by typing Services in the Search box of the Windows Start menu. In the Services window, locate Autodesk Content Service in the list of services and make sure that the status is Started and the Startup Type is Automatic. ■ When trying to connect to a network computer, you may encounter firewall issues.
You cannot find the Plug-ins tab on the ribbon or the Explorer button does not show up on the Plug-ins tab If the Plug-ins tab does not show up on the ribbon or the Explorer button does not show up on the Plug-ins tab of the ribbon, one reason might be that Content Explorer is not loaded as an add-in. To manually reload Content Explorer as an add-in 1 Go to the AutoCAD command line. 2 Type CUILOAD. 3 If CONTENTEXPLORER is in the list, click the Unload button to unload it. 4 Browse for the contentexplorer.
Indexing process is producing errors There are various reasons why the indexing process might encounter an issue. If you suspect that there were issues when watched folders were being indexed, you can review the indexing statistics to find out more about the errors. To review the indexing statistics in Content Explorer 1 In Content Explorer, click Configure Settings. 2 On the Configure Settings dialog, select either your local computer or a network content source and click the Statistics tab.
Customize the Drawing Environment 5 You can change many window and drawing environment settings in the Options dialog box. For example, you can change how often a drawing is automatically saved to a temporary file, and you can link the program to folders containing files you use frequently. You can create workspaces to set up a drawing environment that is specific to your drawing needs. Experiment with different settings until you create the drawing environment that best fits your needs.
window frame background, status bar, title bar, application menu, toolbars, and palettes. ■ Background Colors (Options dialog box, Display tab). You specify the background colors used in the layout and Model tabs and the color used for prompts and crosshairs. ■ UCS Icon and Crosshairs Cursor (Options dialog box, 3D Modeling tab). You specify that the 3D display options and labels for the UCS icon can be set in the 3D Modeling tab of the Options dialog box.
■ Create Tooltips and Extended Help for Commands in the Customization Guide To set options 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click a tab. 3 Set options as desired. 4 Do either or both of the following: ■ Click Apply to record the current options settings in the system registry. ■ Click OK to record the current options settings in the system registry and close the Options dialog box.
2 In the View Transitions dialog box, check one or more of the following options: ■ Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom. Makes a smooth view transition during panning and zooming. ■ Enable Animation When View Rotates. Makes a smooth view transition when the view angle is changed. ■ Enable Animation During Scripts. Makes a smooth view transition while a script is running. 3 Set the transition speed by moving the slider.
Quick Reference Commands CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. CLEANSCREENOFF Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. System Variables APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES Applies transparency settings to all palettes.
DRAGP1 When hardware acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse. DRAGP2 When software acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse. EXEDIR Displays the folder path of the AutoCAD LT executable file.
INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette.
OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps. PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it.
ROLLOVEROPACITY Controls the transparency of a palette while the cursor moves over the palette. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILE Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Switch Between Model and Named Layouts You can control how you change between the Model and one or more named layouts.
Quick Reference Commands DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
EXEDIR Displays the folder path of the AutoCAD LT executable file. EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
LOCALE Displays a code that indicates the current locale. LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing.
PALETTEOPAQUE Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements.
Specify Application Fonts Change the fonts used in the application window and in the text window. You can specify the font that is displayed in both the application and text windows. To change the application font, use the Display tab (Options dialog box). NOTE This setting does not affect the text in your drawings. To change the font displayed in the Command window 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click Options.
CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps.
PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name.
VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy.
objects under it. The window becomes more opaque when it is moused over. This option is not available for all windows. You can hide all the palettes at once with HIDEPALETTES and turn on all hidden palettes with SHOWPALETTES. NOTE If a palette has been turned back on manually and moved, it is not affected by SHOWPALETTES. To anchor a dockable window 1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Propterties button. Click Allow Docking. 2 Click the Properties button again.
■ Double-click the anchor tab. To dock a window or palette 1 At the top of the window or palette title bar, click the Properties button. Click Allow Docking. 2 Click and drag the window or palette to a docking location on the right or left side of the drawing area. 3 When the outline of the window is displayed in the docking area, release the button. NOTE To place a toolbar in a docking region without docking it, hold down the Ctrl key as you drag.
Quick Reference Commands DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window. LOGFILEOFF Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON Writes the contents of the command history to a file. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. REVDATE Inserts or updates a block containing user name, current time and date, and drawing name. SHOWPALETTES Restores the display of hidden palettes.
CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. DCTCUST Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps.
PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed. RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. ROLLOVERTIPS Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. SAVEFILEPATH Stores the current automatic save file name.
VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Control the Display of Toolbars Similar to dockable windows, you can control the behavior of toolbars.
■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Docked Toolbars/Panels. ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Floating Windows. ■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Window Locking ➤ Docked Windows. A lock icon in the system tray indicates whether toolbars or dockable windows are locked. To unlock them temporarily, hold down Ctrl. Quick Reference Commands CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window.
SHOWPALETTES Restores the display of hidden palettes. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. System Variables APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes. CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
EXTNAMES Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. LOCKUI Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. LOGFILEMODE Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session.
PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. TOOLTIPS Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. USERNAME Specifies the user name. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
Features that cannot work properly on your system are turned off. Some features may work but not be recommended for use with your graphics card or 3D graphics display driver. Enable these features at your own risk. For information on the options available, see 3DCONFIG. NOTE If you are using a graphics card that does not support all of the available hardware effects, you can plot a drawing through software emulation.
driver.
To view the performance tuner log 1 On the status bar, click Performance Tuner. 2 In the Performance Tuning dialog box, click View Tune Log. 3 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To check for graphics card and driver certification updates 1 On the status bar, click Performance Tuner.. 2 In the Performance Tuning dialog box, click Check for Updates. A web page is displayed that describes the certification program. 3 Look for your graphics card and driver in the list.
You can easily switch between workspaces. The following task-based workspaces are already defined in the product: ■ 2D Drafting & Annotation ■ AutoCAD Classic When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding, or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve the display settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace.
icon in the Quick Access toolbar, status bar, Workspaces toolbar or the Window menu, or use the WORKSPACE command. ■ For more extensive changes, open the Customize User Interface dialog box to set up the workspace environment. You can control the display order of your saved workspaces and other options in the Workspace Settings dialog box.
To save a workspace 1 Tools ➤ Workspaces ➤ Save Current As. 2 In the Save Workspace dialog box, enter a name for the new workspace or select a name from the drop-down list. 3 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands WORKSPACE Creates, modifies, and saves workspaces and makes a workspace current. WSSAVE Saves a workspace. WSSETTINGS Sets options for workspaces. System Variables WORKSPACELABEL Controls whether to display the name of the current workspace in the status bar.
command line switches, you can also set up several program icons, each with different start-up options. Command line switches are parameters you can add to the acadlt.exe command ® ® line associated with a Microsoft Windows shortcut icon or the Windows Run dialog box. You can include several switches within a single command line. Valid switches are listed in the following table. /b Script name Designates a script to run after you start the program (b stands for batch process).
To start the program with a command line switch 1 Right-click the program icon on the Windows desktop. Click Properties. 2 In the AutoCAD LT Properties dialog box, Shortcut tab, in the Target box, edit the parameters for the switch using the following syntax: "drive:pathname\acadlt.exe" ["drawing name"] [/switch "name"] Valid switches are as follows: /b Script name (b stands for batch process) /t Template file name /c Configuration folder /v View name /w Default workspace For example, enter "d:\Au
186
Start and Save Drawings 187
188
Start a Drawing 6 All drawings start from either a default drawing template file or a custom drawing template file that you create. Drawing template files store default settings, styles, and additional data. Overview of Starting a New Drawing Before you start to draw, you need to decide what system of drawing units that you will use in the drawing, and then choose a drawing template file appropriate for those drawing units.
Customize a Drawing Template File By customizing your own drawing template file, you save yourself a lot of work changing settings, and you also ensure that the settings are standardized. Choose a drawing template file Start a new drawing, choose a drawing template ----- file similar to what you need for your discipline and units of measurement. Specify units and precision ----- Specify a unit format and precision.
Quick Reference Commands NEW Creates a new drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Specify Units and Unit Formats Before you start to draw, you decide on the units of measurement to be used in the drawing, and set the format, precision, and other conventions to be used in coordinates and distances.
Convert Drawing Units If you start a drawing in one system of measurement (imperial or metric) and then want to switch to the other system, use SCALE to scale the model geometry by the appropriate conversion factor to obtain correct distances and dimensions. For example, to convert a drawing created in inches to centimeters, you scale the model geometry by a factor of 2.54. To convert from centimeters to inches, the scale factor is 1/2.54 or about 0.3937.
2 At the Select Objects prompt, enter all. All objects in the drawing are selected for scaling. 3 Enter a base point of *0,0. Scaling is performed relative to the world coordinate system origin, and the location of the drawing origin will remain at the WCS origin. 4 Enter a scale factor of 0.3937 (the inverse of 2.54 centimeters per inch). All objects in the drawing are now smaller, corresponding to the equivalent distance in inches.
Set the Unit Format Conventions You can set the format and the number of decimal places to be used when you enter and display linear and angular units. Set Linear Units You can choose from several common conventions to represent the format and the precision of linear distances and coordinates displayed in the Properties palette, dynamic input, the status bar, and other locations. For example, here are three variations of dynamic input.
Quick Reference Commands UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. AUNITS Sets units for angles. AUPREC Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. LUNITS Sets linear units. LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates.
Select a Drawing Template File A set of drawing template files is installed with AutoCAD LT. Many of them are provided either for imperial or for metric units, and some are optimized for 3D modeling. All drawing template files have a .dwt file extension. While these drawing templates provide a quick way to start a new drawing, it is best to create drawing templates specific to your company and the type of drawings you create.
To start a drawing by selecting a template file 1 Click the Application menu, and click New menu ➤ Drawing. 2 In the Select Template dialog box, select a template from the list. 3 Click Open. To start a new drawing with no template file, click the arrow next to the Open button. Select one of the “no template” options from the list. To create a drawing template file from an existing drawing 1 Click the Application button, and click Open ➤ Drawing.
OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Add Identifying Information to Drawings You can keep track of your drawings more easily if you add keywords or other information to them. Use Windows Explorer Drawing properties can help you identify a drawing.
Display Properties in Fields You can assign any of the drawing properties to a field in a text object. For more information about fields, see Use Fields in Text on page 994. To display drawing properties for the active drawing 1 Click the Application button, and click Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Properties. 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click tabs to view the different types of information.
System Variables CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format. DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. TDCREATE Stores the local time and date the drawing was created. TDINDWG Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. TDUCREATE Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created. TDUPDATE Stores the local time and date of the last update/save.
This marker cannot be selected, but you can control whether it is displayed using the GEOMARKERVISIBILITY system variable. You can display the latitude and longitude of the cursor in the coordinate display area of the status bar. To specify the geographic location of a drawing 1 At the Command prompt, enter geographiclocation. 2 Click Enter the Location Values. 3 (Optional) Select the latitude and longitude format, or click Use Map to specify the nearest city and time zone.
5 Click to specify the north direction. A geographic marker is inserted at the specified location. To import a geographic location from Google Earth 1 Start Google Earth and select a location. 2 At the Command prompt, enter geographiclocation. 3 Click Import the current location from Google Earth. 4 Click Continue. 5 Click or specify the coordinates for the location in the World Coordinate System (WCS) X, Y, Z format. 6 Click to specify the north direction.
System Variables GEOLATLONGFORMAT Controls the format of the latitude or longitude values in the Geographic Location dialog box, and the coordinate status bar in Geographic mode. GEOMARKERVISIBILITY Controls the visibility of geographic markers.
204
Open or Save a Drawing 7 You can use several methods to find and open drawings, even damaged drawings. You can save and backup drawings automatically. Open a Drawing You open drawings to work on them just as you do with other applications. In addition, you can choose from several alternative methods. To open a drawing, you can ■ Use Open on the File menu to display the Select File dialog box.
Work on Drawings During Loading You can work on drawings before they are fully open. This is useful when you work on large drawings and you want to begin working immediately. To take advantage of this capability, three conditions are required. ■ The drawing must have been saved in paper space. ■ The OPENPARTIAL system variable must be set to 1. ■ The INDEXCTL system variable must be set to a non-zero value.
Missing Reference Types Description Shapes Missing shape files are often the result of custom shapes being used in a linetype. Browse to the missing linetype file, or place the shape file in the folder with the drawing or one of the support paths defined in the Options dialog box. You can use eTransmit to avoid missing files when sharing drawings with others outside of your company. For more information about eTransmit, see Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission on page 1486.
file is corrupt, you might be able to recover it. See Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files on page 229. Change the Default Drawing Folder Each time you start AutoCAD LT, the My Documents folder is the default path in each standard file selection dialog box. Alternatively, you can start AutoCAD LT in the folder specified in the “Start in” property of the shortcut. Set REMEMBERFOLDERS to 0 and use the revised shortcut to start AutoCAD LT from the folder specified in the “Start in” property.
Quick Reference Commands CLOSE Closes the current drawing. CLOSEALL Closes all currently open drawings. ETRANSMIT Packages a set of files for Internet transmission. OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. WHOHAS Displays ownership information for opened drawing files. System Variables DWGCHECK Checks drawings for potential problems when opening them. FILEDIA Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes.
ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable customizable files were installed. Work with Multiple Open Drawings You can preview and switch between open drawings and layouts in a drawing and transfer information between open drawings. Preview Open Drawings and Layouts With Quick View, you can easily preview and switch between open drawings and the model space and layouts in an open drawing.
Quick Reference Commands QVDRAWING Displays open drawings and layouts in a drawing in preview images. QVDRAWINGCLOSE Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing. QVLAYOUT Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. QVLAYOUTCLOSE Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. System Variables STATUSBAR Controls the display of the application and drawing status bars.
The Quick View Toolbar The toolbar displayed below the Quick View drawings has the following options: ■ Pin Quick View Drawings Pins the row of Quick View images of drawings so that it is always visible while you are working in the drawing editor. ■ New Creates a drawing that is also displayed at the end of the Quick View images row. ■ Open Opens an existing drawing that is also displayed at the end of the Quick View images row. ■ Close Closes all the Quick View images.
■ Close all drawings, except the drawing you want to work on, from the shortcut menu. ■ Close and save all open drawings. ■ Manage the display of the drawings in the windows to be tiled vertically or horizontally, or cascaded. You can access more options for layouts from the Quick View layout image. For more information, see Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing on page 215.
When a drawing is saved in DXF format, it does not have a stored image for a drawing. The image is not updated even if you use the UPDATETHUMBSNOW command. A static image is displayed instead. To preview and switch between open drawings 1 Click the status bar. A row of Quick View images is displayed at the bottom of the program. 2 Click the Quick View image you want to work on. To preview and switch between layouts in a drawing 1 Click the status bar.
Quick Reference Commands QVDRAWING Displays open drawings and layouts in a drawing in preview images. QVDRAWINGCLOSE Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing. SYSWINDOWS Arranges windows and icons when the application window is shared with external applications. UPDATETHUMBSNOW Manually updates thumbnail previews for named views, drawings, and layouts. System Variables QVDRAWINGPIN Controls the default display state of preview images of drawings.
You can plot or publish when you move the cursor over a Quick View image of a layout. The toolbar displayed below the Quick View images of drawings has the following options: ■ Pin Quick View Layouts Pins the row of Quick View images of layouts so that it is always visible while you are working in the drawing editor. ■ New Layout Creates a layout that is also displayed as a Quick View image at the end of the row. ■ Publish Launches the Publish dialog box to publish the layouts.
TIP If you often work with many open drawings or many layouts in a drawing, you can use multiple monitors to display complete rows of Quick View images. If a row of Quick View images extends beyond the application display area, scroll arrows display on the left or right side of the row. You can scroll to view the other images. NOTE The Quick View feature will not be fully functional if the drawing is still opening and not fully loaded.
2 On the status bar, click . Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. QVLAYOUT Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. QVLAYOUTCLOSE Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. UPDATETHUMBSNOW Manually updates thumbnail previews for named views, drawings, and layouts.
■ Drag selected objects from one drawing to another with the right-click button on your pointing device. ■ Use Match Properties (MATCHPROP) to copy properties from objects in one drawing to objects in another drawing. ■ Use object snaps, the Copy with Basepoint (COPYBASE) command, and the Paste to Original Coordinates (PASTEORIG) command to ensure accurate placement.
Save a Drawing You save drawing files for later use just as you do with other applications. You can also set up automatic saving and backup files and save only selected objects. When you work on a drawing, you should save it frequently. Saving protects you from losing work in the event of a power failure or other unexpected event. If you want to create a new version of a drawing without affecting the original drawing, you can save it under another name. The file extension for drawing files is .
NOTE The SAVEFIDELITY system variable does not effect saving a drawing to the drawing or DXF file formats. Annotative objects may have multiple scale representation. When visual fidelity is on, annotative objects are decomposed and scale representations are saved (in an anonymous block) to separate layers, which are named based on their original layer and appended with a number.
If a drawing file is created in a different language version of the operating system, the following will occur: ■ If support for the language is installed, the file name characters are visible in Windows Explorer. ■ If support for the language is not installed, the file name characters appear as a series of boxes in Windows Explorer and a dialog box is displayed offering to install the language pack.
NOTE When working with the 64-bit release of AutoCAD LT, you can work more efficiently with large objects and drawings. However, the drawing files you create might be too large to open with the 32-bit release of AutoCAD LT.
To maintain large object compatibility with legacy drawing file formats 1 Click the Application button, click Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, under File Save, select Maintain Drawing Size Compatibility. 3 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. QSAVE Saves the current drawing using the specified default file format. QUIT Exits the program.
DWGPREFIX Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing. DWGTITLED Indicates whether the current drawing has been named. FILEDIA Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings.
Find a Drawing File You can search for a drawing using name, location, and date filters, properties such as keywords that you added to the drawing, or text strings containing a specific word or phrase. ■ Use the Search tool in Microsoft® Windows® to search for drawings using name, location, and date filters. You can also specify a word or phrase contained in the drawing file. You can search for all textual data except text in tables and fields, and xrefs within drawing files.
6 Select one or more files from the search results. Click OK. 7 In the Select File dialog box, click Open. Quick Reference Commands OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. Specify Search Paths and File Locations You can set the search path to drawing support files such as text fonts, drawings, linetypes, and hatch patterns. You also can specify the location of temporary files, which is important when working in a network environment.
To change a search path 1 Click the Application button. At the bottom of the Application menu, click the Options button. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click the plus sign (+) to the left of the kind of path you want to change. 3 Select the path you want to change. 4 Click Browse, and then search drives and folders until you find the one you want. 5 Select the drive and folder that you want to use. Click OK. Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
Repair, Restore, or Recover Drawing Files 8 If a drawing file is damaged or if your program terminates unexpectedly, you can recover some or all of the data by using commands to find and correct errors, or by reverting to a backup file. Repair a Damaged Drawing File If a drawing file is damaged, you can recover some or all of the data by using commands to find and correct errors. Repair and Recovery When an error occurs, diagnostic information is recorded in the acad.
Example: Auditing Files Auditing a file generates a description of problems with a drawing file and recommendations for correcting them. As you start the audit, you specify whether you want the program to try to fix the problems it encounters.
2 Restart the program. 3 In the Drawing Recovery window, under Backup Files, double-click the drawing node to expand it. On the list, double-click one of the drawing or backup files to open it. If the program detects that the drawing has been damaged, a message is displayed asking if you want to proceed. 4 Enter y to proceed. As the program attempts to repair the drawing, a diagnostic report is displayed.
Quick Reference Commands AUDIT Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors. DRAWINGRECOVERY Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. RECOVER Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. RECOVERALL Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. System Variables AUDITCTL Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file.
Use Backup Files In the Open and Save tab (Options dialog box), you can specify that backup files are created when you save drawings. If you do, each time you save a drawing, the previous version of your drawing is saved to a file with the same name and a .bak file extension. The backup file is located in the same folder as the drawing file. You can revert to your backup version by renaming the .bak file in Windows Explorer to a file with a .dwg extension.
3 Click File menu ➤ Rename 4 Enter a new name using the .dwg file extension. 5 Open the file as you would open any other drawing file. Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. Recover from a System Failure A hardware problem, power failure, or software problem can cause this program to terminate unexpectedly. If this happens, you can restore the drawing files that were open.
For each drawing, you can open and choose from the following files if they exist: ■ DrawingFileName_recover.dwg ■ DrawingFileName_a_b_nnnn.sv$ ■ DrawingFileName.dwg ■ DrawingFileName.bak NOTE The drawing, backup, and recover files are listed in the order of their time stamps—the time when they were last saved. Double-click a top-level drawing node listed under Backup Files to display up to four files as listed above. Right-click any node under Backup Files to display shortcut menu options.
2 In the Drawing Recovery Manager, under Backup Files, double-click a drawing node to list all available drawing and backup files. 3 Double-click a file to open it. If the drawing file is damaged, the drawing is automatically repaired, if possible. To remove a drawing from the Drawing Recovery Manager 1 If necessary, click the Application button, and click Drawing Utilities ➤ Open the Drawing Recovery Manager. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Restore the drawing and then save it.
RECOVER Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. System Variables DRSTATE Indicates whether the Drawing Recovery Manager window is open or closed. ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. RECOVERYMODE Controls whether drawing recovery information is recorded after a system failure. REPORTERROR Controls whether an error report can be sent to Autodesk if the program closes unexpectedly.
238
Control the Drawing Views 239
240
Change Views 9 You can magnify the details in your drawing for a closer view or shift the view to a different part of the drawing. If you save views by name, you can restore them later. Pan or Zoom a View You can pan to reposition the view in the drawing area or zoom to change magnification. With the Realtime option of PAN, you pan dynamically by moving your pointing device. Like panning with a camera, PAN does not change the location or magnification of objects on your drawing; it changes only the view.
Zoom to Magnify a Specified Rectangular Area You can quickly zoom on a rectangular area of your drawing by specifying two diagonal corners of the area you are interested in. The lower-left corner of the area you specify becomes the lower-left corner of the new display. The shape of the zoom area you specify does not correspond exactly to the new view, which must fit the shape of the viewport. Zoom in Real Time With the Realtime option, you zoom dynamically by moving your pointing device up or down.
See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports on page 320 ■ Pointing Devices ■ Toolbars on page 36 To pan by dragging 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Pan. 2 When the hand cursor is displayed, click and hold your pointing device as you move. NOTE If you are using a wheel mouse, hold down the wheel button and move the mouse. 3 To exit, press Enter or Esc, or right-click. To pan by specifying points 1 Click View menu ➤ Pan ➤ Point. 2 Specify a base point. This is the point you want to change.
3 Specify a second (pan to) point. This is the new location for the point you selected first. To zoom by dragging 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Realtime. 2 When the magnifying glass cursor is displayed, click and hold your pointing device and drag vertically to zoom in and out. 3 To exit, press Enter or Esc, or right-click. To zoom in to an area by specifying its boundaries 1 Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Window.
To restore the previous view ■ Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Previous. Zoom Previous restores only the view magnification and position, not the previous content of an edited drawing. Quick Reference Commands PAN Moves the view planar to the screen. UNDO Reverses the effect of commands. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. VTOPTIONS Displays a change in view as a smooth transition.
RTDISPLAY Controls the display of raster images and OLE objects during Realtime ZOOM or PAN. VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth. ZOOMFACTOR Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel moves forward or backward.
Display and Use Wheels Pressing and dragging on a wedge of a wheel is the primary mode of interaction. After a wheel is displayed, click one of the wedges and hold down the button on the pointing device to activate the navigation tool. Drag to reorient the current view. Releasing the button returns you to the wheel. To display a wheel Do one of the following: ■ Click View menu ➤ SteeringWheels. ■ Right-click over the drawing window and click SteeringWheels. ■ On the status bar, click SteeringWheels.
The 2D Navigation wheel wedges have the following options: ■ Pan. Repositions the current view by panning. ■ Zoom. Adjusts the magnification of the current view. ■ Rewind. Restores the most recent view orientation. You can move backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Navigation Tools The navigation tools reorient the current view of a model.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Pan Tool The Pan tool repositions the current view of the model by panning. When the pan tool is active, the Pan cursor (a four-sided arrow) is displayed. Dragging the pointing device moves the model in the same direction. For example, dragging upward moves the model up while dragging downward moves the model down.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Rewind Tool The Rewind tool restores the most recent view. You can also move backward or forward through previous views. As you use the navigation tools to reorient the view of a model, the previous view is saved to the navigation history. The navigation history holds a representation of the previous views of the model along with a thumbnail.
3 While holding down the button on your pointing device, drag to the left or to the right to restore a previous view. Dragging to the left restores an older previous view. Dragging to the right restores a view that is newer than the one you are currently viewing. You must have previously used the Rewind tool to see views that are available on the right. The current position in the navigation history is indicated by the orange box that is dragged along the Rewind History panel.
■ Click and drag. If you click the Zoom tool and hold down the button on your pointing device, you can adjust the magnification of the model by dragging up and down. When changing the magnification of a model with the Zoom tool, you cannot zoom in any further than the focus point or out past the extents of the model. To zoom a view with a single click 1 Display the 2D Navigation wheel. 2 Click the Zoom wedge. 3 Click Close to exit the wheel.
Save and Restore Views When you save specific views by name, you can restore them for layout and plotting or when you need to refer to specific details. A named view created with the VIEW command consists of a specific magnification, position, and orientation. In each drawing session, you can restore up to 10 previous views displayed in each viewport using ZOOM Previous. Named views are saved with a drawing and can be used any time.
To display the previous view during PAN Realtime and ZOOM Realtime ■ Click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom drop-down ➤ Previous To restore a saved view 1 Do one of the following: ■ If you have more than one viewport in model space, click inside the viewport that contains the view you want to restore. ■ If you are working in a layout, select the viewport. 2 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 3 In the View Manager, Views list, select the view that you want to restore. 4 Click Set Current.
4 Specify the new property value by entering a new value or by selecting from a list of values. Click OK. To delete a named view 1 Click View tab ➤ Views panel ➤ View Manager. 2 In the View Manager, click a view, and then click Delete. 3 Click OK. To view a list of saved viewport arrangements ■ Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named. The list of saved viewports is displayed in the Viewports dialog box, Named Viewports tab.
Define a Parallel Projection You can define a parallel projection. To determine the point or angle in model space, you can ■ Choose a preset 3D view from the View toolbar. ■ Enter a coordinate or angles that represent your viewing location in 3D. ■ Change to a view of the XY plane of the current UCS, a saved UCS, or the WCS. Viewing in 3D is available only in model space. If you are working in paper space, you cannot use 3D viewing commands such as VPOINT or PLAN to define paper space views.
Choose Preset 3D Views You can select predefined standard orthographic and isometric views by name or description. A quick way to set a view is to choose one of the predefined 3D views. You can select predefined standard orthographic and isometric views by name or description. These views represent commonly used options: Top, Bottom, Front, Left, Right, and Back.
the world coordinate system unless you change the WORLDVIEW system variable. The conventions for defining standard views differ between architectural (AEC) and mechanical design. In AEC design, the perpendicular view of the XY plane is the top or plan view; in mechanical design, the perpendicular view of the XY plane is the front view. You can rotate a view using DDVPOINT. The following illustration shows a view defined by two angles relative to the X axis and the XY plane of the WCS.
■ Enter 1,0,0 for a right side view. ■ Enter 1,-1,1 for an isometric view. To set standard views with VPOINT (mechanical design convention) 1 Click View menu ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint. 2 Enter a coordinate according to the viewpoint you want: ■ Enter 0,1,0 for a top view. ■ Enter 0,0,1 for a front view. ■ Enter 1,0,0 for a right side view. ■ Enter 1,1,1 for an isometric view. This view is identical to one with a right-out of 45 degrees and a top-out of 35.267 degrees.
You can restore the view and coordinate system that is the default for most drawings by setting the UCS orientation to World and then setting the 3D view to Plan View. To change the current view to the XY plane 1 Click View menu ➤ 3D Views ➤ Plan View. 2 Select one of the following options: ■ Current (for the current UCS) ■ World (for the WCS) ■ Named (for a saved UCS) NOTE PLAN changes the viewing direction; it does not change the current UCS.
Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects You can create a hidden-line representation or a simple shaded picture of the objects displayed in the current viewport. Hide Lines in 3D Objects Suppress the display of objects—partly or entirely—that are located behind other objects in three-dimensional views. You can create a hidden-line representation of the objects displayed in the current viewport.
HIDE suppresses all hidden lines in a view. When the view is regenerated, all objects are displayed normally. See also: ■ Set Options for Plotted Objects on page 1209 To remove all hidden lines from a view ■ Click View menu ➤ Hide. The hidden lines reappear when the drawing is regenerated. To change the display properties of hidden lines 1 At the Command prompt, enter hlsettings. 2 In the Hidden Line Settings dialog box, change the settings. 3 Click OK.
To turn hidden lines on or off for printing objects not in layout views 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup. 2 In the Page Setup Manager, select a page setup and click Modify. 3 In the Page Setup dialog box under Plot Options, select Hide Paperspace Objects. Quick Reference Commands HIDE Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed. HLSETTINGS Changes the display properties of hidden lines. MVIEW Creates and controls layout viewports.
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY Specifies the display of intersection polylines. OBSCUREDCOLOR Specifies the color of obscured lines. OBSCUREDLTYPE Specifies the linetype of obscured lines. Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Generate a simple shaded picture of the objects displayed in the current viewport. You can create a simple shaded picture of the objects displayed in the current viewport. Shading fills certain objects with a solid color and removes the display of lines that are located behind the shaded objects.
■ 16 Color Hidden Line. Simulates a hidden-line display. The faces of polygons are painted in the background color, and the color of visible edges is determined by the color of the object. You can use any kind of monitor, including monochrome. ■ 16 Color Filled. Draws faces in their original color but does not shade them. The program hides hidden lines and traces visible edges in the background color. You can use this setting on any kind of monitor. NOTE The SHADE command produces only flat shading.
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY Controls the display of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. SHADEDGE Controls the shading of edges. SHADEDIF Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light.
Use Viewing Tools 10 Navigate your drawing in different views with the viewing tools. Navigate with SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that allow you to access different 2D and 3D navigation tools from a single tool. Overview of SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that are divided into different sections known as wedges. Each wedge on a wheel represents a single navigation tool.
(except the 2D Navigation wheel) are available in two different styles: big and mini. The size of a wheel controls how large or small the wedges and labels appear on the wheel; the opacity level controls the visibility of the objects in the model behind the wheel. Wheel Tooltips, Tool Messages, and Tool Cursor Text Tooltips are displayed for each button on a wheel as the cursor is moved over them.
The display of a model can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the magnification at which objects are displayed, rotating the model among other ways of changing the orientation of the model using the tools on SteeringWheels and 3Dconnexion 3D mouse. You can create a view that defines an area of a model as the Home view and use preset views to restore known viewpoints of a model with the Autodesk® ViewCube® navigation tool. Pan Tool The Pan tool repositions the current view of the model by panning.
2 Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button. The cursor changes to the Pan cursor. 3 Drag to reposition the model. 4 Release the wheel or button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Rewind Tool The Rewind tool restores the most recent view. You can also move backward or forward through previous views.
CAPTURETHUMBNAILS is set to a value of 2. You can control when thumbnails are generated for view changes in the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box. To restore the previous view 1 Display a wheel. 2 Click the Rewind wedge. To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel 1 Display a wheel. 2 Click and hold the Rewind wedge. The Rewind History panel is displayed. 3 While holding down the button on your pointing device, drag to the left or to the right to restore a previous view.
Quick Reference Commands NAVSWHEEL Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Zoom Tool The Zoom tool adjusts the magnification of the current view of a model. You use the Zoom tool to change the zoom magnification of a model. The following mouse click and key combinations are available to control how the Zoom tool behaves: ■ SHIFT+click.
NOTE When you use the Zoom tool from the Full Navigation wheel or the View Object wheel, the point in the view where you click to zoom becomes the Center point for future Orbit operations until you either use the Zoom tool again or use the Center tool. If you press CTRL before you click the Zoom wedge, the Center point does not change. Zoom Constraints When changing the magnification of a model with the Zoom tool, you cannot zoom in any further than the focus point or out past the extents of the model.
To zoom a view in and out by dragging 1 Display the 2D Navigation wheel, one of the Full Navigation wheels, or the mini View Object wheel. 2 Click and hold down the Zoom wedge. The cursor changes to the Zoom cursor. 3 Drag vertically to zoom in or out. 4 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a wheel is displayed 1 Display one of the wheels other than the big Tour Building wheel.
You start navigation tools by clicking one of the buttons on the navigation bar or selecting one of the tools from a list that is displayed when you click the smaller portion of a split button. The following unified navigation tools are available from the navigation bar: ■ SteeringWheels. Collection of wheels that offer rapid switching between specialized navigation tools. ■ 3Dconnexion. Set of navigation tools used to reorient the current view of a model with a 3Dconnexion 3D mouse.
System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports. Reposition and Reorient the Navigation Bar The navigation bar can be freely aligned along the edges of the current window. Drag the grip handle on the navigation bar to reposition it along one of the sides of the current window If the side of the window that the navigation bar is aligned to is not long enough to show the entire navigation bar, it is truncated to fit.
System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports. Control the Display of Navigation Tools on the Navigation Bar You can control which unified and product-specific navigation tools are displayed on the navigation bar with the Customize menu. The Customize menu is displayed by clicking the Customize button on the lower-right side of the navigation bar. From the Customize menus, you click the navigation tools that you want displayed on the navigation bar.
Quick Reference Commands NAVBAR Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface. System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports. Use 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to Navigate Views A 3Dconnexion 3D mouse is used to reorient and navigate a model’s view. The device has a pressure sensitive controller cap designed to flex in all directions. Push, pull, twist, or tilt the cap to pan, zoom, and rotate the current view.
You can change the behavior of the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse from the navigation bar. 3Dconnexion options on the navigation bar Option Description Example 2D Mode Navigates the view using only 2D navigation options. The view moves in the direction of the controller cap. Move the controller cap to pan and zoom the view. 3Dconnexion Settings Displays 3Dconnexion Settings dialog box to change the settings of the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse. Adjust the navigation speed used for view changes.
System Variables NAVBARDISPLAY Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports.
Display Multiple Views in Model Space 11 To see several views at the same time, you can split the drawing area of the Model layout into separate viewing areas called model space viewports. You can save arrangements of model space viewports for reuse at any time. Set Model Space Viewports On the Model layout, you can split the drawing area into one or more adjacent rectangular views known as model space viewports. Viewports are areas that display different views of your model.
You can also create viewports on a named (paper space) layout. You use those viewports, called layout viewports, to arrange the views of your drawing on a sheet. You can move and resize layout viewports. By using layout viewports, you have more control over the display; for example, you can freeze certain layers in one layout viewport without affecting the others. For more information about layouts and layout viewports, see Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) on page 299.
You can easily modify model space viewports by splitting and joining them. If you want to join two viewports, they must share a common edge of the same length. To subdivide a viewport on the Model layout 1 If you have more than one viewport, click inside the viewport you want to subdivide. 2 To indicate how many model space viewports should be created, do one of the following: ■ Click View menu ➤ Viewports ➤ 2 Viewports. ■ Click View menu ➤ Viewports ➤ 3 Viewports.
Quick Reference Commands MODEL Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. System Variables MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. CTAB Returns the name of the current layout in the drawing. TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
To make a viewport current ■ Click anywhere within the viewport border. To cycle through viewports without clicking ■ Press Ctrl+ R repeatedly. Quick Reference System Variables CVPORT Displays the identification number of the current viewport. VIEWCTR Stores the center of view in the current viewport. VIEWSIZE Stores the height of the view displayed in the current viewport, measured in drawing units.
You do not have to set up viewports and views every time you need them. With VPORTS, viewport arrangements can be saved and later restored by name. Settings that are saved with viewport arrangements include ■ The number and position of viewports ■ The views that the viewports contain ■ The grid and snap settings for each viewport ■ The UCS icon display setting for each viewport You can list, restore, and delete the available viewport arrangements.
2 In the Viewports dialog box, Named Viewports tab, select the name of the viewport configuration you want to delete. 3 Press DELETE. To view a list of saved viewport arrangements ■ Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named. The Viewports dialog box is displayed. All saved viewport arrangements in the drawing are listed on the Named Viewports tab under Named Viewports. Quick Reference Commands RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.
288
Organize Drawings and Layouts 289
290
Create Single-View Drawings (Model Space) 12 To create a two dimensional drawing that has one view, you can create the drawing and its annotation entirely in model space. This is the traditional method for creating drawings with AutoCAD LT®. With this method, you create the building, mechanical part, or geographic area that you want to represent at full scale (1:1), but you create the text, dimensions, and the title block of the drawing at a scale to match the intended plot scale.
With this method, you always draw geometric objects at full scale (1:1) and text, dimensions, and other annotation at a scale that will appear at the correct size when you output the drawing. For information about using annotative objects and scaling annotations automatically, see Scale Annotations on page 860. See also: ■ Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) on page 299 Quick Reference Commands MODEL Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout.
Draw, Scale, and Annotate in Model Space If you draw and plot from model space, you must determine and apply a scale factor to annotate objects before you plot. You can draw and plot entirely from model space. This method is useful primarily for two-dimensional drawings that have a single view. With this method, you use the following process: ■ Determine the unit of measurement (drawing units) for the drawing. ■ Specify the display style for the drawing unit.
Set the Scale for Annotations and Blocks Before you draw, you should set the scale for dimensions, annotations, and blocks in your drawings. Scaling these elements beforehand ensures that they are at the correct size when you plot the final drawing. You should enter the scale for the following objects: ■ Text. Set the text height as you create text or by setting a fixed text height in the text style (STYLE). ■ Dimensions.
Sample Scale Ratios The sample architectural scale ratios in the table can be used to calculate text sizes in model space. Scale Scale factor To plot text size at Set drawing text size to 1 cm = 1 m 100 3 mm 30 cm 1/8" = 1'-0" 96 1/8" 12" 3/16" = 1'-0" 64 1/8" 8" 1/4" = 1'-0" 48 1/8" 6" 3/8" = 1'-0" 32 1/8" 4" 1/2" = 1'-0" 24 1/8" 3" 3/4" = 1'-0" 16 1/8" 2" 1" = 1'-0" 12 1/8" 1.5" 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 8 1/8" 1.
3 As you change unit settings, you can see examples under Sample Output. ■ Under Length, select a unit type and level of precision. This determines the display style for linear drawing units. ■ Under Drawing Units for DesignCenter Blocks, select the unit that you want used to scale blocks, images, or other content inserted into the drawing. If you do not want inserted content to be scaled, select Unitless. ■ Under Angle, select an angle type and precision.
STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables CELTSCALE Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.
298
Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) 13 Paper space is a sheet layout environment where you can specify the size of your sheet, add a title block, display multiple views of your model, and create dimensions and notes for your drawing. Quick Start for Layouts There are two distinct working environments, or “spaces,” in which you can create objects in a drawing. Typically, a model composed of geometric objects is created in a three-dimensional space called model space.
Each layout viewport is like a picture frame containing a “photograph” of the model in model space. Each layout viewport contains a view that displays the model at the scale and orientation that you specify. You can also specify which layers are visible in each layout viewport. After you finish arranging the layout, you turn off the layer that contains the layout viewport objects. The views are still visible, and you can plot the layout without displaying the viewport boundaries.
PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports. TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
■ Initialize a named layout. ■ Specify layout page settings such as output device, paper size, drawing area, output scale, and drawing orientation. ■ Insert a title block into the layout (unless you have started with a drawing template that already has a title block). ■ Create a new layer to be used for layout viewports. ■ Create layout viewports and position them on the layout. ■ Set the orientation, scale, and layer visibility of the view in each layout viewport.
PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports. VPMAX Expands the current layout viewport for editing. VPMIN Restores the current layout viewport.
Work in Model Space By default, you start working in a limitless drawing area called model space. In model space, you draw, view, and edit your model. You first decide whether one unit represents one millimeter, one centimeter, one inch, one foot, or whatever unit is most convenient or customary in your business. You then create your model at 1:1 scale. In model space, you can view and edit model space objects. The crosshairs cursor is active over the entire drawing area.
PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current. Work on a Named Layout Named layouts access an area called paper space. In paper space, you place your title block, create layout viewports to display views, dimension your drawing, and add notes. In paper space, one unit represents the actual distance on a sheet of paper.
■ Copy a layout and its settings from the current drawing file. ■ Import a layout from an existing drawing template (DWT) file or drawing (DWG) file. NOTE You can create multiple layouts in a drawing; each layout can contain different page setup settings. However, to avoid confusion when transmitting and publishing drawings, it is usually recommended that you create only one named layout for each drawing.
To select all layouts ■ Right-click any layout tab. Click Select All Layouts. Quick Reference LAYOUT Creates and modifies drawing layouts. LAYOUTWIZARD Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings. MODEL Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout. MSPACE In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport. MVIEW Creates and controls layout viewports.
CVPORT Displays the identification number of the current viewport. LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT Controls whether a viewport is created automatically on each new layout added to a drawing. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. PLOTROTMODE Controls the orientation of plots. TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
NOTE If you use PLOT while a viewport is maximized, the layout is restored before the Plot dialog box is displayed. If you save and close the drawing while a viewport is maximized, the drawing opens with the named layout restored. If you choose to switch to the default model space to make changes, the layer visibility settings are the settings for the drawing as a whole, not the settings for that particular layout viewport.
You are now in paper space. You can create and modify objects on the layout. ■ If you are in model space and want to switch to another layout viewport, double-click within another layout viewport, or press Ctrl+R to cycle through the existing layout viewports. To edit in a maximized layout viewport 1 Click the boundary of the layout viewport to select it. NOTE You can maximize a locked viewport and modify objects. When you restore the viewport, it is locked again.
VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE Indicates whether the viewport is maximized or not. Export a Layout to Model Space You can export all visible objects from the current layout to model space. You can export all visible objects from the current layout to the model space with the EXPORTLAYOUT command. Objects that are outside the boundaries of “paper” in the layout are also exported. Some objects are not exported to the model space drawing.
Object Type Representation in Exported Drawing Annotative objects Objects become non-annotative. External reference (xref) An Xref with nested objects that exceed the boundaries of the layout viewport is converted to a block reference and exploded. Layout viewport Layout viewports are represented by either a polyline or the clipped viewport object. Custom objects Custom objects are exploded and converted to anonymous blocks.
Recommendations When exporting a layout to model space, consider the following: ■ The performance of the EXPORTLAYOUT command may be slower if a model space viewport is active. ■ In the exported drawing, the viewport displays the original linetype, which may not match the look of the original drawing. If this happens, assign “Continuous” linetype to viewports in the original drawing. ■ Linetype scaling may not be accurately maintained for objects in xrefs and blocks if PSLTSCALE is 0.
2 Navigate to the converted drawing. Click Open. 3 On the command line, enter exportlatyout. Quick Reference EXPORTLAYOUT Creates a visual representation of the current layout in the model space of a new drawing. Create and Modify Layout Viewports You can create a single layout viewport that fits the entire layout or create multiple layout viewports in the layout. Once you create the viewports, you can change their size, their properties, and also scale and move them as needed.
You can use the MVIEW command to create nonrectangular viewports. ■ With the Object option, you can select a closed object, such as a circle or closed polyline created in paper space, to convert into a layout viewport. The object that defines the viewport boundary is associated with the viewport after the viewport is created ■ With the Polygonal option, you can create a nonrectangular layout viewport by specifying points.
4 Click to specify the opposite corner. A new layout viewport object is available and displays a default view. To adjust the view, double-click within the layout viewport to access model space. To create a viewport configuration on a layout 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ New. 3 In the Viewports dialog box, New Viewports tab, under standard viewports select a viewport configuration from the list. 4 Under Setup, select either 2D or 3D.
To modify layout viewport properties using the Properties palette 1 Click the border of the layout viewport whose properties you want to modify. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties 3 In the Properties palette, select the value for the property you want to modify. Enter a new value or select a new setting from the list provided. The new property setting or value is assigned to the selected layout viewport. To clip a layout viewport boundary 1 Click View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Clip.
Add Date and Time Stamps to Layouts You can track drawing revisions by inserting information that identifies the file name, time and date of the revision, and the name of the person who revised it. The revision information is inserted in the form of attributes that have been saved in a block named REVDATE, and it is automatically updated as needed. The attributes contain the information; the block is a named grouping of the attributes.
To change the user name displayed by the date and time stamp 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 On the System tab, change the entry listed under User Name. Quick Reference REVDATE Inserts or updates a block containing user name, current time and date, and drawing name. TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing. CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format. DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format.
Scale Views in Layout Viewports To scale each displayed view in output accurately, set the scale of each view relative to paper space. You can change the view scale of the viewport using ■ The Properties palette ■ The XP option of the ZOOM command ■ The Viewports Scale on the status bar NOTE You can modify the list of scales that are displayed in all view and plot scale lists with SCALELISTEDIT.
NOTE Viewport scale locking is also available for nonrectangular viewports. To lock a nonrectangular viewport, you must perform an extra step in the Properties palette to select the viewport object rather than the viewport clipping boundary. Annotative Objects and Scaling Annotative objects are defined at a paper height instead of a model size and assigned one or more scales.
Quick Reference SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. MVIEW Creates and controls layout viewports. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. ZOOM Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. Control Visibility in Layout Viewports You can control the visibility of objects in layout viewports using several methods.
Thawing the layer restores visibility. The easiest way to freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport is to use the Layer Properties Manager. In the Layer Properties Manager, on the right side, use the column labeled VP Freeze to freeze one or more layers in the current layout viewport. To display the VP Freeze column, you must be on a layout. Specify the current layout viewport by double-clicking anywhere within its borders.
To view a list of layers that are frozen in the current viewport 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Double-click within a layout viewport to make it current. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Layer panel ➤ Layer Properties. 4 In the Layer Properties Manager, look at the VP Freeze column for the Freeze/Thaw in Current Viewports icon. To freeze or thaw layers in all viewports 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layer panel ➤ Layer Properties. 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, select one or more layers to freeze or thaw.
Hold down Ctrl to select more than one layer. Hold down Shift to select a sequence of layers. 4 In the New VP Freeze column, click the icon to change a layer's state. The sun icon means that a layer is thawed; the snowflake icon means that a layer is frozen. To create new layers that are frozen in all viewports 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Layer panel ➤ Layer Properties. 3 Click the New Layer button to create a layer. 4 Rename the new layer.
See also: ■ Set Options for Plotted Objects on page 1209 To apply screening to objects in a layout viewport 1 Click File menu ➤ Plot Style Manager. 2 Right-click a CTB or STB file. Click Open. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select a plot style to change. 4 In the Screening box, enter an intensity value between 1 and 100. 5 Click Save & Close. 6 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
Turn Layout Viewports On or Off You can save time by turning some layout viewports off or by limiting the number of active viewports. Displaying a large number of active layout viewports can affect your system's performance as the content of each layout viewport regenerates. You can save time by turning some layout viewports off or by limiting the number of active viewports. The following illustration shows the effects of turning off two layout viewports. New layout viewports are turned on by default.
PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space. MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports You can scale linetypes in paper space either based on the drawing units of the space in which the object was created or based on the paper space units.
See also: ■ Set the Lineweight Scale for a Layout on page 1182 To scale linetypes globally in paper space 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype Manager, click Show Details. 3 Under Global Scale Factor, enter a global scale to apply to the linetypes. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports.
To adjust the views on a layout with precision, you can create construction geometry, use object snaps on the model space objects displayed in layout viewports, or use one of the drafting aids on the status bar. To align objects between viewports using a construction line 1 Make sure you are on a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line. 3 Specify a point in the first viewport. Specify a second point to determine a line for the alignment.
4 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 5 Select the viewport to align to the first viewport. Press Enter. 6 When prompted for a base point, specify a point in the second viewport. Choose a point that corresponds with the point selected in the first viewport. 7 When prompted for the second point, hold down Shift and right-click. Click Object Snap menu ➤ Perpendicular. 8 Click on the construction line you created. The first and second viewports, and the objects in the viewports, are aligned.
Rotate Views in Layout Viewports You can rotate an entire view within a layout viewport with the VPROTATEASSOC system variable. When VPROTATEASSOC is set to 1, the view within a viewport is rotated with the viewport. When VPROTATEASSOC is set to 0, the view remains when the viewport is rotated. You can also rotate an entire view within a layout viewport by changing the UCS and using the PLAN command. With the UCS command, you can rotate the XY plane at any angle around the Z axis.
6 To rotate the view 90 degrees clockwise, enter 90. To rotate the view 90 degrees counterclockwise, enter -90. 7 Click View menu ➤ 3D Views ➤ Plan View ➤ Current UCS. The entire view rotates within the viewport. You may need to specify the scale of the viewport again. Quick Reference PLAN Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate system. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
A layout template is a layout imported from a DWG or DWT file. When you create a layout, you can choose to apply the information from an existing template. The program has sample layout templates to use when you design a new layout environment. The paper space objects and page setup in the existing template are used in the new layout. Thus, the layout objects, including any viewport objects, are displayed in paper space.
objects. To eliminate any unnecessary definition table information from the new layout, use the PURGE command. To create a layout using a layout template 1 Click Insert menu ➤ Layout ➤ Layout From Template. 2 In the Select Template From File dialog box, select a drawing template file from the list. 3 Click Open. 4 In the Insert Layout(s) dialog box, select the layout template from the list. Click OK. A new layout is created using the layout template you selected.
5 Use one of the following methods to insert the layout into the current drawing: ■ Drag the layout icon from the content area into the drawing. ■ Select a layout in the content area and right-click. Click Add Layout(s). ■ Double-click the layout in the content area. Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. LAYOUT Creates and modifies drawing layouts.
Work with Sheets in a Sheet Set 14 With the Sheet Set Manager, you can organize drawing layouts into named sheet sets. The sheets in a sheet set can be transmitted, published, and archived as a unit. Sheet sets facilitate the organization and management of drawings in a project, and improve the communication in a work group. Quick Start for Sheet Sets A sheet set is an organized collection of sheets from several drawing files. A sheet is a selected layout from a drawing file.
You can manage, transmit, publish, and archive sheet sets as a unit. Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful.
SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened. SSMPOLLTIME Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs. SSMSHEETSTATUS Controls how the status data in a sheet set is refreshed. SSMSTATE Indicates whether the Sheet Set Manager window is open or closed.
Sheet Views Tab. Displays an organized list of all sheet views in the sheet set. Only sheet views created with AutoCAD 2005 and later are listed. Model Views Tab. Lists the paths and folder names for the drawings containing model space views to be used in the sheet set. ■ Click a folder to list the drawing files that are located in that folder. ■ Click a drawing file to list the named model space views that are available for placement in the current sheet.
Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened.
Create and Manage a Sheet Set There are several methods for setting up and organizing a sheet set. You can also include relevant information with a sheet set and its components. Create a Sheet Set You create a sheet set with the Create a Sheet Set wizard. In the wizard, you can either create a sheet set from scratch based on existing drawings or use an example sheet set as a template. Layouts from specified drawing files are imported into the sheet set.
■ Create a page setup overrides file. Create or identify a DWT file to store page setups for plotting and publishing. This file, called the page setup overrides file, can be used to apply a single page setup to all sheets in a sheet set, overriding the individual page setups stored in each drawing. NOTE Although it is possible to use several layouts from the same drawing file as separate sheets in a sheet set, it is not recommended. This makes concurrent access to each layout by multiple users impossible.
recommended that you copy the existing DST file to another file name. Finally, rename the backup file from the DS$ file extension to the DST file extension. Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager.
SSMSTATE Indicates whether the Sheet Set Manager window is open or closed. Organize a Sheet Set With a large sheet set, you will find it essential to organize sheets and views in the tree view. On the Sheet List tab, sheets can be arranged into collections called subsets. On the Sheet Views tab, views can be arranged into collections called categories. Use Sheet Subsets Sheet subsets are often associated with a discipline such as architecture or mechanical design.
You can nest categories into other categories as needed. To move a view to a different category, drag them in the tree view or use the Set Category shortcut menu option. To create a new subset in the sheet list 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, right-click the sheet set node (at the top of the list), or an existing subset. Click New Subset. 3 In the Subset Properties dialog box, under Subset Name, enter the name of the new subset. Click OK.
5 If a list of blocks is displayed, select the callout blocks to be used for the views in this view category. You can add blocks to the list by clicking the Add Blocks button. To remove a subset from the sheet list 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, drag all sheets out of the subset that you want to remove. 3 Right-click the subset that you want to remove. Click Remove Subset.
SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened.
from layouts in several drawings. In the current drawing, you can drag a layout tab directly onto the Sheets area of the Sheet List tab in the Sheet Set Manager. ■ Create a new sheet. As an alternative to importing existing layouts, you can create a new sheet. When you place views in this sheet, the drawing files associated with the views are attached as xrefs to the sheet drawing.
NOTE You can quickly confirm whether a sheet is in the expected folder by looking at Details at the bottom of the Sheet List tab. If the selected sheet is not in the expected location, path information for both Expected Location and Found Location is displayed in Details. ■ Add a view to a sheet. From the Model Views tab, you can easily add a view to a sheet by placing a named model space view or the entire drawing onto the current sheet.
all the sheets in the sheet set. Once a sheet list table is created, you also have options to edit, update, or delete the cell content of the table. You can create a sheet list table from the shortcut menu of sheet set subsets and sheets only when a sheet is open. You can also create sheet list tables for multiple subsets and sheets. Any sheets added to a subset later on are automatically added to the sheet list table.
NOTE The xref is attached using a relative path. If you need to change the path to a fully specified (absolute) path, use the External References palette. ■ A layout viewport that displays the model space view is created on your current sheet. ■ A named view that encompasses the area of the layout viewport is created in paper space. When you place a sheet view on a sheet, all the layers in the current drawing (including layer 0) are frozen in the new viewport created by the view.
To import layouts from several drawings as sheets 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, right-click the sheet set node, a subset node, or a sheet node. Click Import Layout as Sheet. 3 In the Import Layouts as Sheets dialog box, click Browse for Drawings and navigate to the drawing that you want to use. To select several drawings, use SHIFT or CTRL when you click on the drawing files.
5 Save the drawing. 6 In the Sheet Set Manager, right-click the Sheet Set. Click Import Layout as Sheet. 7 In the Import Layout as Sheet dialog box, click Browse for Drawings. Navigate to the drawing that you want to use. 8 Click the check box of the layout to be reassociated as a sheet in the current sheet set. Click Import Checked. To add a view to a sheet 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set.
To add a sheet list table 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set. 3 Right-click a sheet set name, subset, or multiple sheet set names and subsets. Click Insert Sheet List Table. 4 In the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box, do the following: ■ Set the Table Style in the Table Style Settings group. ■ On the Table Data tab, specify Title Text for the table and add, remove, or change the order of the column entries.
To change the default block used for sheet view labels 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set. 3 On the Sheet Views tab, right-click the sheet set node. 4 In the Sheet Set Properties dialog box, click Label Block for Views. Click the [...] button. 5 In the Select Block dialog box, specify a new block to be used as the default view label block. 6 Click OK to close each dialog box.
SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened.
In addition, you can define custom properties for a sheet and a sheet set. The values for custom properties for sheets are typically specific to each sheet. For example, a custom property for a sheet might include the name of the designer. The values for custom properties for a sheet set are typically specific to a project. For example, a custom property for a sheet set might include the contract number. You cannot create custom properties for subsets.
4 In the Sheet Set Properties dialog box, click the Edit Custom Properties button. 5 In the Custom Properties dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Click Add to create a new custom property for the sheet set. Click the name and the default value to enter the information for these fields. To assign this property to the sheet set, make sure that Sheet Set is selected under Owner. ■ Click the name and the default value to change the information for these fields. ■ Click a custom property from the list.
Quick Reference Commands NEWSHEETSET Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected sheet set. SHEETSET Opens the Sheet Set Manager. SHEETSETHIDE Closes the Sheet Set Manager. System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened.
Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets After you have organized drawings into a sheet set, you can publish, transmit, and archive the sheet set as a package. ■ Publish a sheet set: Use the Publish feature to output the sheet set to a plotter in either normal or reverse order. For more information, see Publish a Sheet Set. You can create single and multiple-sheet DWF or DWFx files from a sheet set or portion of a sheet set. For information on DWF files, see Plot DWF Files on page 1242.
NOTE With page setup overrides, you can use the PUBLISHCOLLATE system variable to control whether plotting a sheet set can be interrupted by other plot jobs or not. Save a Selection of Sheets You can select part of a sheet set for publishing and transmitting. On the Sheet List tab, you can select individual sheets using standard Microsoft® Windows® selection methods—press CTRL or SHIFT when you click items. You can specify all the sheets in a sheet subset by clicking the subset node.
The sheet selection is activated and available for publishing and transmitting operations. To rename or delete a sheet selection 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, open a sheet set. 3 On the Sheet List tab, near the upper-right corner, click the Sheet Selections button. Click Manage. 4 In the Sheet Selections dialog box, select the name of a sheet selection and do one of the following: ■ Click Rename to rename the sheet selection.
7 Click OK to close the Sheet Selections dialog box. 8 On the Sheet List Manager, near the upper-right corner, click the Sheet Selections button. Click Create. 9 In the New Sheet Selection dialog box, enter the name of the sheet selection. Click OK. To publish a DWF or DWFx file including layer, block, sheet set, and sheet information 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, select the sheet set to publish in a DWF or DWFx file.
To publish a DWF or DWFx file using a block template file to include block properties and attributes 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager. 2 In the Sheet Set Manager, Sheet List tab, select the sheet set to publish in a DWF or DWFx file. 3 Click the Publish button. Click Sheet Set Publish Options. 4 In the Sheet Set Publish Options dialog box, under DWF Data Options, Block Information, click to display the drop-down list, and select “Include.
System Variables PUBLISHCOLLATE Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs. SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened.
A green dot in the lock icon indicates that the Sheet Set Manager session on your computer has temporarily locked the DST file. A red dot indicates that the Sheet Set Manager session on a team member's computer has temporarily locked the DST file. A yellow dot in the lock icon means that the sheet is in a special state; for example, its file properties may be set to Read-Only. Other members of the team can automatically see changes to the sheet set in the Sheet Set Manager tree view.
Work in a Team That Does Not Use Sheet Set Manager With some limitations, you can use sheet sets in a team with members who do not have network access, or do not have access to the Sheet Set Manager. These team members may be using an older version of AutoCAD LT or AutoCAD LT. In those circumstances, not all members of the team will have access to the DST file.
System Variables SSFOUND Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened. SSMPOLLTIME Controls whether plotting a sheet set, multi-sheet plot file, or plot spool file can be interrupted by other plot jobs.
370
Create and Modify Objects 371
372
Control the Properties of Objects 15 You can organize objects in your drawing and control how they are displayed and plotted by changing their properties, which include layer, linetype, color, lineweight, transparency, and plot style. Work with Object Properties You can change the object properties in your drawing by using the Properties palette or the Quick Properties palette. Overview of Object Properties Every object you draw has properties.
Object properties can be specified and changed with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes, and with the controls available on the Home tab, Properties panel of the ribbon. See also: ■ Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks on page 770 Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PROPERTIESCLOSE Closes the Properties palette. QUICKPROPERTIES Displays quick property data for selected objects.
PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE Controls whether object transparency is plotted. PROPOBJLIMIT Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes. QPMODE Controls whether the Quick Properties palette is displayed when objects are selected. RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed.
Several types of objects open an editor or start an object-specific command when you double-click them instead of the Quick Properties palette. These types of objects include blocks, polylines, splines, text, and more. Use the Customize User Interface dialog box (CUI) to control what palette or command is used when double-clicking each type of object.
If you need to change the properties of a larger number of objects, you can either change the default values for their system variables, or you can use the CHANGE or CHPROP commands. See also: ■ Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks on page 770 ■ Select Objects by Properties on page 609 ■ Set Interface Options on page 143 ■ Quick Properties in the Customization Guide To change the settings of a Quick Properties palette 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PROPERTIESCLOSE Closes the Properties palette. QUICKPROPERTIES Displays quick property data for selected objects. SETBYLAYER Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer. CETRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency level for new objects. DBLCLKEDIT Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. SETBYLAYERMODE Controls which properties are selected for the SETBYLAYER command. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed. Copy Properties Between Objects You can copy some or all properties of one object to other objects using Match Properties.
4 Select the objects to which you want to apply the selected properties and press Enter. Quick Reference MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. Work with Layers Layers are like transparent overlays on which you organize and group objects in a drawing. Overview of Layers Layers are used to group information in a drawing by function and to enforce linetype, color, and other standards. Layers are the equivalent of the overlays used in paper-based drafting.
■ What default linetype and lineweight are assigned to all objects on a layer ■ Whether objects on a layer can be modified ■ Whether objects display with different layer properties in individual layout viewports Every drawing includes a layer named 0. Layer 0 cannot be deleted or renamed.
such as electrical parts or dimensions. Also, you can lock a layer to prevent objects on that layer from being accidentally selected and modified. Control the Visibility of Objects on a Layer You can make drawing layers invisible either by turning them off or by freezing them. Turning off or freezing layers is useful if you need an unobstructed view when working in detail on a particular layer or set of layers or if you don't want to plot details such as reference lines.
If you set a specific color to the Properties palette when no objects are selected, that color is used for all new objects, overriding the default color for the current layer. The same is true for Linetype, Lineweight, Transparency, and Plot Style properties on the Properties palette. The BYBLOCK setting should be used only for creating blocks. See Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks on page 770.
To copy an object to another layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer. 2 Select the objects you want to copy. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select an object on the layer where you want the copied object to be placed. 5 Do one of the following: ■ Specify a base point, and then specify a second point for the location of the object on the destination layer. ■ Enter the displacement in the form of a Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate value.
To turn the Always Show option on or off in the LayerWalk dialog box 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Walk. 2 In the LayerWalk dialog box, Layer list, double-click the layer you want to set to Always Show. To select more than one layer, press SHIFT and double-click the additional layers. An asterisk (*) is displayed to the left of each layer that you set to Always Show. These layers are displayed in the drawing regardless of whether or not they are in an active filter. 3 Click Close.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, select a layer. Click the color icon. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, select a color. 4 Click OK. To change the properties of more than one layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager list view, use one of the following methods to select the layers: ■ Hold down Ctrl and select layer names. ■ Right-click. Click Show Filters in Layer List to display a check mark, and then select a layer filter.
LAYISO Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. LAYMCH Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer. LAYMCUR Sets the current layer to that of a selected object. LAYMRG Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from the drawing. LAYOFF Turns off the layer of a selected object. LAYON Turns on all layers in the drawing. LAYTHW Thaws all layers in the drawing.
Choose Layer Names Carefully A layer name can include up to 255 characters (double-byte or alphanumeric): letters, numbers, spaces, and several special characters. Layer names cannot include the following characters: <>/\“:;?*|=‘ In many cases, the layer names you choose are dictated by corporate, industry, or client standards. The Layer Properties Manager sorts layers alphabetically by name. If you organize your own layer scheme, choose layer names carefully.
layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. WARNING Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. To create a new layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Layer button.
The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged (removed from the drawing). 2 To purge unreferenced layers, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced layers, select Layers. ■ To purge specific layers, double-click Layers to expand the tree view. Select the layers to be purged. 3 If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge, select the layer, and read the explanation.
Because everything in your drawing is associated with a layer, it's likely that in the course of planning and creating a drawing, you'll need to change what you place on a layer or how you view the layers in combination. You can ■ Reassign objects from one layer to another. ■ Change the name of a layer. ■ Change the default color, linetype, or other properties of the layer.
3 In the Select Linetype dialog box, if the linetype you need is not displayed, click Load and use one of the following methods: ■ In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, select one or more linetypes to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box. ■ In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File to open additional linetype definition (LIN) files. Select one or more linetypes to load. Click OK to return to the Select Linetype dialog box. 4 Select the linetype you want to use.
Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. SETBYLAYER Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer.
Using property overrides is an efficient way for displaying objects with different property settings in individual viewports without changing their ByLayer or ByBlock properties. For example, objects can be made to display more prominently by changing their color. Because layer property overrides do not change the layer’s global properties, you can have objects display differently in various viewports without having to create duplicate geometry or use xrefs that have different layer settings.
If you do not want to display or plot property overrides, set the VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE system variable to 0. Objects will display and plot with their global layer properties. NOTE Property overrides can still be set even when VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE is set to 0. Property overrides that are on xref layers are not retained when the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 0.
■ Layers panel on the ribbon. A background color displays behind the layer names in the Layer drop-down list. Override properties are displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties. ■ Properties panel on the ribbon. A background color displays behind the color, linetype, lineweight, and plot style controls. Override properties are displayed for color, linetype, and lineweight instead of global properties. ■ Properties palette.
Remove Layer Property Overrides When you right-click a layer in the Layer Properties Manager, a shortcut menu is displayed that lists options for removing property overrides.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 3 In the Layer Properties Manager, right-click the property override on the layer to remove. 4 Click Remove Viewport Overrides For ➤ Property Override (Color, Linetype, Lineweight, Plot Style) ➤ In All Viewports. To remove all overrides from a layer for the current layout viewport 1 On the layout tab, double-click inside a viewport to make it current.
To control the transparency of objects or layout viewports on a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, enter a value between 0 and 90 in the Transparency or VP Transparency columns for each layer you want to make transparent. NOTE The VP Transparency column is only available when a Layout tab is active. 3 Press Enter. To not display or plot layer viewport overrides 1 At the Command prompt, enter vplayeroverridesmode. 2 Enter 0.
Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. RENAME Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. CLAYER Sets the current layer.
There are two kinds of layer filters ■ Layer property filter Includes layers that have names or other properties in common. For example, you can define a filter that includes all layers that are red and whose names include the letters mech. ■ Layer group filter Includes the layers that are put into the filter when you define it, regardless of their names or properties. Selected layers can be added from the layer list by dragging them to the filter.
Define a Layer Property Filter A layer property filter is defined in the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where you select any of the following properties you want to include in the filter definition: ■ Layer names, colors, linetypes, lineweights, and plot styles ■ Whether layers are in use ■ Whether layers are turned on or off ■ Whether layers are frozen or thawed in the active viewport or all viewports ■ Whether layers are locked or unlocked ■ Whether layers are set to be plotted You use wi
by first creating a filter definition that filters layers by name (*site*) and then using the Invert Filter option. Sort Layers Once you have created layers, you can sort them by name or other properties. In the Layer Properties Manager, click the column heading to sort layers by the property in that column. Layer names can be sorted in ascending or descending alphabetical order. Wild-Card Characters You can use wild-card characters to sort layers by name.
NOTE To filter on a layer name that contains a wild-card character, precede the character with a reverse quote (`) so that it is not interpreted as a wild-card character. See also: ■ Reconcile New Layers on page 407 To quickly filter the display of layers by name 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click in Search for Layer below the tree view. 3 (Optional) To limit your search, select a layer filter in the tree view.
For example, the definition for a filter that displays only layers that are on and are either yellow or red has two rows. The first row of the filter definition has the On icon and red. The second row has the On icon and yellow. 5 Click OK. To filter the display of layer names by selecting layers 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the New Group Filter button. A new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1 is created in the tree view.
■ For a new group filter, a filter is added to the tree view. Rename it, select the parent filter to display its layers in the list view, and drag layers from the list view to the new layer group filter. 5 Click OK. To sort the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager ■ Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties ■ In the Layer Properties Manager, click any column heading. To reverse the sorting order, click a second time.
Reconcile New Layers Unreconciled layers are new layers that have been added to the drawing and have not yet been acknowledged by the user and manually marked as reconciled. Reconciling new layers is the process of manually reviewing new layers so that you can avoid potential errors before plotting your drawing or when restoring a layer state. Unreconciled layers are new layers that have been added to the drawing or to attached xrefs since the layer list was last evaluated.
LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Use New Layer Notification You can be notified when new layers are added to the drawing before certain tasks, such as plotting, saving, or restoring a layer state.
xrefs, or when restoring a layer state. To make changes to these settings, you can either use the system variables or the Layer Settings dialog box. When layer notification is turned on, an Unreconciled New Layers icon displays on the status bar. At that time, you can choose to view the new layers by right-clicking the icon and clicking the View Unreconciled New Layers link from the menu.
Saving a Template (DWT) File When saving a drawing as a template (DWT) file, you can choose to save the layers in the drawing as unreconciled or reconciled in the Template Options dialog box. By default, all layers are saved as unreconciled, so that when a new drawing is started using the template, a layer baseline is not yet created until the drawing is first saved as a DWG file. If the template file is saved with all layers as reconciled, a layer baseline is created.
To set when new layer notification is displayed 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Layer Settings dialog box, click Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing. 4 Click Notify When New Layers are Present. 5 Select the commands that will cause the layer list to be evaluated for new layers. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference CLASSICLAYER Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties.
Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States You can save the current layer settings to a layer state, make changes to the layer state, and restore them to the drawing later. You can save the current layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state and restore them later. Saving layer settings is convenient if you need to return to particular settings for all layers during different stages in completing a drawing or for plotting.
When restoring layer states, the following additional behaviors can occur ■ When restoring a layer state, the layer that was current when the layer state was saved is made current. If that layer no longer exists, the current layer does not change. ■ If a layout viewport is active when a layer state is restored, and the Visibility in Current VP restore option is selected, all layers that need to be visible in the viewport are turned on and thawed in model space.
All properties other than the layer name can be edited. Properties for multiple layers can be changed at the same time. You can also add layers to a layer state through the Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box. For example, if new layers were added since the layer state was saved, you can add them and resave the layer state. To delete layers, use the Delete button in the Edit Layer State dialog box.
To restore a layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select a named layer state. 4 Click More to select any specific layer properties you want to restore. 5 Click Restore. To add layers to a layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States.
8 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. To include description and material properties to a layer state imported from a previous release 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager, select the layer state that was imported from a previous release. 4 Click Restore to restore the layer state. 5 Open the Layer States Manager. Click New.
LAYERNOTIFY Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. Import and Export Layer States You can import layer settings from other drawings and export layer states. You can import layer states that are saved in drawing files (DWG, DWS, and DWT) and from layer state (LAS) files.
When the current drawing does not contain any named layer states, the LMAN layer state names are retained. If the current drawing contains layer states, LMAN layer state names display with the prefix “LMAN” followed by the original layer state name. To import saved layer settings from another drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, click Import.
To export a saved layer state 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State. 2 In the Layer State drop-down list, select Manage Layer States. 3 In the Layer States Manager dialog box, select the named layer state (LAS) file you want to export. Click Export. 4 In the Export Layer State dialog box, specify where to export the layer state file. 5 Click Save to exit the dialog box. 6 Click Close to exit the Layer States Manager. Quick Reference LAYERSTATE Saves, restores, and manages named layer states.
You can use a variety of color palettes when assigning color to objects, including ■ AutoCAD LT Color Index (ACI) ■ True Color ■ PANTONE Colors ■ RAL™ Classic and RAL Design color books ■ DIC Color Guide ■ Colors from imported color books. ® ® ACI Colors ACI colors are the standard colors used in AutoCAD LT. Each color is identified by an ACI number, an integer from 1 through 255. Standard color names are available only for colors 1 through 7.
If the current color is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using color 7 (white or black) until the objects are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into the drawing, it acquires the current color setting. PANTONE® Color Books Pantone has updated the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM® with the PANTONE® PLUS SERIES of Publications that provides a chromatic arrangement of colors.
2 In the Object Color drop-down list. click Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, True Color tab, do one of the following: ■ Select the HSL color model in the Color Model box. Specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes. ■ Select the RGB color model in the Color Model box.
Change the Color of an Object You can change the color of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by changing the color of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a color for the object explicitly. You have three choices for changing the color of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different color. If an object's color is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its color from the new layer.
2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the color you want to change. 3 In the Select Color dialog box, do one of the following: ■ On the Index tab, click a color or enter the ACI color number (1-255) or name in the Color box. Click OK. ■ On the True Color tab, select the HSL color model in the Color Model option and specify a color by entering a color value in the Color box or by specifying values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance boxes. Click OK.
■ On the Color Books tab, select a color book from the Color Book box; select a color by navigating the color book (using the up and down arrows) and clicking on a color chip. Click OK. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. COLOR Sets the color for new objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. CECOLOR Sets the color of new objects.
Color books are organized alphabetically into pages that you can browse through. A page holds up to ten colors. If the color book you are browsing through is not organized into pages, the colors are arranged into pages, with each page containing up to seven colors. To install a color book 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations. 3 Click Add to add a color book location. 4 Enter the new location in the blank path box. 5 Click OK.
C:\Program Files\[current AutoCAD LT release number]\support\color 4 Click the location name to edit the path. 5 Enter the new location in the path box. 6 Click OK. To define multiple folders for the color book path 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Files tab, click Color Book Locations. 3 Click Add to add a color book location. 4 Enter the new location in the blank path box. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects.
Overview of Linetypes A linetype is a repeating pattern of dashes, dots, and blank spaces displayed in a line or a curve. You assign linetypes to objects either by layer or by specifying the linetype explicitly, independent of layers. In addition to choosing a linetype, you can set its scale to control the size of the dashes and spaces, and you can create your own custom linetypes. NOTE These linetypes should not be confused with the hardware linetypes provided by some plotters.
REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. Load Linetypes At the start of a project, you load the linetypes that are required for the project so that they are available when you need them.
You can hold down Ctrl to select several linetypes or SHIFT to select a range of linetypes. 4 Click OK. To list the linetypes loaded in the current drawing 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 Click anywhere outside the box to close it. To list the linetypes in a linetype definition file 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype. 2 In the Linetype drop-down list, click Other. Then, in the Linetype Manager dialog box, click Load. 3 In the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, click File.
To purge an unused linetype 1 Click Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged. 2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes. ■ To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree view. Then select the linetypes to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge.
MEASUREMENT Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. Set the Current Linetype All objects are created using the current linetype. You can set the current linetype with the: ■ Linetype control on the Properties panel or toolbar ■ Linetype property on the Properties palette ■ Linetype Manager If the current linetype is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the linetype assigned to the current layer.
■ Select BYLAYER to draw new objects in the linetype assigned to the current layer. ■ Select BYBLOCK to draw new objects in the current linetype until they are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into a drawing, the objects in the block acquire the current linetype setting. 4 Click OK. NOTE The Linetype control displays the current linetype. If the linetype you want to use is already loaded, you can click the Linetype control and click the linetype to make it current.
You have three choices for changing the linetype of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different linetype. If an object's linetype is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its linetype from the new layer. ■ Change the linetype assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object's linetype is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the linetype of its layer.
4 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To change the linetype of an object, overriding the layer's linetype 1 Select the objects whose linetype you want to change. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, click the Linetype control. 4 Choose the linetype that you want to assign to the objects. Quick Reference CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties.
The Linetype Manager displays the Global Scale Factor and Current Object Scale. ■ The Global Scale Factor value controls the LTSCALE system variable, which changes the linetype scale globally for both new and existing objects. ■ The Current Object Scale value controls the CELTSCALE system variable, which sets the linetype scale for new objects. The CELTSCALE value is multiplied by the LTSCALE value to get the displayed linetype scale.
3 Enter a new value for Global Scale Factor. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. System Variables CELTSCALE Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. LTSCALE Sets the global linetype scale factor. PSLTSCALE Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports.
For polylines, you can specify whether a linetype pattern is centered on each segment or is continuous across vertices throughout the entire length of the polyline. You do this by setting the PLINEGEN system variable. To set the linetype display for all new polylines 1 At the Command prompt, enter plinegen. 2 Enter 1 to make the linetype pattern continue throughout the entire length of two-dimensional polylines, or enter 0 to center the linetype pattern on each segment.
Overview of Lineweights Lineweights are width values that are assigned to graphical objects as well as some types of text. Using lineweights, you can create heavy and thin lines to show cuts in sections, depth in elevations, dimension lines and tick marks, and differences in details. For example, by assigning varying lineweights to different layers, you can easily differentiate between new, existing, and demolition construction.
See also: ■ Draw Polylines on page 551 To assign width to polylines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point for the first segment in the polyline. 3 Enter w (width). 4 Enter a value for the width at the start of the line segment. 5 Enter a value for the width at the end of the line segment. 6 Specify the endpoint of the first segment of the polyline. 7 Enter w to specify different widths for the next segment, or press Enter to end the command.
Quick Reference LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.
layout, use LWEIGHT to set their display scale. Changing the display scale does not affect the lineweight plotting value. In model space, weighted lines that are joined form a beveled joint with no end caps. You can use plot styles to apply different joins and endcap styles to objects with lineweights. NOTE Different styles of endcaps and joins of objects with lineweight are displayed only in a full preview using PREVIEW or PLOT.
LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. LWUNITS Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Set the Current Lineweight The current lineweight is the lineweight used for any objects you draw until you make another lineweight current. All objects are created using the current lineweight.
To make a lineweight current for creating objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight. 2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select a lineweight. 4 Click OK. NOTE To display the lineweight at its current setting, the Display Lineweight option must be selected in the Display Lineweight dialog box. Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties.
PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Change the Lineweight of an Object You can change the lineweight of an object by reassigning it to another layer, by changing the lineweight of the layer the object is on, or by specifying a lineweight for the object explicitly. You have three choices for changing the lineweight of an object: ■ Reassign the object to another layer with a different lineweight.
Quick Reference LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. PEDIT Edits polylines. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. LWDISPLAY Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed.
Display performance is improved when wide polylines and donuts, solid-filled polygons (two-dimensional solids), hatches, gradient fills, and text are displayed in simplified form. Simplified display also increases the speed of creating test plots. Turn Off Solid Fill When you turn off Fill mode, wide polylines, solid-filled polygons, gradient fill, and hatches are displayed in outline form.
Update the Display New objects automatically use the current settings for displays of solid fill and text. Except for lineweights, to update the display of existing objects using these settings, you must use REGEN. See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity on page 381 ■ Display Lineweights on page 441 ■ Use TrueType Fonts on page 1007 To turn the display of solid fill on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
2 In the Lineweight drop-down list, select Lineweight Settings. 3 In the Lineweight Settings dialog box, select or clear Display Lineweight. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
Control the Transparency of Objects You can control the transparency level of objects and layers. Set the transparency level of selected objects or layers to enhance drawings or reduce the visibility of areas that are included for reference only. Transparency can be set to ByLayer, ByBlock, or to a specific value. no transparent objects selected objects 75% transparent IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, plotting transparency is disabled by default.
Double clicking hatches or fills displays the Hatch Editor ribbon contextual tab, which contains a transparency control for these objects. Quick Reference CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. CETRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency level for new objects. TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed.
NOTE Overlapping objects cannot be controlled between model space and paper space. They can be controlled only within the same space. To change the draw order of overlapping objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Draw Order drop-down list. 2 From the draw order drop down list, click one of the options. 3 Select the object(s) whose draw order you want to modify and press Enter. 4 Select the reference object(s) and press Enter.
DRAWORDERCTL Controls the default display behavior of overlapping objects when they are created or edited. HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. SORTENTS Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations. Control the Display of Objects Control the display of objects by isolating or hiding a selection set. Use ISOLATEOBJECTS and HIDEOBJECTS to create a temporary drawing view with selected objects isolated or hidden.
3 To redisplay hidden objects, right-click in the drawing area and select Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation. To keep objects hidden or isolated between drawing sessions 1 Before hiding or isolating objects, set OBJECTISOLATIONMODE to 1. 2 Hide or isolate objects in your drawing. When you save, close, and reopen your drawing, the selected objects remain hidden or isolated. Quick Reference HIDEOBJECTS Hides selected objects. ISOLATEOBJECTS Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden.
Use Precision Tools 16 You can use a variety of precision drawing tools to help you produce accurate drawings quickly and without performing tedious calculations. Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) The UCS is the active coordinate system that establishes the XY plane (work plane) and Z-axis direction for drawing and modeling.
drawing. However, it is usually more convenient to create and edit objects based on the UCS, which can be customized to suit your needs. Understand the UCS Icon The UCS icon indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS. You can manipulate the UCS icon using grips. For more information, see The UCS Icon on page 33 and the UCSICON command. NOTE If the location of the UCS origin is not visible in a viewport, the UCS icon is displayed in the lower-left corner of the viewport instead.
UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions. System Variables ELEVATION Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. PUCSBASE Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space only. UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another.
Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) Customize the UCS origin and orientation using the UCS origin and axes grips, the UCS icon shortcut menu, or the UCS command. You can align the UCS icon with existing objects, including 3D faces or edges. To align the UCS with an existing 3D object 1 Click the UCS icon, and then click Move and Align. 2 Drag the UCS icon over the portion of the object with which you want to align it. 3 Click to place the new UCS.
To change the orientation of the Z axis 1 Right-click the UCS icon, and click Z Axis. 2 Specify a point for the new origin (0,0,0). 3 Specify a point that lies on the positive Z axis. Quick Reference Commands UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions. System Variables UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another.
UCSYDIR Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. Work with Named UCS Definitions and Preset Orientations Create and save as many UCS definitions as you need. Each UCS definition can have its own origin and X, Y, and Z axes. You can also choose from several preset orientations.
4 Click OK. The UCS changes to the selected option. To rename a UCS definition 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named UCS. 2 In the UCS dialog box, Named UCSs tab, right-click the UCS definition you want to rename, and click Rename. 3 Enter a new name. 4 Click OK. To delete a UCS definition 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named UCS. 2 In the UCS dialog box, Named UCSs tab, select the UCS definition you want to delete. 3 Press Delete.
System Variables PUCSBASE Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space only. UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. UCSNAME Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. UCSORG Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space.
You can choose a 2D or 3D style of the icon to represent the UCS when working in 2D environment. Shaded style of icon is displayed to represent the UCS in the 3D environment. Use the UCSICON command to choose between displaying the 2D or the 3D UCS icon. The shaded UCS icon is displayed when you open a drawing with a shaded 3D view that was created in AutoCAD. To indicate the origin and orientation of the UCS, you can display the UCS icon at the UCS origin point using the UCSICON command.
You can use the UCSICON command to switch between the 2D UCS icon and the 3D UCS icon. You can also use the command to change the size, color, and icon line width of the 3D UCS icon. The UCS broken pencil icon replaces the 2D UCS icon when the viewing direction is in a plane parallel to the UCS XY plane. The broken pencil icon indicates that the edge of the XY plane is almost perpendicular to your viewing direction. This icon warns you not to use your pointing device to specify coordinates.
The check mark indicates whether the icon is on or off. To display the UCS icon at the UCS origin ■ Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Origin. The UCS icon is displayed at the origin of the current coordinate system. The check mark indicates whether the option is on or off. To change the appearance of the UCS icon 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ UCS Icon Properties. 2 In the UCS Icon dialog box, change the settings. 3 Click OK.
Overview of Coordinate Entry You can enter two-dimensional coordinates as either Cartesian (X,Y) or polar coordinates. When dynamic input is on, you can enter coordinate values in tooltips near the cursor. Cartesian and Polar Coordinates A Cartesian coordinate system has three axes, X, Y, and Z. When you enter coordinate values, you indicate a point's distance (in units) and its direction (+ or -) along the X, Y, and Z axes relative to the coordinate system origin (0,0,0).
See also: ■ Enter Cartesian Coordinates on page 468 ■ Enter Polar Coordinates on page 470 ■ Enter 3D Coordinates on page 473 ■ Use Dynamic Input on page 478 To enter coordinates relative to the WCS ■ Precede coordinate values with an asterisk (*). Entering @*2,0,0 specifies a point two units in the X direction of the last point entered relative to the WCS. Entering @2,0,0 specifies a point two units in the X direction of the last point entered relative to the UCS.
■ Set the COORDS system variable to 0 for static display, 1 for dynamic display, or 2 for distance and angle display. Quick Reference Commands ID Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line. LASTPOINT Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space.
With dynamic input, you can specify absolute coordinates with the # prefix. If you enter coordinates on the command line instead of in the tooltip, the # prefix is not used. For example, entering #3,4 specifies a point 3 units along the X axis and 4 units along the Y axis from the UCS origin. For more information about dynamic input, see Use Dynamic Input on page 478. The following example draws a line beginning at an X value of -2, a Y value of 1, and an endpoint at 3,4.
To enter absolute Cartesian coordinates (2D) ■ At a prompt for a point, enter coordinates in the tooltip using the following format: #x,y If dynamic input is turned off, enter coordinates on the command line using the following format: x,y To enter relative Cartesian coordinates (2D) ■ At a prompt for a point, enter coordinates using the following format: @x,y Quick Reference System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line.
for the angle. For example, entering 1<315 locates the same point as entering 1<-45. You can change the angle conventions for the current drawing with UNITS. Absolute polar coordinates are measured from the UCS origin (0,0), which is the intersection of the X and Y axes. Use absolute polar coordinates when you know the precise distance and angle coordinates of the point. With dynamic input, you can specify absolute coordinates with the # prefix.
The following example shows two lines drawn with relative polar coordinates. In each illustration, the line begins at the location labeled as the previous point.
System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line. Enter 3D Coordinates Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinates locate points when you are creating objects in 3D. Enter 3D Cartesian Coordinates 3D Cartesian coordinates specify a precise location by using three coordinate values: X, Y, and Z. Entering 3D Cartesian coordinate values (X,Y,Z) is similar to entering 2D coordinate values (X,Y).
Use Default Z Values When you enter coordinates in the format X,Y, the Z value is copied from the last point you entered. As a result, you can enter one location in the X,Y,Z format and then enter subsequent locations using the X,Y format with the Z value remaining constant. For example, if you enter the following coordinates for a line From point: 0,0,5 To point: 3,4 both endpoints of the line will have a Z value of 5. When you begin or open any drawing, the initial default value of Z is greater than 0.
Quick Reference Commands GRID Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. TABLET Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing tablet. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.
XY plane. Cylindrical coordinates define points by a distance in the XY plane from the UCS origin, an angle from the X axis in the XY plane, and a Z value. You specify a point using absolute cylindrical coordinates with the following syntax: X<[angle from X axis],Z NOTE For the following examples, it is assumed that dynamic input is turned off or that the coordinates are entered on the command line. With dynamic input, you specify absolute coordinates with the # prefix.
Quick Reference Commands UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables COORDS Controls the format and update frequency of coordinates on the status line. Enter Spherical Coordinates 3D spherical coordinates specify a location by a distance from the origin of the current UCS, an angle from the X axis in the XY plane, and an angle from the XY plane. Spherical coordinate entry in 3D is similar to polar coordinate entry in 2D.
When you need to define a point based on a previous point, enter the relative spherical coordinate values by preceding them with the @ sign. To enter relative spherical coordinates ■ At a prompt for a point, enter the coordinate values using the following format: @x
When dynamic input is on, tooltips display information near the cursor that is dynamically updated as the cursor moves. When a command is active, the tooltips provide a place for user entry. After you type a value in an input field and press Tab, the field then displays a lock icon, and the cursor is constrained by the value that you entered. You can then enter a value for the second input field.
Use the pointer input settings to change the default format for coordinates and to control when pointer input tooltips are displayed. Dimensional Input When dimensional input is on, the tooltips display distance and angle values when a Command prompts for a second point. The values in the dimensional tooltips change as you move the cursor. Press Tab to move to the value you want to change. Dimensional input is available for ARC, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, LINE, and PLINE.
Use the dimensional input settings to display only the information you want to see. When you use grips to stretch objects or when you create new objects, dimensional input displays only acute angles, that is, all angles are displayed as 180 degrees or less. Thus, an angle of 270 degrees is displayed as 90 degrees regardless of the ANGDIR system variable setting (set in the Drawing Units dialog box).
■ If a down-arrow icon follows the prompt, press the DOWN ARROW key until a dot is displayed next to the option. Press Enter. ■ Press the UP ARROW key to access recent coordinates, or right-click and click Recent Input to access the coordinates from a shortcut menu. NOTE For dimensional input, after you type a value in an input field and press Tab, the field then displays a lock icon, and the cursor is constrained by the value that you entered.
3 In the Tooltip Appearance dialog box, under Color, click Model Color or Layout Color to display the Select Color dialog box, where you can specify a color for tooltips in the space you selected. 4 Under Size, move the slider to the right to make tooltips larger or to the left to make them smaller. The default value, 0, is in the middle. 5 Under Transparency, move the slider. The lower the setting, the more transparent the tooltip. A value of 100 sets the tooltip to opaque.
2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Dynamic Input tab, under Dimension Input, click Settings. 3 In the Dimension Input Settings dialog box, select Polar or Cartesian format as the default. 4 Under Visibility, select one of the following options: ■ Show Only 1 Dimension Input Field at a Time. Displays only the distance dimensional input tooltip when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. ■ Show 2 Dimension Input Fields at a Time.
DYNDIVIS Controls how many dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing. DYNMODE Turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNPICOORDS Controls whether pointer input uses relative or absolute format for coordinates. DYNPIFORMAT Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates. DYNPIVIS Controls when pointer input is displayed. DYNPROMPT Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips.
™ an object snap location on an object. This feature, called AutoSnap , provides a visual clue that indicates which object snaps are in effect. For a list of object snaps, see OSNAP.
NOTE If you want object snaps to ignore hatch objects, set the OSOPTIONS system variable to 1. To snap to a geometric point on an object 1 At the prompt for a point, hold down Shift and right-click in the drawing area. Select the object snap you want to use. 2 Move your cursor over the desired object snap location. If AutoSnap is on, your cursor automatically locks onto the snap location you selected, and a marker and tooltip indicate the object snap point. 3 Select an object.
Quick Reference Commands APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OSNAP Sets running object snap modes. System Variables APBOX Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off. AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. OSMODE Sets running object snaps OSNAPCOORD Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps.
another pointing device. You can also right-click while being prompted for a point and click Snap Overrides. The default object snap menu lists object snaps and tracking options. If you want to change the options, you can modify a customization file. The main customization file that’s shipped with the product is acadlt.cuix.
■ Magnet. Attracts and locks the cursor onto the nearest detected snap points. Provides a visual cue, similar to snapping to a grid. ■ Aperture box. Surrounds the crosshairs and defines an area within which object snaps are evaluated. You can choose to display or not display the aperture box, and you can change the aperture box size. The AutoSnap markers, tooltips, and magnet are turned on by default. You can change AutoSnap settings on the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box.
OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OSNAP Sets running object snap modes. System Variables APBOX Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off. AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. OSMODE Sets running object snaps Override Object Snap Settings While you work, you can turn running object snaps on and off temporarily by using an override key. Temporary override keys can also be used for other drawing aids; for example, Ortho mode and Polar mode.
Temporary override keys are also available for the other drawing aids that you set in the Drafting Settings dialog box. See also: ■ “Adjust Grid and Grid Snap” ■ “Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode)” ■ “Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap” ■ “Use Dynamic Input” ■ Keyboard Shortcuts in the Customization Guide To temporarily override the running object snap settings ■ Hold down F3 while you work. When you release the key, the current running object snap settings are restored.
To change the keyboard response time for temporary override keys 1 In the Windows Control Panel, click Keyboard. 2 In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, on the Speed tab, drag the Repeat Rate slider to adjust the keyboard response time. Then click OK. Quick Reference Commands CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OSNAP Sets running object snap modes.
The grid is a rectangular pattern of dots or lines that extends over the area you specify as the grid limits. Using the grid is similar to placing a sheet of grid paper under a drawing. The grid helps you align objects and visualize the distances between them. The grid is not plotted. Snap mode restricts the movement of the crosshairs to intervals that you define. When Snap mode is on, the cursor seems to adhere, or "snap," to an invisible rectangular grid.
dialog box. To turn off the display of major grid lines, set the frequency of major grid lines to 1. NOTE If the grid is displayed as lines, the grid limits are displayed also as darker lines. Do not confuse these boundaries with major grid lines. NOTE When the grid is displayed as lines and SNAPANG is set to a value other than 0, the grid will not display. SNAPANG does not affect the display of the dotted grid.
Change Grid and Snap Spacing As you work, you can turn Grid and Snap mode on and off, and you can change the grid and snap spacing. You can turn Snap mode on and off temporarily by using an override key. Snap spacing does not have to match grid spacing. For example, you might set a wide grid spacing to be used as a reference but maintain a closer snap spacing for accuracy in specifying points.
5 To use the same value for vertical grid spacing, press Enter. Otherwise, enter a new value for Grid Y Spacing. 6 Click OK. To turn on Snap mode and set snap spacing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings. 2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, select Snap On. 3 Under Snap Type, make sure Grid Snap and Rectangular Snap are selected. 4 In the Snap X Spacing box, enter the horizontal snap spacing value in units. 5 To specify the same vertical snap spacing, press Enter.
4 Specify a new origin point for the UCS. 5 Click OK. To change the grid display between dots and lines 1 At the Command prompt, enter SHADEMODE. 2 Do one of the following: ■ To display the grid as dots, specify the 2D Wireframe option. ■ To display the grid as lines, specify the Hidden option. To change the frequency of major grid lines 1 If necessary, at the Command prompt, enter SHADEMODE and specify the Hidden visual style. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. System Variables GRIDDISPLAY Controls the display limits of the grid. GRIDMODE Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off. GRIDMAJOR Controls the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. GRIDUNIT Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current viewport. LIMCHECK Controls the creation of objects outside the grid limits. LIMMAX Stores the upper-right grid limits for the current space, expressed as world coordinates.
SNAPUNIT Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. TEMPOVERRIDES Turns temporary override keys on and off. Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) You can restrict cursor movement to horizontal and vertical for convenience and precision when creating and modifying objects. As you create or move objects, you can use Ortho mode to restrict the cursor to the horizontal or vertical axis. As you move the cursor, the rubber-band line follows the horizontal or vertical axis, whichever is nearest the cursor.
To turn on or turn off Ortho mode ■ On the status bar, click the Ortho button. To turn Ortho on or off temporarily, hold down the Shift key while you work. While you use the temporary override key, the direct distance entry method is not available. NOTE Turning on Ortho automatically turns off polar tracking. Quick Reference Commands ORTHO Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction. System Variables ORTHOMODE Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular.
Use PolarSnap™ to snap to specified distances along the alignment path. For example, in the following illustration you draw a two-unit line from point 1 to point 2, and then draw a two-unit line to point 3 at a 45-degree angle to the line. If you turn on the 45-degree polar angle increment, an alignment path and tooltip are displayed when your cursor crosses the 0 or 45-degree angle. The alignment path and tooltip disappear when you move the cursor away from the angle.
You can turn polar tracking on and off temporarily by using an override key. The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the temporary override key for polar tracking. Specify Polar Distances (PolarSnap) PolarSnap restricts cursor movement to increments of a polar distance you specify. For example, if you specify a length of 4 units, the cursor snaps from the first point specified to lengths of 0, 4, 8, 12, 16, and so on.
To draw objects using polar tracking 1 Turn on polar tracking and start a drawing command, such as ARC, CIRCLE, or LINE. You can also use polar tracking with editing commands, such as COPY and MOVE. 2 As you move your cursor to specify points, notice the dotted polar tracking line that appears at the tracking angles you specified. Points you specify while the line is displayed conform to the polar tracking angle. To draw objects using polar distance 1 Turn on snap and polar tracking.
Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. POLARANG Sets the polar angle increment.
Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle) You can specify an angle override that locks the cursor for the next point entered. To specify an angle override, enter a left angle bracket (<) followed by an angle whenever a command asks you to specify a point. The Command prompt sequence below shows a 30-degree override entered during a LINE command.
Example: Use of Coordinate Filters in 2D In the following illustration, the hole in the holding plate was centered in the rectangle by extracting the X,Y coordinates from the midpoints of the plate's horizontal and vertical line segments. Here is the Command prompt sequence: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: .
To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 2D 1 At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x or .y). For example, enter .x to specify the X value first. 2 To extract the first coordinate value, specify a point. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, the X value is extracted from this point. 3 To extract the next coordinate value, specify a different point. The new point location combines the coordinate values extracted from the points you specified in steps 2 and 3.
Quick Reference Commands Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point. Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking) You can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationship to other objects along specified directions called alignment paths. ™ AutoTrack helps you draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects.
Change Object Snap Tracking Settings By default, object snap tracking is set to orthogonal. Alignment paths are displayed at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees from acquired object points. However, you can use polar tracking angles instead. For object snap tracking, object points are automatically acquired. NOTE You can choose to acquire points only when you press Shift.
to display an alignment path, then enter a distance at the Command prompt. NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using the temporary override key for object snap tracking. ■ Use the Automatic and Shift to Acquire options set on the Drafting tab of the Options dialog box to manage point acquisition. Point acquisition is set to Automatic by default. When working in close quarters, press Shift to temporarily avoid acquiring a point.
Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. POLARMODE Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking. TRACKPATH Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.
To use tracking to specify a point 1 Start a command, such as the LINE command. 2 Hold down Shift and right-click in the drawing area. Click Tracking. 3 Specify a point. 4 Move the cursor directly up, down, left, or right until you see the rubber-band line. The direction of movement affects the tracking direction. Notice that if you move the cursor from left to right, you must then move it directly over the last point specified in order to move it up or down. 5 Specify a second point.
Enter Direct Distances You can specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering the distance. To specify a line length quickly, without entering coordinate values, you can specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering the distance from the first point. You can enter calculated distances and points using the AutoCAD LT calculator (CAL).
Quick Reference Commands LINE Creates straight line segments. Command Modifiers Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor. Offset from Temporary Reference Points You can establish a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting subsequent points. The From command modifier establishes a temporary reference point as a base point for offsetting subsequent points.
Overview of Specifying Intervals on Objects Provides a high-level overview of two options for marking off equal distances along objects. Sometimes you need to create points or insert symbols (blocks) at intervals on an object. You can ■ Specify the length of the segments (MEASURE) ■ Specify the number of equal segments (DIVIDE) You can measure or divide lines, arcs, splines, circles, ellipses, and polylines. With both methods, you can identify the intervals by inserting either a point or a block.
DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. MEASURE Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file. System Variables PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Specify Measured Intervals on Objects You can mark off equal lengths from one end of a selected object.
To insert points at measured intervals on an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure. 2 Select a line, arc, spline, circle, ellipse, or polyline. 3 Enter an interval length, or specify points to indicate a length. Points are placed on the object at the specified intervals. To insert blocks at measured intervals on an object 1 If necessary, create the block you want to insert. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Measure.
System Variables PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Divide an Object into Equal Segments You can divide a selected object into a specified number of equal lengths. You can create points or insert blocks on an object at a specific number of equal intervals. This operation does not actually break an object into individual objects; it only identifies the location of the divisions so that you can use them as geometric reference points.
3 Enter the number of segments you want. A point is placed between each segment. To insert blocks to mark equal segments on an object 1 If necessary, create the block you want to insert. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Divide. 3 Select a line, arc, circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline. 4 Enter b (Block). 5 Enter the name of the block you want to insert. 6 Enter y to align the blocks with the divided object. Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees.
PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Extract Geometric Information from Objects The inquiry and calculation commands can provide information about objects in your drawing and do useful calculations. Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations You can obtain information about the relation between two specified points or multiple points; for example, the distance between points or their angle in the XY plane.
To calculate the distance and angle between two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance. 2 Specify a first and second point for the distance you want to calculate. 3 Press Enter. The distance displays at the Command prompt in the current units format. To calculate the distance and angle between multiple points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance. 2 For the distance you want to calculate, specify a first and second point.
System Variables DISTANCE Stores the distance computed by the DIST command. Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information You can obtain the area, perimeter, and mass properties defined by selected objects or a sequence of points. You can calculate the area and perimeter of a sequence of points. You can also obtain the area, perimeter, and mass properties of any of several types of objects. TIP A fast way to calculate an area bounded by several objects in 2D is to use the BOUNDARY command.
Calculate the Area, Perimeter, or Circumference of an Object You can calculate the enclosed area and perimeter or circumference of circles, ellipses, polylines, polygons, regions, and AutoCAD 3D solids. The information displayed depends on the type of object selected: ■ Circles. Area and circumference display. ■ Ellipses, closed polylines, polygons, planar closed spline curves, and regions. Area and perimeter display. For wide polylines, this area is defined by the center of the width.
Example: How Various Areas Are Calculated Combined Areas Calculate Combined Areas You can calculate the total area of multiple areas by specifying points or by selecting objects. For example, you can measure the total area of selected rooms in a floor plan. Subtract Areas from Combined Areas You can subtract more than one area from a combined area as you calculate. For example, if you have calculated the area of a floor plan, you can subtract the area of a room.
of each hole is subtracted. The area and perimeter or circumference of each object displays, with a running total after each step. The Command prompt sequence is Command: area Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: a Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: o (ADD mode) Select objects: Select the polyline (1) Area = 0.34, Perimeter = 2.71 Total area = 0.
See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) on page 592 ■ Overview of Object Properties on page 373 To calculate an area you define 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Area. 2 Specify points in a sequence that define the perimeter of the area you want to measure. Press Enter. The first and last points connect to form a closed area. The area and perimeter display in the current units format.
To subtract an area as you calculate 1 While a combined area displays, enter s (Subtract). 2 Do one of the following: ■ Specify points to define the area you want to subtract. Press Enter. ■ Enter o (Object) and select the objects you want to subtract. The running total of all areas updates and displays as you define new areas. 3 Press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference Commands AREA Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. LIST Displays property data for selected objects.
System Variables AREA Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. PERIMETER Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. Use a Calculator You can access a calculator function as you work with the program. You can use either the QuickCalc calculator interface or the CAL command at Command prompt transparently while a command is active or not.
■ Convert units of measurement ■ Perform geometric calculations related to specific objects ■ Copy and paste values and expressions to and from the Properties palette and the Command prompt ■ Perform computations on mixed numbers (fractions), and feet and inches ■ Define, store, and use calculator variables ■ Use geometric functions from the CAL command Change QuickCalc Size and Appearance Click the More/Less button on the calculator and only the Input box and History area are displayed.
and close areas. You can also control the size, location, and appearance of QuickCalc. See Set Interface Options on page 143. Quick Reference Commands QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. ADCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. System Variables QCSTATE Indicates whether the QuickCalc calculator is open or closed. Access QuickCalc and Understand Its Behavior Use QuickCalc directly as you would with a desktop calculator, or use it transparently within a command or the Properties palette.
You can access QuickCalc directly in the following ways: ■ Click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ QuickCalc. ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the QuickCalc button. ■ In the drawing editor (with no command active), right-click and click QuickCalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter quickcalc. ■ At the Command prompt, enter qc. Use QuickCalc Transparently from Within a Command During a command, you can access QuickCalc transparently in the following ways: ■ Right-click to display the shortcut menu.
The object or drawing property is modified and the changes are displayed in the drawing. Calculate Mathematical Expressions in a Dialog Box You can also enter and evaluate mathematical expressions in a dialog box using the following format: =expression. NOTE To evaluate expressions in a dialog box, make sure the system variable, CALCINPUT, is set to 1. To use the QuickCalc calculator Do one of the following: ■ Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc.
Quick Reference Commands QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. ADCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Enter, Evaluate, and Retrieve Expressions Enter expressions in QuickCalc using standard mathematical rules of precedence; review and retrieve computations from the History area; and understand the rules for using imperial units: length, area, and volume.
For more information see CAL. Use the History Area The History area keeps an ongoing record of calculations, similar to the paper tape in a physical desk calculator. You can use the History area to review previous operations and pass them back to the Input box for re-evaluation with different parameters.
WARNING With imperial units, QuickCalc interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9" from 5', enter 5' -9" rather than 5'-9". You can use QuickCalc to calculate square feet and cubic feet. To enter square or cubic feet, you must enter units using these abbreviations: ■ sq. ft. or sq ft ■ cu. ft.
2 Select an object. NOTE If QuickCalc is displayed on your desktop when you work with the Properties palette, it is temporarily hidden while you use the modal calculator from within the Properties palette. 3 In the Geometry section of the Properties palette, click on the value of a property. A small calculator icon is displayed to the right of the value. NOTE Only properties that are displayed with a white background can be changed. 4 Click the calculator icon.
To measure the distance between two points using QuickCalc 1 NOTE The QuickCalc toolbar Distance Between Two Points button uses the dist(p1,p2) function. On the QuickCalc toolbar, click the Distance Between Two Points button. QuickCalc temporarily closes and you are prompted to specify two points. 2 In the drawing, click the first point and then the second point. QuickCalc opens and displays the value of the distance between the two points in the Input box.
Quick Reference Commands QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator. ADCCLOSE Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Convert Units of Measurement In the Units Conversion area of QuickCalc, you can obtain equivalent values for different units of measurement. Unit conversions are available for length, area, volume, and angular values. Based on which unit type you select, you can then select a list of units to convert from and a list of units to convert to.
To copy a unit conversion result to the Input box of QuickCalc ■ On the Units Conversion title bar, click the Return Conversion Value to Input Area button. The converted value is displayed in the Input box. To convert radians to degrees using QuickCalc 1 On the Number Pad, enter a value in radians. 2 In the Scientific area, click the r2d button. 3 On the Number Pad, click the equal (=) sign. The conversion is displayed in the Input box.
You can use the Variables area to define, store, and retrieve calculator variables. Calculator variables can either be constants (coordinates/vectors, real numbers, and integers) or functions. In the Variables area, you can ■ Click a calculator variable to display information such as value, type, and description in the Details box at the bottom of the Variables area. ■ Double-click a calculator variable to load it into the QuickCalc Input box.
■ Click a variable from the list of calculator variables, and click the Return Variable to Input Area button. ■ Enter a dollar sign ($) followed by the variable name, and press Enter. To use a global constant in a text or numeric entry box in a window or dialog box, use the syntax: =$variable_name followed by pressing the END key. For example, to use the previously mentioned global variable, Phi, enter =$Phi and press the END key.
Organize Variables into Categories You can organize calculator variables in the Variables area under several categories. This results in a one-level tree structure. The Shortcut Functions category has already been created and contains several functions. Use the shortcut menu in the Variables area to create, rename, or delete variable categories. To use a predefined variable in a QuickCalc expression 1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to use.
3 In the Variable Definition dialog box, make the edits to the variable. Click OK. To delete a variable in QuickCalc 1 In the Variables area, click the variable you want to delete. 2 On the QuickCalc Variables title bar, click the Delete button. To create a new global constant in the Input box of QuickCalc ■ In the Input box of QuickCalc, enter the following syntax: $variable_name=value. For example, you could center $Phi=1.618 NOTE Global variables are not case-sensitive.
Use the Command Prompt Calculator By entering an expression in the Command prompt calculator, you can quickly solve a mathematical problem or locate points in your drawing. The CAL command runs the 3D calculator utility to evaluate vector expressions (combining points, vectors, and numbers) and real and integer expressions. The calculator performs standard mathematical functions. It also contains a set of specialized functions for calculations involving points, vectors, and AutoCAD LT geometry.
Calculating Points You can use CAL whenever you need to calculate a point or a number within a command. For example, you enter (mid+cen)/2 to specify a point halfway between the midpoint of a line and the center of a circle. The following example uses CAL as a construction tool. It locates a center point for a new circle, and then calculates one fifth of the radius of an existing circle.
Quick Reference Commands CAL Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions. System Variables CALCINPUT Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
548
Create Objects 17 You can create a range of objects, from simple lines and circles to spline curves, and ellipses. In general, you draw objects by specifying points with the pointing device or by entering coordinate values at the Command prompt. Draw Linear Objects A line, the most basic object, can be one segment or a series of connected segments. Draw Lines You can close a sequence of line segments so that the first and last segments are joined.
Use polyline objects instead of line objects if you want the segments to be connected as a single object. See also: ■ Enter Coordinates to Specify Points on page 465 ■ Use Object Snaps on page 485 ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap on page 493 ■ Draw Polylines on page 551 ■ Offset an Object on page 673 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 699 To draw lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. 2 Specify the start point. You can use the pointing device or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt.
RAY Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. XLINE Creates a line of infinite length. Draw Polylines A polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two.
gradually from one width to another. These options become available after you specify a starting point for the polyline. The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw. Widths greater than zero produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off. Intersections of adjacent wide segments are usually beveled. However, nontangent arc segments, acute angles, or segments that use a dash-dot linetype are not beveled.
To draw a polyline with straight segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the first point of the polyline. 3 Specify the endpoint of the first polyline segment. 4 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To start a new polyline at the endpoint of the last polyline drawn, start the PLINE command again and press Enter at the Specify Start Point prompt.
■ To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width. 6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. 7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 8 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline. To create a boundary polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. 2 In the Boundary Creation dialog box, in the Object Type list, select Polyline.
Quick Reference Commands 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline. BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. PEDIT Edits polylines. PLINE Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline.
PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Draw Rectangles and Polygons You can create rectangles and regular polygons quickly. Creating polygons is a simple way to draw equilateral triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, and so on. If necessary, you can use EXPLODE to convert the resulting polyline object into lines.
To draw a circumscribed polygon 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Specify the center of the polygon (1). 4 Enter c to specify a polygon circumscribed about a circle. 5 Enter the radius length (2). To draw a polygon by specifying one edge 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon. 2 At the Command prompt, enter the number of sides. 3 Enter e (Edge). 4 Specify the start point for one polygon segment. 5 Specify the endpoint of the polygon segment.
To draw a rectangle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle. 2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle. 3 Specify the other corner of the rectangle. Quick Reference Commands BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. RECTANG Creates a rectangular polyline. System Variables FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in.
SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Draw Double Lines Each double-line segment and its endcap, a line that connects the double-line endpoints, is actually a separate line object that can be individually edited. Double lines provide a good way to draw walls in floor plans. Each double-line segment and its endcap, a line that connects the double-line endpoints, is actually a separate line object that can be individually edited.
Control the Appearance of Intersections You can specify whether DLINE creates a break in a double line, line, or arc when you snap a double line to it. If the Caps option is on, the gap may not be visible. Snap Double Lines to Objects You can start or end a double line by snapping to an existing object. To speed up the snap process, you can specify the pixel size of the area where the program searches for object snap candidates.
4 Continue specifying points as needed. If you want to remove the previously specified point, enter U or -u at the Command prompt. 5 To connect the start point with the endpoint, enter cL (Close). Otherwise, press Enter to complete the double line. To draw double-line arc segments 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Double Line. 2 Specify a start point. 3 At the Command prompt, enter a (Arc).
To set double-line width 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Double Line. 2 At the Command prompt, enter w (Width). Then specify a new width. 3 Specify a point to start drawing the double line. To set the dragline for drawing double lines 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Double Line. 2 At the Command prompt, enter d (Dragline). 3 Specify the offset of the double lines from the points you specify. Enter L (Left), c (Center), or r (Right).
To create a gap where double lines intersect 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Double Line. 2 At the Command prompt, enter b (Break). 3 Enter on. 4 At the Command prompt, enter s (Snap). 5 Enter on. 6 Specify a point (1) near another double line, line, or arc. To snap to objects when drawing double lines 1 Click Draw menu ➤ Double Line. 2 At the Command prompt, enter s (Snap). 3 Specify one of these options: ■ To turn on Snap, enter on. ■ To change the size of the snap area, enter s (Size).
Draw Freehand Sketches Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a digitizer. Draw freehand sketches with the SKETCH command. Freehand sketches comprise many line segments that are converted into a line, polyline, or spline. For Splines, you can determine how closely the spline’s curve fits to the freehand sketch. For any sketch type, set the minimum length (increment) of the line segments.
2 Press Enter again to accept the last saved type, increment, and tolerance values. Quick Reference Commands SKETCH Creates a series of freehand line segments. System Variables DIGITIZER Identifies digitizers connected to the system. MAXTOUCHES SKETCHINC Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command. SKPOLY Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines. SKTOLERANCE Draw Curved Objects Curved objects are arcs, circles, polyline arcs, donuts, ellipses, and splines.
Draw Arcs by Specifying Three Points You can create an arc by specifying three points. In the following example, the start point of the arc snaps to the endpoint of a line. The second point of the arc snaps to the middle circle in the illustration. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, End You can create an arc using a start point, center, and a third point that determines the endpoint. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The included angle determines the endpoint of the arc. Use the Start, End, Angle method when you know both endpoints but cannot snap to a center point. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, Center, Length You can create an arc using a start point, center, and the length of a chord. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord between the start point and the endpoint of the arc.
The included angle between the endpoints of the arc determines the center and the radius of the arc. Draw Arcs by Specifying Start, End, Direction You can create an arc using a start point, endpoint, and a tangent direction at the start point. The tangent direction can be specified either by locating a point on the desired tangent line, or by entering an angle. You can determine which endpoint controls the tangent by changing the order in which you specify the two endpoints.
See also: ■ Draw Polylines on page 551 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 699 To draw an arc by specifying three points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ 3-Point. 2 Specify the start point. 3 Specify a point on the arc. 4 Specify the endpoint. To draw an arc using a start point, a center point, and an endpoint 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Start, Center, End. 2 Specify a start point. 3 Specify the center point. 4 Specify the endpoint.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ Continue. 3 Specify the second endpoint of the tangent arc. Quick Reference Commands ARC Creates an arc. LINE Creates straight line segments. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. System Variables ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles.
Draw a Circle Tangent to Other Objects The tangent point is a point where an object touches another object without intersecting it. To create a circle that is tangent to other objects, select the objects and then specify the radius of the circle. In the illustrations below, the bold circle is the one being drawn, and points 1 and 2 select the objects to which it is tangent.
To draw a circle by specifying a center point and radius or diameter 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Radius. ■ Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Diameter. 2 Specify the center point. 3 Specify the radius or diameter. To create a circle tangent to two objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Tan, Tan, Radius. The command starts Tangent object snap mode. 2 Select the first object to draw the circle tangent to.
System Variables CIRCLERAD Sets the default circle radius. WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth. Draw Polyline Arcs A polyline is a connected sequence of line segments created as a single object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. Multisegmented lines provide editing capabilities unavailable for single lines. For example, you can adjust their width and curvature.
Create Wide Polylines You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options. You can set the width of individual segments and make them taper gradually from one width to another. These options become available after you specify a starting point for the polyline. The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw. Zero (0) width produces a thin line.
See also: ■ Modify Splines on page 708 ■ Modify Polylines on page 703 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 699 ■ Control Lineweights on page 438 To draw a polyline with straight segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the first point of the polyline. 3 Specify the endpoint of the first polyline segment. 4 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed. 5 Press Enter to end, or enter c to close the polyline.
To create a wide polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline. 2 Specify the start point of the line segment. 3 Enter w (Width). 4 Enter the starting width of the line segment. 5 Specify the ending width of the line segment using one of the following methods: ■ To create a line segment of equal width, press Enter. ■ To create a tapering line segment, enter a different width. 6 Specify the endpoint of the polyline segment. 7 Continue specifying segment endpoints as needed.
6 Press Enter to create the boundary polyline and end the command. The command creates a polyline in the shape of the boundary. Because this polyline overlaps the objects used to create it, it may not be visible. However, you can move, copy, or modify it just as you can any other polyline. Quick Reference Commands 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline. BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. PEDIT Edits polylines.
PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Draw Donuts Donuts are filled rings or solid-filled circles that actually are closed polylines with width. To create a donut, you specify its inside and outside diameters and its center. You can continue creating multiple copies with the same diameter by specifying different center points.
Quick Reference Commands DONUT Creates a filled circle or a wide ring. FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. System Variables DONUTID Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut. DONUTOD Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. Draw Ellipses The shape of an ellipse is determined by two axes that define its length and width.
The illustrations below show two different ellipses created by specifying axis and distance. The third point specifies only a distance and does not necessarily designate the axis endpoint. If you are drawing on isometric planes to simulate 3D, you can use ellipses to represent isometric circles viewed from an oblique angle. First you need to turn on Isometric Snap in the Drafting Settings dialog box (DSETTINGS command).
4 Enter i (Isocircle). 5 Specify the center of the circle. 6 Specify the radius or diameter of the circle. To draw a true ellipse using endpoints and distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Axis, End. 2 Specify the first endpoint of the first axis (1). 3 Specify the second endpoint of the first axis (2). 4 Drag the pointing device away from the midpoint, and click to specify a distance (3) for half the length of the second axis.
Quick Reference Commands ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. System Variables ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. PELLIPSE Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE. Draw Splines A spline is a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of points that influence the shape of the curve. SPLINE and BLEND create curves called nonuniform rational B-splines (NURBS), referred to as splines for simplicity.
BLEND was used to create splines between lines and arcs for a golf course design. The resulting splines are tangent to the selected lines and curves without changing the lengths of the selected objects. Understand Control Vertices and Fit Points You can create or edit splines using either control vertices, or fit points. The spline on the left displays control vertices along a control polygon, and the spline on the right displays fit points.
IMPORTANT Switching the display from control vertices to fit points automatically changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result. Create Splines Using Control Vertices When you create splines using control vertices, the points you specify display temporary lines between them, forming a control polygon that determines the shape of the spline.
You can choose the spacing of these knots with the knot parameterization option, which will result in different curves as shown in the example. NOTE There is no best choice for knot parameterization for all cases. The chord length parameterization is commonly used, and the square root (centripetal) parameterization often produces better curves depending on the data set. When the Tolerance value is set to 0, the spline passes directly through the fit points.
You can close a spline so that the start point and end point are coincident and tangent. By default, closed splines are mathematically periodic, meaning that they have the smoothest (C2) continuity at the point of closure. In the example, both splines are closed, and the point of closure is marked with a dot. The result of setting the SPLPERIODIC system variable to periodic is shown on the left, while the result of the legacy setting is shown on the right.
2 (Optional) Enter con (Continuity) and enter a tangency option. 3 Select a line or curve near an endpoint. 4 Select another line or curve near an endpoint. To convert a spline-fit polyline to a spline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline. 2 Enter o (Object). 3 Select a spline-fit polyline and press Enter. The selected object changes from a polyline to a spline. Quick Reference Commands BLEND Creates a spline in the gap between two selected lines or curves.
SPLINEDIT Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline. System Variables PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. SPLPERIODIC Controls whether closed splines and NURBS surfaces are generated with periodic properties to maintain the smoothest continuity at the closure point or seam. Draw Construction and Reference Geometry Construction lines and reference points are temporary objects you create to help you draw accurately.
4 Click OK. To create a point object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point drop-down ➤ Multiple Points. 2 Specify the point location. You can snap to a point using the Node object snap. Quick Reference Commands DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. POINT Creates a point object. System Variables PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects.
ignored by commands that display the drawing extents. You can move, rotate, and copy infinite lines just as you can move, rotate, and copy other objects. You may want to create infinite lines on a construction line layer that can be frozen or turned off before plotting. Construction Lines A construction line (also known as xlines) can be placed anywhere in three-dimensional space. You can specify its orientation in several ways.
To create a construction line by specifying two points 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line. 2 Specify a point to define the root of the construction line. 3 Specify a second point through which the construction line should pass. 4 Continue to specify construction lines as needed. All subsequent xlines pass through the first point specified. 5 Press Enter to end the command. To create a ray 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray. 2 Specify a starting point for the ray.
Quick Reference Commands RAY Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. XLINE Creates a line of infinite length. Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Regions are 2D enclosed areas that have physical properties such as centroids or centers of mass. You can combine existing regions into a single, complex region.
Objects combined using UNION: Objects combined using SUBTRACT: Objects combined using INTERSECT: Invalid Boundaries When a boundary cannot be determined, it might be because the specified internal point is not within a fully enclosed area. With the BOUNDARY command, red circles are displayed around unconnected endpoints of the boundary to identify gaps in the boundary.
The red circles remain displayed even after you exit the command. They are removed when you specify a closed boundary, or by using REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL. To define regions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Region. 2 Select objects to create the region. These objects must each form an enclosed area, such as a circle or a closed polyline. 3 Press Enter. A message at the Command prompt indicates how many loops were detected and how many regions were created.
NOTE You can make a new boundary set to limit the objects used to determine the boundary. To combine regions by adding 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Union. 2 Select one region for the union. 3 Select another region. You can select regions to unite in any order. 4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command. The command converts the selected regions to a new combined region. To combine regions by adding 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Region ➤ Union. 2 Select one region for the union.
To combine regions by finding intersections 1 Click Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect. 2 Select one region of the intersection. 3 Select another intersecting region. You can select regions in any order to find their intersection. 4 Continue selecting regions or press Enter to end the command. The command converts the selected regions to a new region defined by the intersection of the selected regions. Quick Reference Commands BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.
polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud-shaped object. You can select a style for a revision cloud: Normal or Calligraphy. If you select Calligraphy, the revision cloud looks as if it was drawn with a calligraphy pen. You can create a revision cloud from scratch, or you can convert objects, such as a circle, ellipse, polyline, or spline, to a revision cloud. When you convert an object to a revision cloud, the original object is deleted if DELOBJ is set to 1 (the default).
To close the revision cloud, return to its starting point. To create revision clouds with a calligraphy pen style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud. 2 At the Command prompt, enter style. 3 At the Command prompt, enter calligraphy. 4 Press Enter to save the calligraphy setting and to continue with the command, or press ESC to end the command. To convert an object to a revision cloud 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Revision Cloud.
The maximum arc length can be no more than three times the minimum arc length. 4 Press Enter to continue with the command or ESC to end the command. To edit the individual lengths of arcs or chords in a revision cloud 1 In your drawing, select the revision cloud you want to edit. 2 Move the pick points along the path of the revision cloud to change the arc lengths and chords. Quick Reference Commands REVCLOUD Creates a revision cloud using a polyline.
600
Select and Modify Objects 18 You can select objects, view and edit object properties, and perform general and object-specific editing operations. Select Objects You have a wide range of options when you need to select objects for editing operations. Select Objects Individually At the Select Objects prompt, you can select one or more objects individually. Use the Pickbox Cursor When the square pickbox cursor is in position to select an object, the object is highlighted. Click to select the object.
If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling over the object on top to highlight it, or you can press and hold Shift and then press the Spacebar. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to select it. If selection preview is turned off, hold down Shift and Spacebar at a Select Objects prompt while you left-click to cycle through the objects until the one you want is highlighted, and then press Enter . Press Esc to turn off cycling.
NOTE If selection preview is turned on, you can cycle through the objects by rolling over the object on top to highlight it, and pressing and holding Shift and then pressing Spacebar continuously. When the required object is highlighted, left-click to select it. To remove selection from objects ■ Hold down Shift. Click the objects that you want removed from the selection set. Quick Reference PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
Select Multiple Objects At the Select Objects prompt, you can select many objects at the same time. Specify a Rectangular Selection Area Specify opposite corners to define a rectangular area. The background inside the area changes color and becomes transparent. The direction that you drag your cursor from the first point to the opposite corner determines which objects are selected. ■ Window selection.
Specify an Irregularly Shaped Selection Area Specify points to define an irregularly shaped area. Use window polygon selection to select objects entirely enclosed by the selection area. Use crossing polygon selection to select objects enclosed or crossed by the selection area. Specify a Selection Fence In a complex drawing, use a selection fence. A selection fence looks like a polyline and selects only the objects it passes through. The circuit board illustration shows a fence selecting several components.
To see a list of options at the Select Objects prompt ■ Enter ? at the Select Objects prompt. To select objects within an irregularly shaped area 1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter wp (Window Polygon). 2 Specify points that define an area entirely enclosing the objects you want to select. 3 Press Enter to close the polygon selection area and complete the selection. To select objects crossing an irregularly shaped area 1 At the Select Objects prompt, enter cp (Crossing Polygon).
QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
To help you differentiate between locked and unlocked layers, you can do the following: ■ Hover over an object to see whether a lock icon is displayed ■ Dim the objects on locked layers NOTE Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. To lock or unlock a layer 1 Click Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties. 2 In the Layer Properties Manager, click the padlock for the layers that you want to lock. 3 Click OK.
LAYLCK Locks the layer of a selected object. LAYULK Unlocks the layer of a selected object. LAYLOCKFADECTL Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers. Select Objects by Properties Use object properties or object types to include objects in a selection set, or to exclude them.
See also: ■ Customize Object Selection on page 613 ■ Work with Layers on page 380 To create a selection set using Quick Select 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 2 In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Entire Drawing. 3 Under Object Type, select Multiple. 4 Under Properties, select Color. 5 Under Operator, select Equals. 6 Under Value, specify the color. 7 Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set. 8 Click OK.
All circles with a radius greater than 1 are removed from the selection set. To append objects to the selection set You can use Quick Select to append objects to a current selection set. In the following example, you keep the current selection set and append all objects in the drawing that contain hyperlinks whose names begin with bld1_. 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select. 2 In the Quick Select dialog box, select Append to Current Selection Set. 3 In the Object Type box, select Multiple.
To use a named filter 1 At the Select Object prompt, enter 'filter. (The apostrophe makes it a transparent command.) 2 In the Object Selection Filters dialog box, under Select Filter, select the filter you want to use. Click Apply. 3 Use a crossing window to specify objects for selection. Only the objects selected by the crossing window that match the filter criteria are selected. To create a selection set of similar objects 1 Enter selectsimilar. 2 Enter se (settings).
SELECTSIMILAR Adds similar objects to the selection set based on selected objects. PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. PICKBOX Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
Select the Command First When you use an editing command, a Select Objects prompt is displayed and the crosshairs is replaced with a pickbox. You can respond to the Select Objects prompt in various ways: ■ Select objects one at a time. ■ Click an empty area. Drag the cursor to define a rectangular selection area. ■ Enter a selection option. Enter ? to display all selection options. ■ Combine selection methods.
Control the Appearance of Selected Objects By default, selected objects are displayed with dashed lines. You can increase program performance by setting the HIGHLIGHT system variable to 0. Turning off selection highlighting does not affect grips on selected objects. Set Up Default Selection Methods The default selection methods are: ■ Use selection previewing and selection area effects to preview selection. ■ Select objects before entering a command (noun-verb selection) or after entering a command.
3 Click OK. To turn on or turn off selection previewing 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear options as follows: ■ Select the When a Command Is Active option to display the check mark. ■ Select the When No Command Is Active option to display the check mark. ■ Select both options to turn on selection preview whenever it is available. ■ Clear both options to turn off selection preview entirely.
4 In the Advanced Preview Options dialog box, select any of the following options to exclude objects from selection previewing: ■ Exclude Objects on Locked Layers ■ Xrefs ■ Tables ■ Groups ■ Multiline Text ■ Hatches 5 Click OK to exit each dialog box. To change the appearance of the selection area 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, click Visual Effect Settings.
Quick Reference FILTER Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. CROSSINGAREACOLOR Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips.
PREVIEWFILTER Excludes specified object types from selection previewing. SELECTIONAREA Controls the display of effects for selection areas. SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. SELECTIONPREVIEW Controls the display of selection previewing. WINDOWAREACOLOR Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection.
Quick Reference GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. PKFSTGROUP Opens the legacy Group Manager. QKUNGROUP Removes a group definition from a drawing. GROUPDISPLAYMODE Controls the display and grips on groups, when group selection is on. PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
external reference or explode the block to make the group available as an unnamed group. NOTE Avoid creating large groups containing hundreds or thousands of objects. A large group significantly degrades the performance of this program. To create an unnamed group 1 Select the objects to associate into a group. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Group. The selected objects are grouped together into an unnamed group, which is assigned a default name such as *A1.
By default, groups are selectable; that is, selecting any member of a group selects all the objects in that group. You can then edit the group as a unit. Selecting an object that belongs to multiple groups selects all groups to which that object belongs. Turn off group selection to select grouped objects individually. TIP Toggle group selection off or on by pressing Ctrl+H or Shift+Ctrl+A.
TIP At the prompt, enter PKFSTGROUP to open the legacy Group Manager. To identify which groups an object belongs to 1 In the drawing area, select an object. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Named Groups. 3 With the cursor over any group name, right-click. Click Clear All. 4 With the cursor over any group name, right-click. Click Show Groups for Selected Objects. The objects are highlighted in the Group column. Quick Reference GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.
Change Group Components, Name, or Description You can specify objects to be added to or removed from a group at any time. You can also rename a group or change it’s description. If deleting an object or removing it from a group leaves the group empty, the group remains defined but without any members. NOTE Exploding an object such as a block or hatch that belongs to a group does not automatically add the resulting components to any group.
3 At the prompt, enter rename. 4 Enter a new name. 5 Press Enter. The group is renamed. Quick Reference GROUPEDIT Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected group. QKUNGROUP Removes a group definition from a drawing. PKFSTGROUP Opens the legacy Group Manager. UNGROUP Disassociates the objects from a group. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Correct Mistakes You can backtrack your recent actions using one of several methods.
Undo Several Actions at Once Use the Mark option of UNDO to mark an action as you work. You can then use the Back option of UNDO to undo all actions that occurred after the marked action. Use the Begin and End options of UNDO to define a set of actions to be treated as a group. You can also undo several actions at once with the Undo list on the Standard toolbar. Reverse the Effect of Undo You can reverse the effect of a single U or UNDO command by using REDO immediately after using U or UNDO.
Only the action immediately preceding an UNDO command can be reversed with REDO. You cannot use REDO to repeat another command. To redo a specific number of actions 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Redo list arrow. A list of undo actions that you can redo, starting with the most recent action, is displayed. 2 Drag to select the actions to redo. 3 Click to redo the selected actions. Quick Reference ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
UNDOMARKS Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark option. Erase Objects There are many ways to delete objects from your drawing and clean up the display. Remove Unused Definitions, Styles, and Objects You can remove unused named and unnamed objects with PURGE. Some of the unnamed objects you can purge include block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles. With PURGE you can also remove zero-length geometry and empty text objects.
■ Enter all to erase all objects from the drawing. ■ Enter ? to see a list of all selection methods. 3 Press Enter to end the command. To delete duplicate objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects 2 At the Select Objects prompt, use a selection method to select objects. 3 Press Enter. The Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box is displayed. 4 Optional: ■ Specify a Tolerance value. ■ Select properties to ignore during object comparison.
To purge an unused linetype 1 Click Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge. The Purge dialog box displays a tree view of object types with items that can be purged. 2 To purge unreferenced linetypes, use one of the following methods: ■ To purge all unreferenced linetypes, select Linetypes. ■ To purge specific linetypes, double-click Linetypes to expand the tree view. Then select the linetypes to be purged. If the item you want to purge is not listed, select View Items You Cannot Purge.
ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. OOPS Restores erased objects. OVERKILL Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines partially overlapping or contiguous ones. PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. REDRAW Refreshes the display in the current viewport. REGEN Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. UNDO Reverses the effect of commands.
Paste Objects Applications use different internal formats to store Clipboard information. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. However, you can override this setting and convert pasted information to AutoCAD LT format. Because it is the easiest format to edit, the AutoCAD LT format is the preferred format for copying objects to and from AutoCAD LT.
To copy objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to copy. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy Clip. You can also press Ctrl+C. To paste objects from the Clipboard ■ Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste. You can also press Ctrl+V. The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing. To convert pasted information to drawing file format 1 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste Special. 2 In the Paste Special dialog box, select Paste.
PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. PASTEORIG Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original coordinates. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. WMFIN Imports a Windows metafile. WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN. WMFOUT Saves objects to a Windows metafile. CLIPBOARD Indicates the status of the Clipboard. OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects.
■ Modify Existing Dimensions on page 1126 Choose a Method to Modify Objects Access object editing options using the following methods: Methods Descriptions Command line Enter a command and then select the objects to modify. Alternatively, select the objects first and then enter a command. Shortcut menu Select and right-click an object to display a shortcut menu with relevant editing options.
■ Select Objects on page 601 ■ Modify Existing Dimensions on page 1126 ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects on page 375 ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1434 ■ “Double Click Actions” in the Customization Guide Quick Reference CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
Modify Objects Using Grips Grips are displayed at strategic points on selected objects. Use Object Grips You can reshape, move, or manipulate objects in other ways using different types of grips and grip modes. Overview You can use grips in different ways: ■ Use grip modes. Select an object grip to work with the default grip mode—stretch—or press Enter or Spacebar to cycle through the additional grip modes—move, rotate, scale, and mirror.
Important Notes ■ Grips are not displayed on objects that are on locked layers. ■ When you select multiple objects that share coincident grips, you can edit these objects using grip modes; however, any object- or grip-specific options are not available. Tips for Stretching with Grips ■ When you select more than one grip on an object to stretch it, the shape of the object is kept intact between the selected grips.
Limit the Display of Grips to Improve Performance You can limit the maximum number of objects that display grips. For example, when a drawing contains hatch objects or polylines with many grips, selecting these objects can take a long time. The GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable suppresses the display of grips when the initial selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. If you add objects to the current selection set, the limit does not apply.
3 Move the pointing device and click. TIP To copy the object, press and hold Ctrl until you have clicked to reposition the grip. To stretch multiple objects using grips 1 Select several objects to stretch. 2 Hold down Shift and click several grips so that they are highlighted. 3 Release Shift and select a grip as the base grip by clicking the grip. 4 Move the pointing device and click. Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers over grips on dynamic blocks and custom objects that support grip tips. Make Multiple Copies with Grips You can create multiple copies of objects as you modify them with any of the grip modes.
is placed at an offset of two units. All subsequent copies are then placed two units apart. If you hold down Ctrl while you select multiple copy points with the pointing device, the graphics cursor snaps to an offset point based on the last two points you selected. In the illustration below, the midpoint of line 1 is at coordinate 8,5. Based on that midpoint, line 2 was copied using the Ctrl key and Stretch grip mode; its midpoint is at 9,5.
2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode you want appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter c (Copy) or press and hold the Ctrl key while you stretch, move, rotate, or scale. Copies continue being made until you turn off grips.
2 Select a base grip on an object by clicking the grip. The selected grip is highlighted, and the default grip mode, Stretch, is active. 3 Cycle through the grip modes by pressing Enter until the grip mode Rotate appears. Alternatively, you can right-click to display shortcut menu modes and options. 4 Enter c (Copy). 5 Move the pointing device and click. The rotation snap is the angle between the grip you selected and the location you specified for the copy.
Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Control Grips in Blocks You can specify whether a block displays a single grip or multiple grips.
To turn grips within blocks on or off 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Selection tab, select or clear Enable Grips Within Blocks. 3 Click OK. Quick Reference OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks. GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
Use coordinates, grid snap, object snaps, and other tools to move objects with precision. Specify Distance with Two Points Move an object using the distance and direction specified by a base point followed by a second point. In this example, you move the block representing a window. Select the object to be moved (1). Specify the base point for the move (2) followed by a second point (3). The object is moved the distance and direction of point 2 to point 3.
you to specify whether to move, copy, or create a block from the dragged objects. Dragging disregards all snap settings. To nudge selected objects in orthogonal increments, press Ctrl + arrow keys. Snap mode affects the distance and direction in which the objects are nudged. ■ Nudge objects with Snap mode turned off: Objects move two pixels at a time; movement is relative and orthogonal to the screen, regardless of the view direction or the UCS orientation.
The coordinate values are used as a relative displacement rather than the location of a base point. The selected objects are moved to a new location determined by the relative coordinate values you enter. To move an object from model space to paper space (or vice versa) 1 Click a layout tab. 2 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Change Space. 3 Select one or more objects to move. 4 Press Enter. The object is moved to the new space, and is scaled appropriately to the new space.
Quick Reference Commands CHSPACE Moves objects between model space and paper space. MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. System Variable SNAPUNIT Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. Command Modifiers Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor.
Rotate an Object by Dragging Drag the object around the base point and specify a second point. Use Ortho mode, polar tracking, or object snaps for greater precision. For example, you can rotate the plan view of a house by selecting the objects (1), specifying a base point (2), and specifying an angle of rotation by dragging to another point (3). Rotate an Object to an Absolute Angle With the Reference option, you can rotate an object to align it to an absolute angle.
To rotate an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate. 2 Select the object to rotate. 3 Specify the base point for the rotation. 4 Do one of the following: ■ Enter the angle of rotation. ■ Drag the object around its base point and specify a point location to which you want to rotate the object. ■ Enter c to create a copy of the selected objects. ■ Enter r to rotate the selected objects from a specified reference angle to an absolute angle.
Quick Reference Commands ROTATE Rotates objects around a base point. Align Objects You can move, rotate, or tilt an object so that it aligns with another object. In the following example, two pairs of points are used to align the piping in 2D using the ALIGN command. Endpoint object snaps align the pipes precisely. To align two objects in 2D 1 Click Modify menu ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Align. 2 Select the objects that you want to align. 3 Specify a source point and then the corresponding destination point.
Quick Reference Commands ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D. System Variables Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects You can create duplicates of objects in your drawing that are either identical or similar to selected objects.
Specify Distance with Relative Coordinates Copy an object using a relative distance by entering coordinate values for the first point and pressing Enter for the second point. The coordinate values are used as a relative displacement rather than the location of a base point. NOTE Do not include an @ sign as you normally would for relative coordinates, because relative coordinates are expected. To copy objects a specified distance, you can also use direct distance entry with Ortho mode and polar tracking.
Move and Copy Objects by Dragging You can also select objects and drag them to a new location using the left mouse button over one of the selected objects; press Ctrl to make a copy. Using this method, you can drag objects between open drawings and other applications. If you drag with the right mouse button instead of the left, a shortcut menu is displayed after you drag the objects. The menu options include Move Here, Copy Here, Paste as Block, and Cancel.
System Variables COPYMODE Controls whether the COPY command repeats automatically. Array Objects Create multiple copies of objects that are evenly distributed in a rectangular or circular pattern, or along a specified path. Overview of Arrays Create copies of objects arranged in a pattern called an array.
■ Non-associative. Items in the array are created as independent objects. Changes to one item do not affect the other items. Create Rectangular Arrays In rectangular arrays, items are distributed into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. A dynamic preview allows you to quickly derive the number and spacing of rows and columns. Add levels to make a 3D array. The number of rows and columns and the spacing between the rows and columns in the array increase or decrease as you move your cursor.
3 Specify a point for the opposite corner of the grid to set the number of rows and columns. A preview grid displays as you define the array. 4 Specify a point for the opposite corner of the grid to set the row and column spacing. 5 Press Enter. Quick Reference Commands ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state. ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects.
UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type.
Control Item Distribution The distribution of items along the path can be measured or divided. ■ Measure. The array follows the path when it is edited but the number of objects and spacing do not change. If the path is edited and becomes too short to display all objects, the count is automatically adjusted. ■ Divide. The number of objects and the length of the path determine the spacing of the objects in the array. The objects are always spaced evenly along the entire length of the path.
5 Do one of the following: ■ Specify the distance between items. ■ Enter d (Divide) to evenly distribute items along the entire length of the path. ■ Enter t (Total) and specify the total distance between the first and last items. ■ Enter e (Expression) and define an expression. 6 Press Enter. Quick Reference Commands ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state.
UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. GETENV Shows values of specified system registry variables. SETENV Sets values of specified registry variables. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects.
The direction in which the array is drawn depends on whether you enter a positive or negative value for the fill angle. For associative arrays, you can change the direction in the Properties palette. To create a polar array 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Polar Array. 2 Select the objects to array. 3 Do one of the following: ■ Specify a center point. ■ Specify a base point. ■ Enter a (Axis of rotation) and specify two points to define a custom axis of rotation.
You can also create the array by defining the angle between items. Quick Reference Commands ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state. ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects. ARRAYPATH Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.
System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type. DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted. SNAPANG Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.
Apply Item Overrides Ctrl+click items in the array to erase, move, rotate, or scale the selected items without affecting the rest of the array. Reset the array to remove all item overrides.
Replace Items Replace selected items with other objects. Any item overrides are maintained. You can also replace all items that reference the original source objects, rather than selecting individual items. Edit Source Objects To edit an item’s source objects, activate an editing state for a selected item. All changes (including the creation of new objects) are instantly applied to all items referencing the same set of source objects. Save or discard your changes to exit the editing state.
To modify the number of items in a rectangular array 1 Select the array. 2 Hover over the Corner grip to display the grip menu. The Corner grip is displayed on the first item in the last column of the rectangular array. 3 Click the Row and Column Count option. 4 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the number of rows and columns and then click. To adjust the item spacing between objects in a path array 1 Select the array. 2 In the Properties palette, set the Method property to Measure.
The Angle Between grip is displayed on the second item in the first row of the polar array. This grip is displayed only when there are three or more items in the array. 3 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the angle between the items and then click. Quick Reference Commands ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state.
GETENV Shows values of specified system registry variables. SETENV Sets values of specified registry variables. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type.
The MaxArray system registry variable is validated when using the ARRAYEDIT command. The Array Limit Object task dialog is displayed when the total count of the modified array exceeds the current MaxArray value. NOTE When changing the value of MaxArray, you must enter MaxArray with the capitalization shown. Quick Reference Commands ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state.
GETENV Shows values of specified system registry variables. SETENV Sets values of specified registry variables. System Variables ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles. ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type.
TIP An effective drawing technique is to offset objects and then trim or extend their ends. Use OFFSET to offset the following object types: ■ Lines ■ Arcs ■ Circles ■ Ellipses and elliptical arcs (resulting in an oval-shaped spline) ■ 2D polylines ■ Construction lines (xlines) and rays ■ Splines Special Cases for Offset Polylines and Splines 2D polylines are offset as individual line segments, resulting in either intersections or gaps between segments.
Splines are trimmed automatically when the offset distance is larger than can otherwise be accommodated. To offset an object by specifying a distance 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset. 2 Specify the offset distance. You can enter a value or use the pointing device. 3 Select the object to offset. 4 Specify a point to indicate whether the object is to be offset inside or outside of the original object. 5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command.
To offset an object through a point 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset. 2 Enter t (Through). 3 Select the object to offset. 4 Specify a point through which the offset object is to pass. 5 Select another object to offset, or press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference Commands OFFSET Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. System Variables OFFSETDIST Sets the default offset distance.
By default, when you mirror text, hatches, attributes, and attribute definitions, they are not reversed or turned upside down in the mirror image. The text has the same alignment and justification as before the object was mirrored. If you do want text to be reversed, set the MIRRTEXT system variable to 1. MIRRTEXT affects text that is created with the TEXT, ATTDEF, or MTEXT commands; attribute definitions; and variable attributes.
Quick Reference Commands MIRROR Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects. System Variables MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. Change the Size and Shape of Objects There are several methods for adjusting the lengths of existing objects relative to other objects, both symmetrically and asymmetrically. Trim or Extend Objects You can shorten or lengthen objects to meet the edges of other objects.
For example, you can clean up the intersection of two walls smoothly by trimming. An object can be one of the cutting edges and one of the objects being trimmed. For example, in the illustrated light fixture, the circle is a cutting edge for the construction lines and is also being trimmed. When you trim several objects, the different selection methods can help you choose the current cutting edges and objects to trim. In the following example, the cutting edges are selected using crossing selection.
You can trim objects to their nearest intersection with other objects. Instead of selecting cutting edges, you press Enter. Then, when you select the objects to trim, the nearest displayed objects act as cutting edges. In this example, the walls are trimmed so that they intersect smoothly. NOTE You can extend objects without exiting the TRIM command. Press and hold Shift while selecting the objects to be extended. Extend Objects Extending operates the same way as trimming.
NOTE You can trim objects without exiting the EXTEND command. Press and hold Shift while selecting the objects to be trimmed. Trim and Extend Wide Polylines 2D wide polylines trim and extend at their centerlines. The ends of wide polylines are always square. Trimming a wide polyline at an angle causes portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge If you trim or extend a tapered 2D polyline segment, the width of the extended end is corrected to continue the original taper to the new endpoint.
■ The plane of the current view ■ True 3D, which is not a projection See also: ■ Break and Join Objects on page 699 To extend an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend. 2 Select the objects to serve as boundary edges. To select all displayed objects as potential boundary edges, press Enter without selecting any objects. 3 Select the objects to extend. To trim an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim. 2 Select the objects to serve as cutting edges.
7 Select the object to extend (2). To trim in 3D using the current view plane 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim . 2 Select the cutting edge for trimming (1). 3 Enter p (Project). 4 Enter v (View). 5 Select the object to trim (2). To trim objects in 3D wireframe models 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim . 2 Select the cutting edges to use for trimming (1). 3 Enter p (Project). 4 Enter n (None). 5 Select the object to trim (2 and 3).
Quick Reference Commands BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points. EXTEND Extends objects to meet the edges of other objects. JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. TRIM Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects. System Variables EDGEMODE Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges.
Resize or Reshape Objects You can resize objects to make them longer or shorter in only one direction or to make them proportionally larger or smaller. You can also stretch certain objects by moving an endpoint, vertex, or control point. Lengthen Objects With LENGTHEN, you can change the included angle of arcs and the length of the following objects: ■ Lines ■ Arcs ■ Open polylines ■ Elliptical arcs ■ Open splines. The results are similar to extending and trimming.
Use object snaps, grid snaps, and relative coordinate entry to stretch with precision. Scale Objects Using a Scale Factor With SCALE, you can make an object uniformly larger or smaller. To scale an object, you specify a base point and a scale factor. Alternatively, you can specify a length to be used as a scale factor based on the current drawing units. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the object.
See also: ■ Break and Join Objects on page 699 To stretch an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch. 2 Select the object using a crossing window selection. The crossing window must include at least one vertex or endpoint. 3 Do one of the following: ■ Enter the displacement in the form of a relative Cartesian, polar, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate. Do not include the @ sign, because a relative coordinate is assumed. Press Enter at the prompt for the second point of displacement.
3 Select the base point. 4 Enter r (Reference). 5 Select the first and second reference points, or enter a value for the reference length. To change the length of an object by dragging 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen. 2 Enter dy (Dynamic Dragging mode). 3 Select the object you want to lengthen. 4 Drag the endpoint closest to the point of selection, and specify a new endpoint. The selected object is lengthened or shortened without changing its location or orientation.
STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. System Variables PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. Fillet, Chamfer, Break, or Join Objects You can change objects to meet in rounded or flattened corners. You can also create or close gaps in objects. Create Fillets A fillet connects two objects with an arc that is tangent to the objects and has a specified radius.
FILLET can be used to round all corners on a polyline using a single command. Also, you can use the Multiple option to fillet more than one set of objects without leaving the command. NOTE Filleting a hatch boundary that was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the hatch boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity is maintained. If both objects being filleted are on the same layer, the fillet arc is created on that layer.
Control the Location of the Fillet Depending on the locations you specify, more than one possible fillet can exist between the selected objects. Compare the selection locations and resulting fillets in the illustrations. Fillet Line and Polyline Combinations To fillet lines with polylines, each line or its extension must intersect one of the polyline line segments. If the Trim option is on, the filleted objects and the fillet arc join to form a single new polyline.
If two linear segments in a polyline are separated by an arc segment between them, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a new arc segment of the current fillet radius. If you set the fillet radius to 0, no fillet arcs are inserted. If two linear polyline segments are separated by one arc segment, FILLET removes that arc and extends the linear segments until they intersect. Fillet Parallel Lines You can fillet parallel lines, xlines, and rays.
To fillet two line segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Select the first line. 3 Select the second line. To fillet without trimming 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 If necessary, enter t (Trim). Enter n (No Trim). 3 Select the objects to fillet. To fillet an entire polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Enter p (Polyline). 3 Select the polyline. To fillet multiple sets of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet. 2 Enter m (Multiple).
Quick Reference Commands FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. System Variables FILLETRAD Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects. TRIMMODE Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed. Create Chamfers A chamfer connects two objects to meet in a flattened or beveled corner. A chamfer connects two objects with an angled line. It is usually used to represent a beveled edge on a corner.
If both objects being chamfered are on the same layer, the chamfer line is created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer line is created on the current layer. The layer affects object properties including color and linetype. Use the Multiple option to chamfer more than one set of objects without leaving the command. Chamfer by Specifying Distances The chamfer distance is the amount each object is trimmed or extended to meet the chamfer line or to intersect the other.
In this example, you chamfer two lines so that the chamfer line starts 1.5 units from the intersection along the first line and forms an angle of 30 degrees with this line. Chamfer Polylines and Polyline Segments If the two objects you select for chamfering are segments of a polyline, they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one arc segment. If they are separated by an arc segment, as shown in the illustration, chamfering deletes the arc and replaces it with a chamfer line.
When you chamfer an entire polyline, only the segments that are long enough to accommodate the chamfer distance are chamfered. The polyline in the following illustration has some segments too short to be chamfered. To set chamfer distances 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter d (Distances). 3 Enter the first chamfer distance. 4 Enter the second chamfer distance. 5 Select the lines for chamfering. To chamfer two nonparallel line segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
To chamfer without trimming 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter t (Trim Control). 3 Enter n (No Trim). 4 Select the objects to chamfer. To chamfer an entire polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter p (Polyline). 3 Select the polyline. The polyline is chamfered using the current chamfer method and the default distances. To chamfer multiple sets of objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer. 2 Enter m (Multiple). The main prompt is displayed.
Quick Reference Commands CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects. System Variables CHAMFERA Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERB Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERC Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1. CHAMFERD Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1. CHAMMODE Sets the input method for CHAMFER PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY TRIMMODE Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed.
To break an object without creating a gap, specify both break points at the same location. You can create breaks in most geometric objects except blocks, dimensions, multilines, and regions. As an alternative, use EXPLODE on these types of objects, and create breaks in the dissociated geometry. Join Objects Use JOIN to combine lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, polylines, 3D polylines, and splines by their endpoints into a single object. The result of the join operation varies depending on the objects selected.
To break an object 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break. 2 Select the object to break. By default, the point at which you select the object is the first break point. To select a different pair of break points, enter f (First) and specify the first break point. 3 Specify the second break point. To break an object without creating a gap, enter @0,0 to specify the previous point. To join objects 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Join. 2 Select a source object or select multiple objects to join together.
exploding a polyline breaks it down to simple lines and arcs. Exploding a block reference or an associative dimension replaces it with copies of the objects that compose the block or dimension. Explode Dimensions and Hatches When you explode a dimension or a hatch, all associativity is lost and the dimension or hatch object is replaced by individual objects such as lines, text, points, and 2D solids. To explode dimensions automatically when you create them, set the DIMASSOC system variable to 0.
Quick Reference Commands EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. XPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. EXPLMODE Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports nonuniformly scaled (NUS) blocks. Modify Polylines Change the shape and display of polyline objects with polyline editing options. You can also join separate polylines.
Polyline grips offer some grip-specific options, depending on ■ The grip’s location (vertex or midpoint) ■ The segment type (line or arc) ■ The type of Polyline (standard, curve-fit, or spline-fit) Polyline grip menu options Option Animation Stretch or Stretch Vertex. Specify a stretch point. Add Vertex. Specify a point for the new vertex. Remove Vertex. Delete the selected vertex. Convert to Arc. Specify the midpoint of a straight segment to convert it to an arc segment. Convert to Line.
See also: ■ Choose a Method to Modify Objects on page 635 ■ Modify Objects Using Grips on page 637 ■ Overview of Constraints on page 713 ■ Trim or Extend Objects on page 678 ■ Break and Join Objects on page 699 To modify a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline. 2 Select the polyline to modify. 3 If the selected object is a spline, line, or an arc, the following prompt is displayed: Object selected is not a polyline.
■ Enter d (Decurve) to remove extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and to straighten all segments of the polyline. ■ Enter L (Ltype Gen) to generate the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline. ■ Enter r (Reverse) to reverse the order of vertices of the polyline. ■ Enter u (Undo) to reverse actions back to the start of PEDIT. 5 Enter x (Exit) to end a command option. Press Enter to exit the PEDIT command.
The first vertex is marked with an X. Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex preceding the one that you want to delete. 4 Enter s (Straighten). 5 Use the Next option to move the X to the vertex immediately following the one that you want to delete. 6 Enter g (Go). The vertex on the polyline is deleted. The vertices on either side of the deleted vertex are joined by a straight polyline segment. 7 Enter x (Exit) to end editing vertices. 8 Press Enter to end the command.
JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. System Variables GRIPS Controls the color of selected grips. GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
Several methods are available for editing splines and changing their underlying mathematical parameters. You can edit splines using multi-functional grips, SPLINEDIT, 3DEDITBAR, and the Properties palette. In addition to these operations, splines can be trimmed, extended, and filleted. Edit Splines with Multi-Functional Grips Multi-functional grips provide options that include adding control vertices and changing the tangent direction of the spline at its endpoints.
IMPORTANT Switching from displaying control vertices to fit points automatically changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result. In general, editing a spline with control vertices provides finer control over reshaping a small section of the curve than editing a spline with fit points.
Edit Splines with a Palette The Properties palette provides access to several spline parameters and options, including the degree of the spline, the weight for each control point, the knot parameterization method used in conjunction with fit points, and whether the spline is closed. For more information, see Draw Splines on page 582. Trim, Extend, and Fillet Splines Trimming a spline shortens it without changing the shape of the portion that remains.
To convert a spline to a polyline 1 Click Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Spline. 2 Select the spline to convert. 3 Enter p to convert to Polyline. 4 Specify a precision value or press Enter to end the command. Quick Reference Commands JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
Add Constraints to Geometry 19 With parametric drawing, you can add constraints to geometry to ensure that the design conforms to specified requirements. Overview of Constraints NOTE This topic has been included for AutoCAD-compatibility purposes only. In AutoCAD LT, parametric drawing technology is limited to displaying and hiding constraints, editing constrained geometry, and changing values in the Parameters Manager. Parametric drawing is a technology that is used for designing with constraints.
A blue cursor icon always displays when you move the cursor over an object that has constraints applied to it. In the design phase of a project, constraints provide a way to enforce requirements when experimenting with different designs or when making changes. Changes made to objects can adjust other objects automatically, and restrict changes to distance and angle values.
■ Underconstrained. Some constraints are applied to the geometry. ■ Fully constrained. All relevant geometric and dimensional constraints are applied to the geometry. A fully constrained set of objects also needs to include at least one Fix constraint to lock the location of the geometry.
Constraints can be used in block definitions, resulting in dynamic blocks. You can control the size and shape of dynamic blocks directly from within the drawing. For more information, see Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks. Remove or Relax Constraints There are two ways to cancel the effects of constraints when you need to make design changes: ■ Delete the constraints individually and later apply new constraints.
PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette. TEXTEDIT Edits a selected multiline or single-line text object, or the text in a dimension object. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
Thus, using geometric constraints, you have a method of including design requirements in your drawing. For example, in the illustration below, the following constraints are applied to the geometry.
Quick Reference Commands CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. System Variables CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
For example, you can specify that a line should always be perpendicular to another one, that an arc and a circle should always remain concentric, or that a line should always be tangent to an arc.
You can apply geometric constraints to 2D geometric objects only. Objects cannot be constrained between model space and paper space. Specify Constraint Points With some constraints, you specify constraint points on objects instead of selecting the objects. This behavior is similar to that of object snaps, but the locations are limited to endpoints, midpoints, center points, and insertion points.
When rolling over any icon, the constraint point markers are displayed indicating the constrained points. You do not need to roll over the icon to identify the constraints that are applied to the points of the selected object. A different set of constraint bar icons are displayed when a horizontal or vertical constraint is not parallel or perpendicular with the current UCS.
NOTE Fix constraint is not applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN. You must apply the constraint individually. Equal constraint applied with AUTOCONSTRAIN resizes the selected arcs to the same radius only. It is not applied to the arc length. To fully constrain the size and proportions of a design, you will later need to apply dimensional constraints. Remove Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint cannot be modified, but you can delete it and apply a different one.
Display and Verify Geometric Constraints You can determine visually what objects are associated with any geometric constraint, or what constraints are associated with any object. Constraint icons provide information about how objects are constrained. A constraint bar displays one or more icons that represent the geometric constraints applied to an object. You can drag constraint bars when you need to move them out of the way, and you can also control whether they are displayed or hidden.
These highlighting features simplify working with constraints especially when you have many constraints applied throughout a drawing. Control the Display of Constraint Bars Geometric constraints and constraint bars can be displayed or hidden, either individually or globally.
NOTE To reduce clutter, Coincident constraints display by default as small, light-blue squares. You can use an option in the Constraint Settings dialog box to turn them off if necessary. To display or hide a geometric constraint 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show/Hide. 2 Select the constrained objects. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select one of following: ■ Show. Displays the geometric constraints. ■ Hide. Hides the geometric constraints. ■ Reset.
5 Use the slider, or enter a value, to set the transparency level of constraint bars in the drawing. The default value is 50. 6 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. System Variables CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
For example, if a line object is constrained to remain tangent to a circle, you can rotate the line and change its length and endpoints, but the line or its extension will remain tangent to the circle. If the circle was an arc instead, the line or its extension would remain tangent to the arc or its extension. The results of modifying underconstrained objects are based on what constraints have already been applied and the object types involved.
For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of Constraints on page 713. To grip-edit constrained geometry 1 Select the constrained object. 2 Click the grips and drag it to edit the geometry. To turn a constraint off 1 Click the constrained object to select it. 2 Move your mouse over a grip. The grips are displayed in red to show that the object is selected. 3 Click the grip. 4 Press and release the Shift key. 5 Move the object.
Quick Reference Commands CONSTRAINTBAR Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. System Varaibles CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
■ Angles between objects, or between points on objects ■ Sizes of arcs and circles For example, the following illustration includes linear, aligned, angular, and diameter constraints. If you change the value of a dimensional constraint, all the constraints on the object are evaluated, and the objects that are affected are updated automatically. Also, constraints can be added directly to segments within a polyline as if they were separate objects.
If you need to output a drawing with dimensional constraints or use dimension styles, you can change the form of a dimensional constraint from dynamic to annotational. See Apply Dimensional Constraints for more detail. Define Variables and Equations With the Parameters Manager, you can define custom user variables that you can reference from within dimensional constraints and other user variables. The expressions that you define can include a variety of predefined functions and constants.
DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. -PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
Display or Hide Dynamic Constraints You can hide all dynamic constraints to reduce clutter when you want to work with geometric constraints only, or when you need to continue other work in the drawing. You can turn on their display when needed from the ribbon or with the DCDISPLAY command. By default, if you select an object associated with a hidden dynamic constraint, all dynamic constraints associated with that object are temporarily displayed.
DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. -PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied You can control lengths, distances, and angles of objects by changing constraint values, by manipulating dimensional constraints using grips, or by changing user variables or expressions associated with dimensional constraints.
The square grip on dimensional constraints provides a way of changing the location of the text and other elements. Dynamic dimensional constraints are more limited than annotational dimensional constraints in where the text can be located. NOTE Triangular grips are not available for dimensional constraints that reference other constraint variables in expressions. For information about temporarily relaxing constraints, see Overview of Constraints on page 713.
To edit a dimensional constraint in-place 1 Double-click a dimensional constraint to display the in-place text editor. 2 Enter the new name, value, or expression (name=value). 3 Press Enter to confirm the change. To edit a dimensional constraint using the Properties palette 1 Select a dimensional constraint, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. 2 Enter the new values for Name, Expression, and Description text boxes.
Quick Reference Commands DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints. Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations You can control geometry using mathematical expressions that include the names of dimensional constraints, user variables, and functions. Overview of Formulas and Equations NOTE This topic has been included for AutoCAD-compatibility purposes only.
As you can see, part of the equation for determining the area of the circle is included in the Radius dimensional constraint parameter and part was defined as a user variable. Alternatively, the entire expression, sqrt (Length * Width / PI), could have been assigned to the Radius dimensional constraint parameter, defined in a user variable, or some other combination.
Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager The Parameters Manager lists dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables, which you can also create, edit, and organize. NOTE This topic has been included for AutoCAD-compatibility purposes only. In AutoCAD LT, parametric drawing technology is limited to displaying and hiding constraints, editing constrained geometry, and changing values in the Parameters Manager.
Operator Description . Decimal separator NOTE With imperial units, the Parameters Manager interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9" from 5', enter 5' -9" rather than 5'-9".
Function Syntax Arc hyperbolic cosine acosh(expression) Arc hyperbolic sine asinh(expression) Arc hyperbolic tangent atanh(expression) Square root sqrt(expression) Signum function (1,0,1) sign(expression) Round to nearest integer round(expression) Truncate decimal trunc(expression) Round down floor(expression) Round up ceil(expression) Absolute value abs(expression) Largest element in array max(expression1;expression2) Smallest element in array min(expression1;expression2) Degrees
Function Syntax Random decimal, 0-1 Random In addition to these functions, the constants Pi and e are also available for use in expressions. To reference a variable within an expression 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Double-click the variable you want to reference. 3 Right-click the cell in the Name column, and click Copy. 4 Double-click the Expression column where you want to include the referenced variable. 5 Right-click the Expression column, and click Paste.
To select a constrained object associated with a user parameter 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager. 2 Click the dimensional variable to view the associated object in the drawing. Quick Reference Commands PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing.
When you use the Invert Filter option, it will display all the parameters not in the group instead of displaying only the parameters belonging to the group. Search For Parameters You can enter characters and wildcards such as * in the edit box of the Parameters Manager to search for parameters by name. This immediately filters the parameter list as you enter the characters. To create, modify, or delete a parameter group 1 Click Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager.
Quick Reference Commands PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. -PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. PARAMETERSCLOSE Closes the Parameters Manager palette.
Define and Reference Blocks 749
750
Work with Blocks 20 A block is one or more objects combined to create a single object. Blocks help you reuse objects in the same drawing or in other drawings. Overview of Blocks How Blocks Are Stored and Referenced Every drawing file has a block definition table that stores all block definitions, which consist of all information associated with the block. It is these block definitions that are referenced when you insert blocks in your drawing.
When you insert a block you are inserting a block reference. The information is not copied from the block definition to the drawing area. Instead, a link is established between the block reference and the block definition. Therefore, if the block definition is changed, all references are updated automatically. Use PURGE to remove unused block definitions from a drawing. Blocks and Layers A block can be composed of objects drawn on several layers with various colors, linetypes, and lineweight properties.
Insert Blocks When you insert a block, you create a block reference and specify its location, scale, and rotation. Scale Block References You can specify the scale of a block reference using different X, Y, and Z values. A block that uses different drawing units than the units specified for the drawing is automatically scaled by a factor equivalent to the ratio between the two units.
Xrefs contained in a drawing you insert may not be displayed properly unless the xref was previously inserted or attached to the destination drawing. Insert Blocks from Tool Palettes You can insert blocks from tool palettes by dragging the block tool into the drawing or by clicking the block tool and then specifying an insertion point. You can choose to be prompted for a rotation angle (starting from 0) when you click and place the block.
from block library drawings. A block library drawing contains block definitions of symbols with similar functions. These block definitions are stored together in a single drawing file for easy accessibility and management. Insert Blocks with DesignCenter Use DesignCenter to insert blocks from the current drawing or from another drawing. Drag and drop the block names for quick placement. Double-click the block names to specify the precise location, rotation, and scale of the blocks.
4 If you want the objects in the block to be inserted as individual objects instead of as a single block, select Explode. 5 Click OK. To insert a drawing file as a block by dragging 1 From Windows Explorer or any folder, drag the drawing file icon into the drawing area. When you release the button, you are prompted for an insertion point. 2 Specify the insertion point and scale and rotation values.
4 Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to specify one or more of the following: ■ Insertion Point ■ Scale ■ Rotation 5 Click OK. 6 In the Properties palette, change the properties of the block (or dynamic block). Quick Reference ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. DIVIDE Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings A dynamic block reference can be changed in a drawing while you work. Overview of Dynamic Blocks Dynamic block references contain grips or custom properties that change the way the reference is displayed in the drawing after it is inserted. For example, a dynamic block reference of a door can change size after you insert the block reference into your drawing.
Some dynamic blocks are defined so that geometry within the block can only be edited to certain sizes specified in the block definition. When you use a grip to edit the block reference, tick marks are displayed at the locations of valid values for the block reference. If you change a block property value to a value other than one specified in the definition, the parameter will adjust to the closest valid value. Quick Reference INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
The following table shows the different types of custom grips that can be included in a dynamic block.
Work With Lookup Grips A block reference that contains a lookup grip allows you to specify a preset value that changes the way the block reference is displayed. The new size is displayed in the Properties palette under Custom. Control Visibility of Block References A block definition can contain a visibility state grip, which determines several graphical representations of the same block reference.
Reset a Block to Display Default Geometry When you reset a block reference, the block changes back to the default specified in the block definition. For example, you can make a block dynamic again if you non-uniformly scale or explode a dynamic block reference. Quick Reference RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. GRIPDYNCOLOR Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks.
Quick Reference PARAMETERS Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. Remove Block Definitions To reduce the size of a drawing, you can remove unused block definitions. You can remove a block reference from your drawing by erasing it; however, the block definition remains in the drawing's block definition table.
To confirm the purging of each item, respond to the prompt by choosing Yes or No, or Yes to All if more than one item is selected. 5 Select more items to purge, or click Close. Quick Reference PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
Create and Modify Blocks 21 A block definition is a set of objects that are grouped together as one named object with a base point and unique properties. Define Blocks You create blocks by associating objects and giving them a name. Create Blocks Within a Drawing After you define a block in a drawing, you can insert a block reference in the drawing as many times as necessary. Use this method to create blocks quickly.
The illustration shows a typical sequence for creating a block definition within a drawing. You can also use the Block Editor to create blocks that are saved within a drawing. See also: ■ Overview of Blocks on page 751 ■ Overview of the Block Editor on page 802 To define a block for the current drawing 1 Create the objects you want to use in the block definition. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 3 In the Block Definition dialog box, enter a block name in the Name box.
this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them. 5 Click Select Objects. 6 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the block definition. Press Enter to complete object selection. 7 In the Block Definition dialog box under Base Point, specify the block insertion point using one of these methods. ■ Click Pick Point to specify a point using the pointing device. ■ Enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.
Create a New Drawing File You have two methods for creating drawing files: ■ Create and save a complete drawing file using SAVE or SAVEAS. ■ Create and save only selected objects from your current drawing to a new drawing using EXPORT or WBLOCK. With either method, you create an ordinary drawing file that can be inserted as a block into any other drawing file.
If you want the original objects used to create the new drawing to remain in your drawing, make sure the Delete From Drawing option is not selected. If this option is selected, the original objects are erased from the drawing. If necessary, you can use OOPS to restore them. 4 Click Select Objects. 5 Use your pointing device to select the objects to be included in the new drawing. Press Enter to complete object selection.
BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. OOPS Restores erased objects. WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file.
■ Objects inherit color, linetype, and lineweight properties from the current color, linetype, and lineweight that you have set explicitly, that is, that you have set to override the color, linetype, or lineweight assigned to the current layer. If you have not explicitly set them, then these properties are inherited from the color, linetype, and lineweight assigned to the current layer.
LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Nest Blocks The only restriction on nested blocks is that you cannot insert blocks that reference themselves. See also: ■ Overview of Blocks on page 751 ■ Add Constraints to Dynamic Blocks Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects.
Create Block Libraries A block library is a collection of block definitions stored in a single drawing file. You can use block libraries supplied by Autodesk or other vendors or create your own. You can organize a set of related block definitions by creating the blocks in the same drawing file. Drawing files used this way are called block, or symbol, libraries. These block definitions can be inserted individually into any drawing that you are working on.
Quick Reference BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Use Tool Palettes to Organize Blocks You can use tool palettes to organize blocks that are stored in one drawing file or separate drawing files. Once you've added a block tool to a tool palette, you can insert the block reference by dragging it from the tool palette to the drawing or by clicking and placing it in the drawing.
You can add construction geometry (BCONSTRUCTION command) to the selection sets of legacy actions. The construction geometry is not affected by the visibility states. It is filtered from the selection set in the BVSTATE command when you add or remove geometry from a visibility state. NOTE When you explode a block containing construction geometry in previous versions of AutoCAD, the geometry is hidden in the drawing.
The attributes in the illustration are single-line attributes. You can also create multiple-line attributes to store data such as addresses and descriptions. Attribute information extracted from a drawing can be used in a spreadsheet or database to produce a parts list or a bill of materials. You can associate more than one attribute with a block, provided that each attribute has a different tag. Attributes also can be "invisible.
Quick Reference ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. ATTDISP Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing. ATTEDIT Changes attribute information in a block. ATTIPEDIT Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. AFLAGS Sets options for attributes.
Define Block Attributes The characteristics include the tag, which is a name that identifies the attribute, the prompt displayed when you insert the block, value information, text formatting, location within the block, and any optional modes (Invisible, Constant, Verify, Preset, Lock Position, and Multiple Lines). If you plan to extract the attribute information for use in a parts list, you may want to keep a list of the attribute tags you have created.
the current release, these single line attributes are automatically merged back into a multiple-line attribute. NOTE If a multiple-line attribute makes a round trip to an earlier release, the differences between these two types of attributes might result in truncating very long lines of text and loss of formatting. However, before any characters are truncated, AutoCAD LT displays a message box that lets you cancel the operation.
Use Attributes Without Attaching Them to Blocks Stand-alone attributes can also be created. Once attributes have been defined, and the drawing is saved, this drawing file can be inserted into another drawing. When the drawing is inserted, you are prompted for the attribute values. To create an attribute definition 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes. 2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the attribute modes and enter tag information, location, and text options.
4 Click Attribute Order. 5 In the Attribute Order dialog box, select an attribute definition. 6 Click Move Up or Move Down to change the prompt order of the attribute definitions. 7 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the attribute definition list is in the desired order. 8 Click OK. Quick Reference ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. ATTDISP Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing. BATTORDER Specifies the order of attributes for a block.
Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) You can extract attribute information from a drawing and create a separate text file for use with database software. This feature is useful for creating parts lists with information already entered in the drawing database. Extracting attribute information does not affect the drawing.
BL:X Nwwwddd(X coordinate of block insertion point) BL:Y Nwwwddd(Y coordinate of block insertion point) BL:Z Nwwwddd(Z coordinate of block insertion point) BL:NUMBER Nwww000 (Block counter; the same for MINSERT) BL:HANDLE Cwww000 (Block handle; the same for MINSERT) BL:LAYER Cwww000 (Block insertion layer name) BL:ORIENT Nwwwddd(Block rotation angle) BL:XSCALE Nwwwddd(X scale factor) BL:YSCALE Nwwwddd(Y scale factor) BL:ZSCALE Nwwwddd(Z scale factor) BL:XEXTRUDE Nwwwddd(X component of block extrusion direct
You can create any number of template files, depending on how you'll use the data. Each line of a template file specifies one field to be written in the attribute extraction file. Follow these additional guidelines: ■ Be sure to place a space between the attribute tag and the character or numeric data. Use Spacebar, not Tab, to enter the space. ■ Press Enter at the end of each line, including the last line.
The SDF format also produces a file containing one record for each block reference in a drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width and employ neither field separators nor character-string delimiters. The dBASE III Copy . . . SDF operation also produces SDI-format files. The Append From... SDF operation can read a file in dBASE IV format, which user programs written in FORTRAN can easily process.
If you specified an SDF format using the sample template, the file might be similar to the following example. (NAME) (X) (Y) (SUPPLIER) (MODEL) (PRICE) DESK 120.0 49.5 ACME INDUST. 51-793W 379.95 CHAIR 122.0 47.0 ACME INDUST. 34-902A 199.95 DESK -77.2 40.0 TOP DRAWER INC. X-52-44 249.95 The order of the fields corresponds to the order of the fields in the template files.
To create an attribute extraction template file 1 Start Notepad. You can use any text editor or word processor that can save a text file in ASCII format. 2 Enter template information in Notepad. See Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 782 for format information. 3 Save the file with a .txt file extension. To extract data about a specific tag, insert the tag name in place of the "numeric" or "character" fields.
Modify Blocks You can modify a block definition or a block reference already inserted in the drawing. Modify a Block Definition You can redefine block definitions in your current drawing. Redefining a block definition affects both previous and future insertions of the block in the current drawing and any associated attributes. There are two methods for redefining a block definition: ■ Modify the block definition in the current drawing.
NOTE Block descriptions are stripped off when using INSERT. Use the Clipboard to copy and paste a block description displayed in the Block Definition dialog box from one block definition to another. Modify the Description of a Block To modify the DesignCenter description of a block definition, use BLOCK. You can also add descriptions to any number of existing blocks in the Block Definition dialog box. Redefine Block Attributes You can attach attributes to a block when you define or redefine that block.
2 In the tree view, click the folder that contains the drawing file from which the block originated. 3 In the content area (on the right side), right-click the drawing file. 4 On the shortcut menu, click Insert as Block. 5 In the Insert dialog box, click OK. 6 In the Block - Redefine Block dialog box, click Redefine Block. 7 Press ESC to exit the command. To modify a block description 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Block Description.
You can also change the location of attributes in a block using grips. With multiple-line attributes, you can also move grips to resize the width of the text. See also: ■ Modify a Block Definition on page 788 To edit attribute data 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Objects ➤ Attribute ➤ Single. 2 Select the block to edit. 3 In the Edit Attributes dialog box, retype the attribute information as necessary and click OK. Quick Reference ATTEDIT Changes attribute information in a block.
Modify a Block Attribute Definition You can modify attributes in block definitions with the Block Attribute Manager.
Update Block References You can update attributes in all block references in the current drawing with changes you made to the block definition. For example, you may have used the Block Attribute Manager to modify attribute properties in several block definitions in your drawing but elected not to automatically update existing block references when you made the changes. Now that you are satisfied with the attribute changes you made, you can apply those changes to all blocks in the current drawing.
To specify whether changes are applied to existing block references 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, click Settings. 3 In the Settings dialog box, do one of the following: ■ To apply changes to existing block references, select the Apply Changes to Existing References option. ■ To apply changes only to new block insertions, clear the Apply Changes to Existing References option. 4 Click OK.
To remove an attribute from a block definition and all block references 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. 2 In the Block Attribute Manager, select a block from the Block list, or click Select Block and select a block in the drawing area. 3 (Optional) If you do not want attributes removed from existing instances of the block, click Settings, and, in the Settings dialog box, clear Apply Changes to Existing References.
Alternate 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Single Attribute. 2 In the drawing area, select the block you want to edit. 3 In the Enhanced Attribute Editor, select the attribute you want to edit. You can change the attribute value or choose another tab and edit other attribute properties. 4 Make the attribute changes you want, and then do one of the following: ■ Click Apply to save your changes. The Enhanced Attribute Editor remains open.
ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) If you need to modify one or more objects within a block separately, you can disassemble, or explode, the block reference into its component objects.
Quick Reference EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. XPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
Add Behaviors to Blocks (Dynamic Blocks) 22 Instead of being a fixed part of a drawing, a dynamic block reference can be changed or manipulated as you work in a drawing. Overview of Dynamic Blocks Dynamic block definitions allow you to edit a block reference outside of the Block Editor. They contain rules, or parameters, for how to change the appearance of the block reference when it is inserted in the drawing. A dynamic block reference inserts one block that can be edited in several different ways.
Add Actions and Parameters to Block Definitions In a block definition, actions and parameters provide rules for the behavior or a block once it is inserted into the drawing. Depending on the specified block geometry, or parameter, you can associate an action to that parameter. The parameter is represented as a grip in the drawing. When you edit the grip, the associated action determines what will change in the block reference.
Add actions. If you are working with action parameters on page 815, if necessary, add actions to define what ----will happen to the geometry when it is manipulated. Define custom properties. Add properties that determine how the block is ----- displayed in the drawing area. Custom properties affect grips, labels, and preset values for block geometry. Test the block. On the ribbon, in the Block Editor contextual tab, ----- Open/Save panel, click Test Block to test the block before you save it.
Overview of the Block Editor In the Block Editor, you can ■ Define a block ■ Add an action parameter ■ Define attributes ■ Manage visibility states ■ Test and save the block definition UCS in the Block Editor Within the Block Editor, the origin of the UCS icon defines the base point for the block. You can change the base point for the block by moving the geometry relative to the origin of the UCS icon, or by adding a base point parameter. The UCS command is disabled in the Block Editor.
■ Select if the drawing is the block definition you want to open. 3 Click OK. To create a new block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. Click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. NOTE This saves the block definition even if you have not added any objects in the Block Editor drawing area. 4 Click Close Block Editor.
To view properties of a block definition in the Block Editor 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Select a block definition from the list. ■ Select if the drawing is the block definition you want to open. 3 Click OK. 4 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 5 In the Properties Palette window, under Block, view the properties of the block definition. Quick Reference BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor.
Similar to tool palettes, you can also use these palettes to add parameters and actions to your dynamic block definition. Change Properties of Tools In the Tool Properties dialog box, you can change the following properties of custom tools: ■ Tool description ■ Parameter type ■ Associated action(s) ■ Key point on the parameter to which the action is tied (if applicable) ■ Tool palette image NOTE You cannot drag parameters and actions from the Block Editor onto a regular tool palette.
To make a copy of a parameter set 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, Under Block To Create or Edit, select a name from the list and then, click OK. 3 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes. 4 In the Block Authoring Palettes window, Parameters Sets tab, right-click a parameter set. Click Copy. 5 Right-click anywhere on the palette to which you want to add the parameter set (except on a parameter set). Click Paste.
Quick Reference BAUTHORPALETTE Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window. BLOCKEDITOR Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open. Test Blocks Within the Block Editor Test your block definition before you save or exit the Block Editor.
Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Correct Errors in Action Parameters A yellow alert icon is displayed when ■ A parameter is not associated with an action ■ An action is not associated with a parameter or selection set To correct these errors, hover over the yellow alert icon until the tooltip displays a description of the problem. Then double-click the constraint and follow the prompts.
To save the current block definition as a new drawing file 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As. 3 In the Save Block As dialog box, enter a name for the new block definition. 4 Select the Save Block Definition to Drawing File check box. Click OK. 5 In the Browse For Drawing File dialog box, click Save. Quick Reference BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONTOOL Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. BSAVE Saves the current block definition. BSAVEAS Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. BVSTATE Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. Add Action Parameters to Dynamic Blocks You can add actions and parameters to dynamic blocks to determine how a block should behave when it is inserted into a drawing.
Hover the cursor over an action icon to display ■ The associated parameter ■ The associated selection set ■ Additional objects that belong to the action NOTE In order to use the BASSOCIATE command, you must first set BACTIONBARMODE to 0. Custom Tools You can create custom block authoring tools, which you access from the block authoring palettes. In order to preserve the default tools on the block authoring palettes, you should create a new palette for custom block authoring tools.
Dependencies When you select a parameter, grip, or action in the Block Editor, its associated objects are highlighted. This is called dependency highlighting. You can turn dependency highlighting on or off. The following example shows how dependency highlighting creates a halo effect for the associated parameter (labeled Distance) and action (labeled Stretch) when you select the custom grip in the Block Editor.
3 At the Command prompt, enter bactioncolor. 4 Enter one of the following values: ■ BYLAYER ■ BYBLOCK ■ An integer from 1 to 255. 5 Press Enter. 6 At the Command prompt, enter regen to regenerate the drawing. Quick Reference BACTIONBAR Displays or hides action bars for a selection set of parameter objects. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BESETTINGS Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects.
BGRIPOBJCOLOR Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor. BGRIPOBJSIZE Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. BPARAMETERCOLOR Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor. BPARAMETERFONT Sets the font used for parameters and actions in the Block Editor. BPARAMETERSIZE Sets the size of parameter text and features in the Block Editor relative to the screen display.
See also: ■ Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 834 ■ Specify Properties for Dynamic Blocks on page 829 ■ Extract Block Attribute Data (Advanced) on page 782 Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. BSAVE Saves the current block definition.
When you move the grip in the example above, only the geometry in the selection set is stretched. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition.
Apply a Move Action to a Linear Parameter A move action associated with a linear parameter moves all objects in a selection set only in the direction of the linear parameter. The parameter key point is the location of the grip in the block reference. Apply a Move Action to a Polar Parameter A move action associated with a polar parameter moves all objects in a selection set in any direction.
Apply a Scale Action to a Linear Parameter A scale action applied to a linear parameter scales the selected objects in the direction of the parameter. Apply a Scale Action to a Polar Parameter A scale action applied to a polar parameter scales the selected objects by the specified distance and angle. While the resulting geometry behaves in the same way as a scale action applied to a linear parameter, the way the grips are manipulated is different in the Properties palette.
Stretch Actions Move and stretch objects a specified distance in a specified direction relative to the base point specified by the action. Apply a Stretch Action to a Point Parameter A stretch action applied to a point parameter moves and stretches selected objects a specified distance in any direction. Apply a Stretch Action to a Linear or Polar Parameter A stretch action applied to a linear parameter moves and stretches selected objects a specified distance in the direction of the parameter.
Polar Stretch Actions Rotate, move, and stretch objects a specified angle and distance. Apply a Polar Stretch Action to a Polar Parameter A polar stretch action can only be applied to a polar parameter. Like the stretch action, selected objects stretch when this action is applied. However, a polar stretch action also allows you to stretch the objects at any angle. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition.
Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BACTIONSET Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition. BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects.
BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Array Actions Copy and array objects in a rectangular pattern. Apply an Array Action to a Linear Parameter An array action applied to a linear parameter copies and arrays selected objects in a rectangular pattern along the parameter only.
BASSOCIATE Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Lookup Actions Lookup tables associate parameter values for the dynamic block reference with other specified data (for example, a model or part number). You can extract data from block references just as you would extract block attribute data.
To add values to the cells in each column, click a cell and enter a value. If you defined a value set for an input property (parameter) in the table, a drop-down list of available values will display. Make sure to follow the guidelines in Specify Values for Lookup Tables on page 824. Custom Values In a lookup table that does not use value sets, parameter values that do not match a row of input property values from the lookup table are assigned the lookup property value that corresponds to .
■ To specify a range, use brackets [ ] to specify that the range includes the values separated by a comma, or use parentheses ( ) to specify that the range does not include the values separated by a comma. ■ For a continuous range, use a pair of values separated by a comma, enclosed in brackets or parentheses. For example: [3,10] specifies any value between 3 and 10, including 3 and 10 (3,10) specifies any value between 3 and 10, not including 3 and 10.
8 If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To edit a lookup table while the action bars are displayed in the Block Editor 1 Hover the cursor over the lookup action icon. 2 Right-click and select Display Lookup Table. To display and add properties to a lookup table 1 In the Block Editor, double-click a lookup action in a dynamic block definition. 2 In the Property Lookup Table dialog box, click Add Properties.
NOTE You can only select Allow Reverse Lookup if you have entered data in the column. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference BACTION Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BLOOKUPTABLE Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. Use Chained Actions Point, linear, polar, XY, and rotation parameters have a property called Chain Actions.
If the Chain Actions property for the point parameter is set to Yes, a change in the linear parameter will trigger the move action associated with the point parameter, just as if you edited the point parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the point parameter's associated move action is not triggered by the changes to the linear parameter. Thus, the circle doesn't move.
2 In the Block Editor, click Tools menu ➤ Properties. The Properties palette is displayed. 3 In the Block Editor, select a point, linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter. 4 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Chain Actions. 5 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. 6 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 7 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
Assign Labels to Parameters When you select the dynamic block reference in a drawing, parameter labels are assigned to custom properties in the Properties palette. You can specify whether or not these custom properties are displayed for the block reference when it is selected in a drawing. These properties can also be extracted using the Attribute Extraction wizard. It is good practice to specify unique parameter labels within the block.
Property name ■ Angle Description ■ Distance Description ■ Flip Description ■ Description Associated parameter Defines a description that will further explain the purpose of the parameter. The text string will display in the tooltip when the mouse pointer hovers over the position name.
Property name Description Associated parameter ■ XY ■ Rotate ■ Flip ■ Visibility ■ Lookup See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks ■ Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks on page 834 ■ Use Chained Actions on page 827 ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks on page 837 To specify the display of custom properties in a dynamic block reference 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed. If not, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Properties.
To specify that dynamic block reference can be exploded 1 Open a block definition in the Block Editor 2 In the Block Editor, make sure nothing is selected. 3 In the Properties palette, under Block, click Allow Exploding. 4 On the drop-down list, select Yes or No. 5 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor.
Specify Value Sets for Dynamic Blocks A value set is a range or list of values specified for a parameter. These values can be displayed for the block reference as a drop-down list next to the parameter label under Custom in the Properties palette. When you define a value set for a parameter, the parameter is limited to these values when the block reference is manipulated in a drawing.
5 On the drop-down list, select List. 6 In the Properties palette, under Value Set, click one of the following: ■ Ang Value List ■ Dist Value List ■ Hor Value List ■ Ver Value List 7 Click the [...] button. 8 In the Add Distance Value/Angle dialog box, enter one value or two or more values separated by commas, or to delete a value, select it from the list. 9 Click Add or Delete. 10 Click OK. 11 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block.
7 Click Dist Minimum, Ang Minimum, Hor Minimum, or Ver Minimum, and then enter a minimum value for the parameter. 8 Click Dist Maximum, Ang Maximum, Hor Maximum, or Ver Maximum, and then enter a maximum value for the parameter. 9 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 10 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To specify minimum and maximum values for a linear, polar, XY, or rotation parameter 1 Ensure that the Properties palette is displayed.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Specify Distance and Angle Values Action overrides are properties of actions that have no effect on the block reference until it is manipulated in a drawing. Use distance multiplier overrides with the following actions: ■ Move on page 816 ■ Stretch on page 819 ■ Polar Stretch on page 820 You can specify these action override properties by following the Command prompts when you add an action to a dynamic block definition.
Parameter Type Grip Type Actions You Can Associate with a Parameter XY Standard Move, Scale, Stretch, Array Rotation Rotation Rotate Flip Flip Flip Alignment Alignment None (The action is implied and contained within the parameter.) Visibility Lookup None (The action is implied and controlled by visibility states.
displayed is a lookup grip. When you click this grip on the block reference, a drop-down list is displayed. When you select an item from the list, the display of the block reference may change. Grips are automatically added at key points on the parameter. You can reposition a grip anywhere in the block space relative to its associated key point on the parameter. When you reposition a grip, it is still tied to the key point with which it is associated.
Specify Tooltips on Grips Each of the dynamic block parameters has one or more description fields with the exception of the basepoint and alignment parameters.
3 On the Properties palette, under Misc, click Number of Grips, and then select the number of grips you want to display for the parameter. 4 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block. 5 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To reposition a grip in a dynamic block definition 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, select a custom grip (not the standard grip associated with the key point of the parameter).
6 (Optional) If you are finished using the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. To turn insertion cycling on or off for a custom grip in a dynamic block reference 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor, at the Command prompt, enter bcycleorder. 3 In the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box, select a grip from the list, and click Cycling to turn cycling on or off for the grip. (A check mark in the Cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for the grip.) 4 Click OK.
Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BCYCLEORDER Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynamic block reference. BGRIPSET Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers over grips on dynamic blocks and custom objects that support grip tips.
After you combine the geometry in the Block Editor, you add a visibility parameter. You can then create and name a different visibility state for each weld symbol (for example, WLD1, WLD2, WLD3, and WLD4). In the following example, the WLD1 visibility state is displayed in the Block Editor. The geometry that displays in a dimmed state is invisible for the WLD1 visibility state. The Block Editor contextual tab displays the name of the current visibility state.
To make a visibility state current 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 Select the visibility state that you want to set as the current state. To rename or delete a visibility state 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state from the list.
To make objects visible or invisible in all visibility states 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 2 In the Block Editor drawing area, select the objects that you want to make visible in all visibility states. 3 Right-click in the drawing area and click one of the following: ■ Object Visibility ➤ Show For All States ■ Object Visibility ➤ Hide For All States To show or hide invisible geometry for visibility states 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
2 Click Block Editor tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States. 3 In the Visibility States dialog box, select a visibility state in the list. 4 Click Move Up until the selected visibility state is at the top of the list. 5 Click OK. Quick Reference BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. BPARAMETER Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition. BVHIDE Makes objects invisible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition.
848
Work with 3D Models 849
850
Create 3D Models 23 You can display 3D objects from products such as AutoCAD in AutoCAD LT. Creation of 3D objects is limited to objects with 3D thickness or objects that can be displayed using the wireframe visual style. Create Wireframe Models A wireframe model is an edge or skeletal representation of a real-world 3D object using lines and curves. Wireframe models consist only of points, lines, and curves that describe the edges of the object.
Methods for Creating Wireframe Models You can create wireframe models by positioning any 2D planar object anywhere in 3D space, using the following methods: ■ Enter 3D coordinates that define the X, Y, and Z location of the object. ■ Set the default work plane (the XY plane of the UCS) on which to draw the object. ■ Move or copy the object to its proper 3D location after you create it. Wireframe modeling is a skill that requires practice and experience.
2 Use an object snap to specify a point on an object that is not on the XY plane of the UCS. This location defines the first point of the line. 3 Enter .xy and then enter @ at the Of prompt. This operation extracts the X and Y coordinate values from the first point. 4 Enter 0 to specify the Z value. The X and Y values extracted from the first point are combined with a new Z value (0) to finish the definition of the second point. 5 Press Enter to end the command.
The orientation of the UCS when the object was created determines the Z direction. Objects with a non-zero thickness can be shaded and can hide other objects behind them.
2 At the Command prompt, enter the value for the thickness distance. When new objects are created, they have the specified 3D thickness. To change the 3D thickness of existing objects 1 Select the objects whose 3D thickness you want to change. 2 Right-click one of the objects. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, select Thickness and enter a new value. The selected objects change to display the specified 3D thickness.
856
Annotate Drawings 857
858
Work with Annotations 24 When you annotate your drawings, you can use certain tools and properties to make working with annotations easier. Overview of Annotations Annotations are notes or other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are commonly used to add information to your drawing.
■ Blocks ■ Attributes Quick Reference Commands ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.
Overview of Scaling Annotations Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called Annotative on page 1518. This property allows you to automate the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. Instead of creating multiple annotations at different sizes and on separate layers, you can turn on the annotative property by object or by style, and set the annotation scale for model or layout viewports.
Workflow for Annotating Drawings The following steps represent a typical workflow for annotating a drawing so that your annotations will scale automatically. 1 Create annotative styles on page 870. 2 In model space, set the annotation scale to the scale at which the annotations will be plotted or displayed on page 863. 3 Create annotative objects using annotative styles on page 870. If one or more annotative objects needs to be displayed at an additional scale, follow these steps.
System Variables ANNOAUTOSCALE Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed. CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. CANNOSCALEVALUE Returns the value of the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Set Annotation Scale Annotation scale on page 1518 is a setting that is saved with model space, layout viewports, and model views.
Use the CANNOSCALE system variable to set a default annotation scale setting. You can reset the list of annotative scales in a drawing to the default list of either metric or imperial scales defined in the registry with the Default Scale dialog box.
CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. CANNOSCALEVALUE Returns the value of the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Create Annotative Objects Objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings have a property called Annotative on page 1518.
Many of the dialog boxes used to create these objects contain an Annotative check box where you can make the object annotative. You can also change existing objects to be annotative by changing the annotative property in the Properties palette. When you hover the cursor over an annotative object that supports one annotation scale, the cursor displays a more than one annotation scale, it displays a 866 | Chapter 24 Work with Annotations icon. When the object supports icon.
Text, dimension, and multileader styles can also be annotative. Annotative styles create annotative objects. Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects When working with annotative on page 1518 objects, this option allows you to maintain visual fidelity for these objects when they are viewed in AutoCAD LT 2007 and earlier releases. Visual fidelity is controlled by the SAVEFIDELITY system variable. If you work primarily in model space, it is recommended that you turn off visual fidelity (set SAVEFIDELITY to 0).
when working with a drawing created in AutoCAD LT 2008 and later releases in AutoCAD LT 2007 and earlier releases. When this option is not selected, a single model space representation is displayed on the Model layout. More annotation objects may be displayed on the Model layout depending on the ANNOALLVISIBLE setting. Also, more objects may be displayed in paper space viewports at different sizes than in AutoCAD LT 2008 and later releases.
Work with Annotative Styles You can minimize the steps to annotate a drawing by using annotative styles. Annotative text, dimension, and multileader styles create annotative on page 1518 objects. The dialog boxes used to define these objects contain an Annotative check box where you can make the styles annotative. Annotative styles display a special palette. icon before their names in dialog boxes and the Properties You should specify the Paper Text Height value for any annotative text styles you create.
that of the new style. If the style does not have a fixed height (the Text Height value is 0), the paper height of the object is calculated based on the object’s current height and the annotation scale.
Quick Reference Commands ANNOUPDATE Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Create Annotative Text Use annotative on page 1518 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper.
■ Set Orientation for Annotations on page 892 To create a new annotative text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, click New. 3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a new style name. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Text Style dialog box, under Size, select Annotative. 6 In the Paper Text Height box, enter the height of the text as it will display on paper. 7 Click Apply. 8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 9 Click Close.
To create annotative single-line text 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style. NOTE A annotative. icon next to a text style name indicates that the style is 3 Click Set Current to set this style as the current text style. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Single Line Text. 6 Specify the insertion point for the first character. 7 Specify a text rotation angle. 8 Enter the text.
To change existing multiline text to annotative or non-annotative 1 Double-click a multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed. button on the toolbar to change existing 2 Click the Annotative multiline text to annotative or non-annotative. When the Annotative button is depressed, the text is annotative. When the button is not depressed, the text is non-annotative. 3 Click OK to save the changes.
7 Click Close. 8 In the drawing, select all the text objects (text and mtext) that you want to update. 9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate. To change the height of annotative text as it will display on the paper 1 In the drawing, select a text object. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Paper Text Height, enter a new value. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
If you associate a dimension to an annotative object, the associativity of the dimension is lost. You can also change an existing non-annotative dimension to annotative by changing the dimension’s Annotative property to Yes (On). NOTE When the current dimension style is annotative, the value of DIMSCALE is automatically set to zero, and does not affect the dimension scale. You can also create annotative tolerances.
6 In the New Dimension Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the dimension style. 7 Click OK. 8 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 9 Click Close. To change an existing dimension style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style. NOTE A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is already annotative.
one first. For information on creating an annotative dimension style see, To create a new annotative dimension style on page 876. 3 Click Set Current. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension drop-down list ➤ select a dimension type, or at the Command prompt, enter a dimension command. If the Select Annotation Scale dialog box is displayed, select the default scale you want to use for the new dimension object and click OK. 6 Place the dimension in the drawing area.
NOTE A icon next to a dimension style name indicates that the style is already annotative. 3 Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Annotative. 5 Click OK. 6 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the current dimension style. 7 Click Close. 8 In the drawing, select all the dimensions that you want to update. 9 At the command prompt, enter annoupdate.
System Variables DIMANNO Creates a single-line text object. Create Annotative Leaders and Multileaders Leaders and multileaders on page 1532 are used to add call outs to your drawings. You can create annotative on page 1518 leaders through an annotative dimension style and multileaders through an annotative multileader style. When you create a leader, you create two separate objects: the leader and the text, block, or tolerance associated with the leader.
5 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the appropriate tab and make changes to define the multileader style. 6 Click OK. 7 (Optional) Click Set Current to set this style as the multileader style. 8 Click Close. To change an existing multileader style to annotative 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager dialog box, Styles list, select a style.
3 Click Set Current. 4 Click Close. 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Multileader. 6 Choose a point for the leader head. 7 Choose the last point for the leader. 8 Specify the text width. 9 Enter text. 10 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To change an existing leader or multileader to annotative or non-annotative 1 Select a leader or multileader in a drawing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, under Misc, click Annotative.
Annotative on page 1518 block definitions create annotative block references. Annotative block references and attributes initially support the current annotation scale at the time they are inserted. You should insert annotative block references with a unit factor of 1. You cannot change the Annotative property of individual block references. To set an annotative block’s paper size, you should define the block in paper space or on the Model layout with the annotation scale on page 1518 set to 1:1.
You can set the orientation of annotative blocks to match the orientation of the paper. For more information about setting the orientation of annotative objects, see Set Orientation for Annotations on page 892. You can use the ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable to specify whether or not the entire drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing. The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects.
2 In the Block Definition dialog box, Name box, click the arrow and select the name of the block you want to update to be annotative. 3 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 4 Click OK. The existing block references in the drawing are now annotative. To create an annotative attribute definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes. 2 In the Attribute Definition dialog box, set the Attribute Modes and enter Tag information, Insertion Point and Text Settings.
Create Annotative Hatches Use an annotative hatch to symbolically represent material such as sand, concrete, steel, earth, etc. An annotative on page 1518 hatch is defined at a paper size. You can create individual annotative hatch objects as well as annotative hatch patterns. The hatch pattern definitions stored in the acadlt.pat file contain information that indicates whether the pattern is annotative or non-annotative.
2 At the command prompt, enter settings. 3 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Select Objects. 4 Specify the object or objects you want to hatch. 5 Under Options, select Annotative. 6 Click OK. To change an existing hatch object to annotative 1 In model space, at the command prompt, enter cannoscale. 2 Enter the scale set for the viewport in which the hatch is displayed. 3 In the drawing, select the hatch. 4 In the Properties palette, under Pattern, click Annotative.
Annotation visibility is turned on by default. When annotation visibility is turned on, all annotative objects are displayed. When annotation visibility is turned off , only annotative objects for the current scale are displayed. In general, you should turn off annotation visibility, except when inspecting a drawing created by another person or when adding scales to existing annotative objects. Annotation visibility is also controlled by the ANNOALLVISIBLE system variable.
Quick Reference System Variables ANNOALLVISIBLE Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale. MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.
Use the ANNORESET command to reset the location of all scale representations for an annotative object to that of the current scale representation. To add the current annotation scale to an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In a drawing, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. To delete the current annotation scale from an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
To automatically update annotative objects to support the current annotation scale ■ On the drawing or application status bar, click the button displays as so it . To add an annotation scale to an annotative object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. 2 In the drawing area, select one or more annotative objects. 3 Press ENTER. 4 In the Annotative Object Scale dialog box, click Add. 5 In the Add Scales to Object dialog box, select one or more scales to add to the objects.
Quick Reference Commands ANNORESET Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected annotative objects. OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. System Variables SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.
Annotative attributes in blocks match the paper orientation of the block. See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1003 ■ Create Annotative Text on page 871 ■ Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes on page 882 ■ Create Annotative Hatches on page 886 To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, Styles list, select an annotative text style. NOTE A annotative.
4 Click Apply. 5 Click Close. To match the layout’s orientation for an annotative block definition 1 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create. 2 In the Block Definition dialog box, under Name, select a block. 3 Under Behavior, select Annotative. 4 Under Behavior, select Match Block Orientation to Layout. 5 Click Close. To match the layout’s orientation for an existing annotative text object 1 In the drawing, select an annotative text object. 2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text Style.
Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 25 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills on page 895 Specify Hatch and Fill Areas on page 903 Control the Appearance of Hatches on page 908 Modify Hatches and Fills on page 925 Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects on page 931 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Hatches and fills do not have to be bounded. In the following illustration, the concrete hatches are bounded, while the earth hatches are unbounded.
By default, bounded hatches are associative, which means that the hatch object is associated with the hatch boundary objects, and changes to the boundary objects are automatically applied to the hatch. To maintain associativity, the boundary objects must continue to completely enclose the hatch. The alignment and orientation of a hatch pattern is determined by the current location and orientation of the user coordinate system, in addition to controls in the user interface.
NOTE This procedure describes how to use DesignCenter to drag hatch patterns into your drawing. You can also drag hatch patterns from a tool palette. 2 On the DesignCenter toolbar, click Search. 3 In the Search dialog box, do the following: ■ From the Look For drop-down list, select Hatch Pattern Files. ■ From the In drop-down list, select the drive where the program is installed. ■ Confirm that Search Subfolders is selected.
To hatch or fill areas (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, select one of the options from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern or fill. 4 Specify a point inside each area to be hatched. 5 On the ribbon, make any adjustments as needed. On the Properties panel, you can change the hatch type and colors or modify the transparency level, angle, or scale for the hatch.
6 (Optional) From the Draw Order drop-down list, choose one of the options. You can change the draw order of the hatch so that the hatch is displayed either behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. To hatch selected objects (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Boundaries panel, click Select. 3 Select the objects that you want to hatch.
HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. System Variables GFANG Specifies the angle of a gradient fill.
GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns. HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations. HPMAXLINES Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation.
HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
Hatch associativity is turned on by default and is controlled by the HPASSOC system variable. You can also control hatch associativity using the following tools in the user interface: ■ Hatch and Gradient dialog box ■ Hatch Edit dialog box ■ Hatch panel on the ribbon ■ Properties palette Nonassociative hatches are not updated when their original boundary is changed. Hatch Enclosed Areas Within Boundaries Enclosed areas within hatch boundaries are called islands.
Using the same pick point, the results of the options are compared below. NOTE Text objects are treated as islands. If island detection is turned on, the result always leaves a rectangular space around the text. Include Objects in a Boundary Set When hatching a small area in a large, complex drawing, you can save time by selecting a smaller set of objects in the drawing to be used in determining the hatch boundary.
The red circles remain displayed after you exit HATCH. They are removed when you specify another internal point for the hatch, or when you use REDRAW, REGEN, or REGENALL. To hatch an area whose boundary is not quite closed, do one of the following: ■ Locate the gaps and modify the boundary objects so they form a closed boundary. ■ Set the HPGAPTOL system variable to a value large enough to bridge the gaps. HPGAPTOL applies only to gaps between geometric objects that would meet if extended.
To define a boundary set in a complex drawing (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click the More Options button at the bottom-right. 3 Under Boundary Set, click New. 4 Select the objects to be considered for the hatch and press Enter. Selecting the objects with a crossing window is often the best method. 5 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch.
HPGAPTOL Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPQUICKPREVIEW Controls whether a hatch preview is displayed when specifying a hatch area. HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled.
■ Gradient fill. Fill an enclosed area with a color gradient. A gradient fill can be displayed as a tint (a color mixed with white), a shade (a color mixed with black), or a smooth transition between two colors. Gradients that mimic colors displayed on a cylinder, a sphere, or other shapes are available. NOTE You cannot use plot styles to control the plotted color of gradient fills.
To create a hatch with a predefined hatch pattern (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Hatch command from a menu or toolbar. 2 In the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, Hatch tab, under Type and Pattern, click Predefined from the Type drop-down list. 3 Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. 4 (Optional) Select a color override from the Color drop-down list. Specify any other options as needed. 5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points.
5 Under Boundaries, click Add: Pick Points. 6 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch and press Enter. 7 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands GRADIENT Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects.
GFCLR2 Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill. GFCLRLUM Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. GFCLRSTATE Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors. GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill. GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills.
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
See also: ■ Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation on page 927 To specify the alignment of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 4 On the Origin panel, click Set Origin, and specify a point in the drawing. The hatch pattern will be aligned to this point. 5 On the Properties panel, specify a hatch angle.
8 Click OK to apply the hatch. Alternatively, you can control the origin and rotation of a hatch pattern by changing the origin and rotation of the user coordinate system (UCS) before you create the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS.
HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns The scale of hatch patterns can be set individually, or it can be set automatically based on the scale of each layout viewport.
To set the scale of a hatch pattern (ribbon turned on) 1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch. 2 On the Properties panel, click Pattern from the Hatch Type drop-down list. 3 On the Pattern panel, click a hatch pattern. 4 On the Properties panel, enter a hatch pattern scale. 5 Specify a point inside each area that you want to hatch. 6 Press Enter, or click Close on the ribbon to apply the hatch and exit the command.
MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations.
Hatch objects have an additional capability that is not available with other types of objects. You can specify which layer, color, and transparency settings will be automatically applied to each new hatch object, regardless of the current property settings. This can save you time. For example, you can specify that all new hatch objects are automatically created on a specified layer regardless of the current layer setting.
6 Click OK to apply the hatch. All new hatch objects will use this transparency value instead of the current transparency value used by all other objects. Quick Reference Commands HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill. HATCHTOBACK Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. HPSCALE Sets the hatch pattern scale factor. HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
To hide a hatch's boundary objects, assign the boundary objects to a different layer than the hatch object, and then turn off or freeze the layer of the boundary objects. This method maintains hatch associativity. See also: ■ Reshape a Hatch or Fill on page 928 To create an unbounded hatch 1 At the Command prompt, enter -hatch. 2 Enter p to specify Properties. 3 Enter the name of the pattern. For example, enter earth to specify the EARTH pattern. 4 Specify the scale and angle for the hatch pattern.
HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPDOUBLE Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations.
HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Control the Draw Order of Hatches and Fills Specify the draw order for a hatch object to control whether it is displayed behind or in front of the hatch boundary, or behind or in front of all other objects. This behavior is controlled by the HPDRAWORDER system variable.
The following tools are available for modifying hatch properties: ■ Hatch panel controls. Display on the ribbon by selecting a hatch object. ■ Hatch Edit dialog box. Access the dialog box with HATCHEDIT. ■ Properties palette. ■ Hatch shortcut menu. Access the menu by right-clicking a hatch object. ■ Hatch dynamic menu. Access the menu by hovering over the control grip on a selected hatch. ■ Command line. Enter -HATCHEDIT.
System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation Shift, scale, or rotate hatch patterns to align them with existing objects. To shift a hatch pattern, relocate the origin point of the hatch object.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables HPDLGMODE Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box. HPINHERIT Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT. Reshape a Hatch or Fill Reshape an associative hatch by modifying the boundary objects. Reshape a nonassociative hatch by modifying the hatch object.
You can also change the hatch object by editing the grips of the associated boundary objects. To easily select all of the objects in a complex boundary, use the Display Boundary Objects option. If the boundary object is a polyline or spline, multi-functional grips are displayed. For more information, see Use Object Grips on page 637. Modify the Extents of Non-associative Hatches and Fills When you select a non-associative hatch, multi-functional grips are displayed on the hatch.
Quick Reference Commands EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. TRIM Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects. System Variables GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. Re-create the Boundary of a Hatch or Fill Create a new boundary object for a non-associative or an unbounded hatch or fill. Use the Recreate Boundary option to generate a closed polyline or a region object around a selected hatch or fill.
To re-create the boundary object of a hatch or fill (ribbon turned off) 1 Start the Modify Hatch command from a menu or toolbar, or enter hatchedit at the Command prompt. 2 Select the hatch object. 3 In the Hatch Edit dialog box, under Boundaries, click Recreate Boundary. 4 Specify the type of object to create as the new boundary. 5 Specify whether to associate the boundary with the hatch object. 6 Click OK to apply the hatch. Quick Reference Commands HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill.
A wipeout object covers existing objects with a blank area to make room for notes or to mask details. This area is defined by the wipeout frame, which you can turn on for editing, and turn off for plotting. Use the WIPEOUT command both for creating a wipeout object, and for controlling whether wipeout frames are displayed or hidden in the drawing. If a polyline is used to create a wipeout object, the polyline must be closed, contain line segments only, and have zero width.
To turn all wipeout frames on or off 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Markup panel ➤ Wipeout. 2 At the prompt, enter f (Frames). 3 Enter on or off, and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands WIPEOUT Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed in the drawing.
934
Notes and Labels 26 You can create and modify several types of text, including text with leaders. You can control most text style settings by defining text styles. Overview of Notes and Labels You can create text in various ways. For short, simple entries, use single-line text. For longer entries with internal formatting, use multiline text (mtext).
You can enter an angle value or use your pointing device. 5 Enter the text. At the end of each line, press ENTER. Enter more text as needed. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing.
■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation.
SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders. Create Text You can create text using several methods, depending on your needs. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 994 Overview of Creating Text The text you add to your drawings conveys a variety of information.
Regardless of the number of lines, each set of paragraphs created in a single editing session forms a single object, which you can move, rotate, erase, copy, mirror, or scale. There are more editing options for multiline text than there are for single-line text. For example, you can apply underlining, fonts, color, and text height changes to individual characters, words, or phrases within a paragraph. Annotative Text Use annotative on page 1518 text for notes and labels in your drawing.
NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. If you specify another point during this command, the cursor moves to that point, and you can continue typing. Every time you press ENTER or specify a point, a new text object is created. 6 Press ENTER on a blank line to end the command.
8 On the ribbon, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box. NOTE The MText height value is reset to 0 if its default height is not modified during creation. ■ To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics, or to create underlined or overlined text for any font, click the corresponding button on the ribbon.
TEXTED Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style.
Align Single-Line Text As you create text, you can align it. That is, you can justify it with one of the alignment options shown in the following illustrations. Left alignment is the default. To left-align text, do not enter an option at the Justify prompt. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 994 To create single-line text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Single Line Text.
2 Specify the insertion point for the first character. If you press ENTER, the program locates the new text immediately below the last text object you created, if any. 3 Specify the height of the text. This prompt is displayed only if text height is set to 0 in the current text style. A rubber-band line is attached from the text insertion point to the cursor. Click to set the height of the text to the length of the rubber-band line. 4 Specify a text rotation angle.
3 Enter an alignment option. For example, enter br to align text at its bottom-right corner. 4 Continue creating text. Quick Reference Commands QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Create Multiline Text A multiline text (mtext) object includes one or more paragraphs of text that can be manipulated as a single object. Overview of Multiline Text You can create a multiline text (mtext) object by entering or importing text.
Text Style Most characteristics of the text are controlled by the text style, which sets the default font and other options, such as line spacing, justification, and color. You can use the current text style or select a new one. The STANDARD text style is the default. Within the multiline text object, you can override the current text style by applying formatting such as underlining, boldface, and different fonts to individual characters.
5 If you want to use a text style other than the default, on the ribbon, click the Annotate tab, Text panel. Select the desired text style from the drop-down list. 6 Enter text. NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it.
To insert symbols or special characters in multiline text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 On either the ribbon contextual tab or expanded toolbar, click Symbol. 3 Click one of the options on the menu, or click Other to display the Character Map dialog box. To access the Character Map dialog box, you must have charmap.exe ® ® installed.
The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 (the default) extends the background by 0.5 times the text height. 5 Under Fill Color, do one of the following: ■ Select the Use Drawing Background Color option. ■ Select a color for the background, or click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box. 6 Click OK to return to the editor.
QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. MTEXTFIXED Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor. MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar.
Justify Multiline Text Justification of multiline text objects controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Justification controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Text is left-justified and right-justified with respect to the boundary rectangle that defines the text width. Text flows from the insertion point, which can be at the middle, the top, or the bottom of the resulting text object.
2 Select the multiline text object. 3 On the Properties palette, select one of the Justification options. 4 Click outside the Properties palette. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Format Characters Within Multiline Text You can override the text style and apply different formatting to individual words and characters within multiline text. The format changes affect only the text you select; the current text style is not changed.
2 Select the text you want to format: ■ To select one or more letters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. ■ To select a word, double-click the word. ■ To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. 3 On either the ribbon contextual tab or toolbar, make format changes as follows: ■ To change the font of the selected text, select a font from the list. ■ To change the height of the selected text, enter a new value in the Height box.
Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style.
■ A space after the punctuation is created by pressing Tab. ■ The text following the space is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter. NOTE If you do not want list formatting applied to all text that fits the criteria, clear the Allow Bullets and Lists option. (Right-click in the In-Place Text Editor, click Bullets and Lists ➤ Allow Bullets and Lists.) When Allow Bullets and Lists is not checked, you cannot create new formatted lists in the multiline text object.
The following characters can be used as punctuation after the number or letter when you type a list but cannot be used as bullets: Character Description .
5 On the expanded toolbar, click Numbering, Bullets, or Uppercase Letters. ■ Numbering. Uses numbers with periods for the items in a list. ■ Bullets. Uses a bullet or other character for the items in a list. ■ Uppercase Letters. Uses uppercase letters with periods for the items in a list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters. To use lowercase letters, right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists ➤ Lettered ➤ Lowercase.
5 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To create a lettered or numbered list in multiline text as you type 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object.
To create a bulleted list in multiline text as you type 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 In the Options panel, click the Options icon. 4 Click Bullets and Lists. Verify that Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists are selected (tick mark). 5 Start a line of text by entering \U+2022 (the Unicode string for a bullet) or by selecting a bullet character or another symbol.
To move a list item in multiline text down a level 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Place the cursor at the beginning of a list item and press TAB. The item moves down one level and begins a nested list. 3 Press ENTER to start the next item at the same level, or press SHIFT+TAB to move the item up a level.
■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press CTRL+ENTER. To convert the lists in a multiline text object to plain text 1 If the ribbon is active, double-click a multiline text object to open the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab. If the ribbon is not active, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. 2 Right-click in the editor. Click Bullets and Lists. Remove the check mark next to Allow Bullets and Lists. The plain text lists retain their bullets, numbers, or letters.
Indent Multiline Text and Use Tabs You can control how paragraphs are indented in a multiline text (mtext) object. The ruler in the In-Place Text Editor shows the settings for the current paragraph. Tabs and indents that you set before you start to enter text apply to the whole multiline text object. To apply different tabs and indents to individual paragraphs, click in a single paragraph or select multiple paragraphs and then change the settings.
4 Slide the bottom indent marker to where you want the other lines of the paragraphs to start. This step indents turnover lines in paragraphs that are more than one line long. 5 To change the indentation, select the paragraphs you want to change, click the ruler to set new tab stops, if needed, and move the indent markers. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ On the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, in the Close panel, click Close Text Editor.
Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text Line spacing for multiline text is the distance between the baseline (bottom) of one line of text and the baseline of the next line of text. The line space factor applies to the entire multiline text object, not to selected lines. You can set the spacing increment to a multiple of single line spacing, or as an absolute distance. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters.
■ Line Space Distance. Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 and 1.3333. NOTE After you exit the Properties palette, the value of the other line spacing option is updated to correspond with the line spacing value that you entered. Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables TSPACEFAC Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height.
You use special characters to indicate how selected text should be stacked. ■ Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line. ■ Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line. ■ Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is stacked vertically and not separated by a line. To stack characters manually within the In-Place Text Editor, select the text to be formatted, including the special stacking character, and right-click. From the shortcut menu, click Stack.
See also: ■ Work with Text Styles on page 1003 ■ Use an Alternate Text Editor on page 1032 To create stacked text 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. 2 Specify opposite corners of a bounding box to define the width of the multiline text object. 3 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab or In-Place Text Editor, set text style and other multiline text properties as needed.
To change stack properties 1 Double-click the multiline text object you want to edit. 2 In either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (Formatting tab drop-down) or In-Place Text Editor, select the stacked text. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Properties. 4 In the Stack Properties dialog box, change settings as needed. 5 To set properties for automatic stacking, click Autostack. 6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar.
System Variables TSTACKALIGN Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text. TSTACKSIZE Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height. Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text You can create and edit multiple columns using the In-Place Text Editor column options and column grips. Multiple columns can be created and edited with the In-Place Text Editor and through grip editing.
height of the column is fixed. To delete the break, highlight it and delete or or use the Backspace key right after the break. Editing Columns in the Properties Palette You will be able to select Static or Dynamic columns, turn off columns and change column and gutter width through the Properties palette. Changing column width in the palette will exhibit results similar to changing width using grips. The palette is the only place that you can also change gutter setting.
The following illustration demonstrates how grips are used with Static Columns.
NOTE In general, grips only update the mtext object after the mouse button is released. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. System Variables MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.
Import Text from External Files You can insert TXT or RTF text files created in word processors into your drawing by either importing the text or dragging a file icon from Windows Explorer. Importing TXT or RTF files from other sources gives you the most flexibility. For example, you can create a text file of standard notes that you include in drawings. The imported text becomes a multiline text object, which you can edit and reformat. Text imported from a TXT file inherits the current text style.
6 To save your changes and exit the editor, use one of the following methods: ■ Click OK on the toolbar. ■ Click in the drawing outside the editor. ■ Press Ctrl+Enter. To insert a text file using the drag-and-drop method 1 Open Windows Explorer, but make sure it does not fill the screen. 2 Display the folder that contains the TXT or RTF file you want. 3 Drag the TXT or RTF file icon onto the drawing. TXT files are inserted as multiline text objects using the current text style.
When associative dimensioning is turned on and object snaps are used to locate the leader arrowhead, the leader is associated with the object to which the arrowhead is attached. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead is relocated, and the landing stretches accordingly. NOTE The leader object should not be confused with the leader line that is automatically generated as part of a dimension line. To create a leader with straight lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader.
Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. MLEADER Creates a multileader object. QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders.
A multileader object, or mleader, comprises a leader and a note. It can be created arrowhead first, tail first, or content first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that style Multileader objects can contain multiple leader lines, each of which can have one or more segments, so that one note can point to multiple objects in your drawing. You can modify the properties of leader segment in the Properties palette.
Multileader objects can be sorted evenly along a specified line. Using MLEADERALIGN, selected multileaders can be aligned and evenly spaced as specified. Associate Leaders with Objects When associative dimensioning is turned on (DIMASSOC system variable), the leader arrowhead can be associated with a location on an object using an object snap. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches, but the multiline text remains in place.
5 Enter s to specify straight leaders. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click an end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 On the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To create a leader attached to block content at an angle 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style.
2 At the Command prompt, enter o to select options. 3 Enter l to specify leaders. 4 Enter t to specify the leader type. 5 Enter p to specify a spline leader. 6 In the drawing, click a start point for the leader head. 7 Click the end point for the leader. 8 Enter your MTEXT content. 9 In the Text Formatting toolbar, click OK. To edit leader text 1 Double-click the text you want to edit. If the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab is displayed.
To remove leaders from an annotation 1 Select the multileader. 2 Do one of the following: ■ Hover over a leader endpoint grip, and choose Remove Leader from the grip menu. ■ On the Multileader toolbar, click Remove Leader, and then select the leaders you want to remove. Press ENTER. To align and space leaders 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align. 2 Select the multileaders to be aligned. Press ENTER. 3 Specify a starting point in the drawing to begin the alignment.
To create a landing line with multiple segments 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New to create a new multileader style. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style. 4 In the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, select the Leader Structure tab. 5 In the Constraints group box, select the Maximum Leader Points check box.
MLEADERCOLLECT Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns, and displays the result with a single leader. MLEADEREDIT Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object. MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads.
MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Modify Leaders Using Grips You can make many leader edits directly using multi-functional grips. You can add and remove leaders, add and remove vertices, lengthen or move the landing line, or move the leader text. Hover over a grip to access the option you want. ■ ■ ■ From the Landing grip, you can choose: ■ Stretch to move the leader landing. ■ Lengthen Landing to extend the Landing line.
See also: ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips on page 985 To modify leaders using grips 1 Select the multileader you want to modify. 2 Hover over a leader endpoint grip, a vertex grip, or the landing grip. 3 Click the option you want. 4 Click to specify a location for the action you’re performing. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. MLEADER Creates a multileader object.
System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders.
NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in multileader objects. Once a multileader style has been defined, you can set it as the current multileader style to be used when the MLEADER command is invoked. To define a leader style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. 2 In the Multileader Style Manager, click New. 3 In the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, specify a name for the new multileader style.
7 On the Content tab, specify either text or block content for the multileader. If the multileader object will contain text content, then select or clear the following options: ■ Default Text. Sets default text for the multileader content. A field can be inserted here. ■ Text Style. Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. ■ Text Angle. Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text. ■ Text Color.
Quick Reference Commands MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. System Variables CMLEADERSTYLE Sets the name of the current multileader style. Add Content to a Leader Leaders can contain multiline text or blocks to label parts of your drawing. Leaders Containing Multiline Text Leaders can contain multiline text as content. Text can be inserted by default when creating a leader style. Text style, color, height, and alignment can be applied and modified in leader annotations.
Bottom of top line Underline top line Middle of text Middle of bottom line Bottom of bottom line Underline bottom line Underline all text Leaders Containing Blocks Multileaders can contain blocks as content by applying a multileader style that references a block in your drawing.
NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as either content or arrowheads in multileader objects. Blocks can be connected to a multileader by attaching the landing to a selected insertion point on the block. You can also connect a multileader to a center point on the selected block. You can create annotative multileaders with blocks as content. The block content will be scaled according to the specified scale representation. Any attributes within the block content will not change with the scale representation.
QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. TEXT Creates a single-line text object. System Variables DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
Use Fields in Text A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. Insert Fields A field is text that contains instructions to display data that you expect to change during the life cycle of the drawing. When a field is updated, the latest data is displayed. For example, the value of the FileName field is the name of the file.
If you no longer want to update a field, you can preserve the value that is currently displayed by converting the field to text. The field expression, consisting of escape characters and a field code, is shown in the Field dialog box but cannot be edited. To insert a field in text 1 Double-click the text to display the appropriate text editing dialog box. 2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click. Click Insert Field. For keyboard access, press CTRL+F.
The current value of the field is displayed in a shaded text box to the right of Field Category. 5 Select a format and any other option. 6 Click OK to insert the field. The field displays its current value when you move to the next cell. To use a field to display a property of an object 1 Double-click a text object to display the appropriate text editing dialog box. 2 Place the cursor where you want the field text to appear and right-click. Click Insert Field.
For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 0.03937. 5 Enter any text that you want to precede or follow the field value. For example, enter mm for millimeters. 6 Select a decimal separator. Select None or Comma to group thousands. 7 Select an option for suppressing zeros: ■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal field values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. ■ Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal field values. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Quick Reference Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Update Fields When a field is updated, it displays the latest value. You can update fields individually or update all fields in one or more selected text objects. You can also set fields to be updated automatically when the drawing is opened, saved, plotted, regenerated, or sent through ETRANSMIT. Settings on the User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box) control whether fields are updated automatically or on demand (FIELDEVAL system variable).
NOTE The LispVariables and SheetSet Manager fields are not available in AutoCAD LT. The drawings created in AutoCAD that contain these fields can be opened and the cached value is displayed. Compatibility with Previous Releases When a drawing with fields is opened in AutoCAD 2004 or earlier, the fields are not updated; they display the value last displayed in the drawing before it was opened. If no changes are made to a field, it is updated normally when it is reopened in a release that supports fields.
■ 16: Updated on regeneration For example, to update fields only when the file is opened, saved, or plotted, enter 7. Quick Reference Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. System Variables FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated.
2 Place the cursor where you want the hyperlink text to appear. 3 Right-click in the editor. Click Insert Field. 4 In the Field dialog box, in Field Category, select Linked. 5 In Field Names, select Hyperlink, and click Hyperlink. 6 In the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, use one of the following methods to specify a location: ■ Under Type the File or Web Page Name, enter the path and name of the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink. ■ Under Browse For, click File, Web Page, or Target.
LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. System Variables CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
The current text style sets the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics. If you want to create text using a different text style, you can make another text style current. The table shows the settings for the STANDARD text style. The settings for the current text style are displayed at the Command prompts. You can use or modify the current text style or create and load a new text style.
Formatting Retained? Font No Height No Italic No Stacking Yes Underlining Yes Annotative Text Styles Use annotative on page 1518 text for notes and labels in your drawing. You create annotative text by using an annotative text style, which sets the height of the text on the paper. For more information about creating and working with an annotative text, see Create Annotative Text on page 871.
System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Assign Text Fonts You can assign a text font as part of the text style definition. Several factors depend on the type of text you are working with.
You can assign a font to a text style by selecting a font file from the list in the Text Style dialog box. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Use TrueType Fonts Several factors affect the display of TrueType fonts in a drawing.
The In-Place Text Editor can display only fonts that are recognized by the operating system. Because SHX fonts are not recognized by the operating system, a TrueType equivalent is supplied in the In-Place Text Editor when you select an SHX or any other non-TrueType font for editing. See also: ■ Set Text Height on page 1014 To assign a TrueType font to a text style 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Panel Launcher button. 2 In the Text Style dialog box under Style Name, click New.
TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Use Text Fonts for International Work Several factors affect your choosing, entering, and displaying international text in a drawing. The program supports the Unicode character-encoding standard. An SHX font encoded using the Unicode standard font can contain many more characters than are defined in your system; therefore, to use a character not directly available from the keyboard, you can enter the escape sequence \U+nnnn, where nnnn re
Asian Language Big Fonts Included in the Product Font File Name Description whtgtxt.shx Korean font whtmtxt.shx Korean font When you specify fonts using -STYLE, the assumption is that the first name is the normal font and the second (separated by a comma) is the Big Font. If you enter only one name, it's assumed that it is the normal font and any associated Big Font is removed.
3 In the New Text Style dialog box, enter a style name for the new text style. Click OK. 4 Under Font Name, select the name of an SHX font file, and then select Use Big Font to select an Asian-language big font. When you select Use Big Font, the Font Style box changes to a Big Font Name box. Only SHX fonts are available for selection, and only Big Font names are shown in the Big Font box.
font equivalents. These PostScript fonts are mapped to the equivalent TrueType fonts in a font mapping file. Additionally, when a TrueType font is not available, you can specify a different TrueType font, making sure that the fonts are similar to avoid text length or wrapping problems. If the default font does not support the characters you enter using the In-Place Text Editor (MTEXT command), an alternative font is substituted.
Display Proxy Fonts For third-party or custom SHX fonts that have no TrueType equivalent, one of several different TrueType fonts called proxy fonts is substituted. In the In-Place Text Editor, proxy fonts look different from the fonts they represent to indicate that the proxy fonts are substitutions for the fonts used in the drawing. If you want to format characters by assigning one of these fonts, first create a text style that uses the font and then apply that text style to the characters.
System Variables FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Set Text Height Text height determines the size in drawing units of the letters in the font you are using. The exception is TrueType fonts: the value usually represents the size of the uppercase letters. If you specify a fixed height as part of a text style, the Height prompt is bypassed when you create single-line text.
3 Under Font, enter the text height (in drawing units) in the Height box. 4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply. 5 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSTYLE Sets the name of the current text style. Set Text Obliquing Angle The obliquing angle determines the forward or backward slant of the text.
To set the obliquing angle in a text style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style. 2 In the Text Style dialog box, select a text style from the Style Name list. 3 Under Effects, enter an angle between -85 and 85 in the Oblique Angle box. A positive value slants text to the right. A negative value slants text to the left. 4 To update existing text that uses this text style, click Apply. 5 Click Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
NOTE Vertical orientation is not supported for TrueType fonts and symbols. Vertical Text for Asian Languages ■ SHX fonts. Text can be created with SHX fonts and Big Fonts for vertical display in the same way as for previous releases. For best results, use the single-line TEXT command, not MTEXT. You can select a vertical style in the Text Style dialog box. ■ TrueType fonts. You still select fonts starting with the @ sign, but now the text is automatically rotated 270 degrees.
Quick Reference Commands STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Change Text You can change text content, formatting, and properties such as scale and justification. Overview of Changing Text Text, whether created with TEXT, MTEXT, or MLEADER can be modified like any other object. You can move, rotate, erase, and copy it. You can change text properties in the Properties palette. You can also edit the contents of existing text and create a mirror image of it.
System Variables MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting. TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Change Single-Line Text You can change the contents, formatting and properties of single-line text. You can change single-line text with DDEDIT and PROPERTIES.
2 Select a single-line text object. 3 In the in-place editor, enter the new text. 4 Press ENTER. 5 Select another text object to edit, or press ENTER to end the command. To modify properties of single-line text objects 1 Select a single-line text object. 2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, enter any new text, and then change formatting and other properties as needed.
Change Multiline Text You can change the location and content of multiline text objects with the Properties palette, the In-Place Text Editor, and grips.
■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text on page 446 To change multiline text 1 Select a multiline text object. 2 Right-click the selected object. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, enter any new text and change formatting and other settings as needed. To change the width of a multiline text object 1 Double-click the multiline text object.
MTEDIT Edits multiline text. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. System Variables CENTERMT Controls how grips stretch multiline text that is centered horizontally. MIRRTEXT Controls how MIRROR reflects text. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. MTEXTTOOLBAR Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. OSNAPNODELEGACY Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects.
With FIND, you can use wild-card characters in your search. Character Definition # (Pound) Matches any numeric digit @ (At) Matches any alphabetic character .
4 Click the Expand Find Options button to specify search options and text types for the specified text. 5 Click Find. 6 Use one of the following options to view the results of your search: ■ To list all results in a table, click the List Results check box. ■ To zoom to and highlight each result individually, leave the List Results check box unchecked. 7 Click Close. To replace text using the Find and Replace Dialog box 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text.
+ CTRL. Alternately, you can select a range of results in the list by pressing Shift + Click. 9 Click Close. Change Text Scale and Justification Several commands are available for changing the scale of one or more text and attribute objects, or their insertion points, simultaneously without changing the location of the objects. You can change the scale of one or more text objects, attributes, and attribute definitions, or their insertion points, simultaneously without changing the location of the objects.
NOTE The SPACETRANS command is not available from the Model tab or in a perspective view. For more information about entering commands transparently, see Enter Commands on the Command Line on page 41. Change the Justification of Text Objects Without Changing Their Location Use JUSTIFYTEXT to redefine the insertion point of text without moving the text.
Check Spelling You can check the spelling of all text as it is entered in your drawing. You can also specify the specific language dictionary that is used and customize and manage multiple custom spelling dictionaries.
Switch Dictionaries The Check Spelling feature contains several main dictionaries, which are available in different languages. You can also create any number of custom dictionaries and switch between them as needed. During a spelling check, the words in the drawing are matched to the words in the current main dictionary. Any words you add are stored in the custom dictionary that is current at the time of the spelling check.
■ To leave a word unchanged and add it to the dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. 4 Repeat step 3 for each misspelled word. Click Close to exit. NOTE Click Undo to reverse the preceding Check Spelling action or series of actions in the Check Spelling dialog box. To check spelling in a block attribute 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Settings. 3 In the Check Spelling Settings dialog box, click Block Attributes. Click OK.
4 Click Close. To add a custom dictionary or word list 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling. 2 In the Check Spelling dialog box, click Dictionaries. 3 In the Dictionaries dialog box, in the Current Custom dictionary list, select Manage Custom Dictionaries. 4 In the Custom Dictionaries list, click Add and browse to the dictionary’s location. To create a new custom dictionary, click New and enter the dictionary’s name. The name must contain the .cus extension. 5 Click OK.
Use an Alternate Text Editor The default text editor is either the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab (if the ribbon is active) or the In-Place Text Editor (if the ribbon is not active), but you can elect to use any alternate editor that saves files in ASCII format. Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor You can use any text editor, such as Microsoft Notepad, that saves files in ASCII format. You can elect to use an alternate editor by specifying the editor with the MTEXTED system variable.
Format Multiline Text in an Alternate Text Editor If you use an alternate text editor, you apply formatting by entering format codes. You can underline text, add a line over text, and create stacked text. You can also change color, font, and text height. You can change the spaces between text characters or increase the width of the characters themselves. To apply formatting, use the format codes shown in the following table. Format codes for paragraphs Format code Purpose Enter this … \0...\o Turns over
Format codes for paragraphs Format code Purpose Enter this … \Hvaluex; Changes the text height to a multiple of the current text height Autodesk \H3x;AutoCAD \S...^...; Stacks the subsequent text at the /, #, or ^ symbol 1.000\S+0.010^-0.000; \Tvalue; Adjusts the space between characters. Valid values range from a minimum of .75 to 4 times the original spacing between characters. \T2;Autodesk \Qangle; Changes obliquing angle \Q20;Autodesk \Wvalue; Changes width factor to produce wide text \
Each line below was entered in an alternate text editor: {{\H1.5x; Big text} \A2; over text\A1;/\A0; under text}\P {\A0;Baseline: 1 \S1/2;}\P {\A1;Center: 1 \S1/2;}\P {\A2;Topline: 1 \S1/2;}\P {Tolerances: \A1;1.000\H.75x;\S+0.010^-0.000;}\P {Architectural: 9-{\H.666x;\A2;11\A1;/\A0;16}\A2;"}\P To specify an alternate text editor 1 At the Command prompt, enter mtexted.
4 Specify the opposite corner of the multiline text boundary rectangle. 5 In the text editor, enter the text. Enter \P to end a paragraph and start a new paragraph on the next line. (Be sure to capitalize the P.) 6 When your text entry is complete, save the changes and exit the text editor. Quick Reference Commands MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
Tables 27 A table is a rectangular array of cells that contain annotation, primarily text but also blocks. Tables appear in many different forms on many of the sheets that make up drawing sets. In the AEC industry, tables are often referred to as “schedules” and contain information about the materials needed for the construction of the building being designed. In the manufacturing industry, they are often referred to as “BOM” (bills of materials).
When you change the height or width of the table, only the row on page 1536 or column on page 1522 adjacent to the grip you have selected will change. The table will maintain its height or width. To change the size of the table proportionally to the size of the row or column you are editing, press Ctrl while using a column grip. Break Tables into Multiple Parts A table with a large amount of data can be broken into primary and secondary table fragments.
To select more than one cell, click and drag over several cells. You can also hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. When you click inside a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon contextual tab is displayed. If the ribbon is not active, the Table toolbar is displayed.
To set a new background color, select a table, right-click, and click Table Indicator Color on the shortcut menu. The text color, size, and style and the line color are controlled by the settings for column heads in the current table style. See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables on page 1047 To create a tool from a table in the current drawing 1 In the current drawing, select the table.
SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated.
You can bring data from Microsoft Excel into a table in the following three ways: ■ As formulas with supported data formats attached. ■ As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (supported data formats not attached). ■ As calculated data from formulas calculated in Excel (with data formats attached). A table that contains data links displays indicators around linked cells. If you hover your mouse cursor over the data link, information about the data link is displayed.
By default, a data link is locked from editing to prevent undesired changes to the linked spreadsheet. You can lock cells from data changes, format changes, or both. To unlock a data link, click Locking on either the Table ribbon contextual tab or the Table toolbar. To link to a table in an external spreadsheet 1 In your table, select the table cells to link. 2 On either the Table ribbon contextual tab or Table toolbar, click Link Cell.
To remove a link to an external spreadsheet 1 Click inside a cell within the data linked table to select the cell. 2 Right-click and click Data Links ➤ Detach Data Link. To set up a named range in Microsoft Excel 1 In Microsoft Excel, open the workbook or spreadsheet that you want to access. 2 Select a range of cells to function as a linked range. 3 In the Name Box, enter a name for the range of cells, then press Enter. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, if desired, to specify additional linked ranges.
new table style. Once a table is selected, you can specify the structure and contents to copy from that table to the table style. Cell styles can be created and applied to a table style upon insertion of a new table. A table style can specify different cell styles in each type of row to display a different justification and appearance for the text and gridlines. These cell styles are specified upon insertion of a table.
3 In the Table Style dialog box, in the Cell Styles drop-down list, select a cell style to modify, or create a new cell style by clicking the button to the right of the drop-down list. 4 Click OK. To create a table style from an existing table 1 Click a gridline to select the table. 2 Right-click and click Table Style ➤ Save as New Table Style. To create a cell style from an existing cell 1 Click inside the cell to create a cell style from. 2 Right-click and click Cell Style ➤ Save as New Cell Style.
MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style. FIELDDISPLAY Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background.
Blocks can be inserted from the Table toolbar, or from the shortcut menu. Multiple blocks can be inserted in a table cell. If there is more than one block in a table cell, use the Manage Cell Content dialog box to customize the way the cell content is displayed. Inside the cell, the arrow keys move the cursor. Use the Table toolbar and the shortcut menu to format text, import text, or make other changes to the text in the cell.
To change the properties of cells in a table 1 Click inside the table cell you want to change. Hold down Shift and click inside another cell to select those two cells and all the cells between them. 2 Use one of the following methods: ■ To change one or more properties, in the Properties palette, click the value you want to change and enter or select a new value. ■ To restore the default properties, right-click. Click Remove Property Overrides.
6 Move the cursor outside the Properties palette, and press Esc to remove selection, or select another cell. To insert a block in a table cell 1 Select and right-click a cell. Click Insert ➤ Block. 2 In the Insert dialog box, select a block from the list of blocks in the drawing, or click Browse to find a block in another drawing. 3 Specify the following properties for the block: ■ Cell Alignment. Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell.
FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text. INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. LIST Displays property data for selected objects. MATCHCELL Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEDIT Edits text in a table cell. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.
Use Formulas in Table Cells Table cells can contain formulas that do calculations using the values in other table cells. With a table cell selected, you can insert formulas from the Table toolbar as well as the shortcut menu. You can also open the In-Place Text Editor and enter a formula in a table cell manually. Insert a Formula In formulas, cells are referred to by their column letter and row number. For example, the cell at top left in the table is A1.
is selected. If two cells are manually filled with dates one week apart, the remaining cells are incremented by one week. See also: ■ Use Fields in Text on page 994 To add a formula to table cells 1 Select the table cell where you want to place the formula by clicking inside it. The Table toolbar is displayed. 2 On the Table toolbar, click one of the following: ■ Insert Formula ➤ Average ■ Insert Formula ➤ Sum ■ Insert Formula ➤ Count ■ Insert Formula ➤ Cell 3 Follow the prompts.
Use a colon to define a range of cells and a comma for individual cells. A formula must start with an equal sign (=) and can contain any of the following signs: plus (+), minus (-), times (*), divided by (/), exponent (^), and parentheses (). 3 To save your changes and exit the editor, click in the drawing outside the editor. The cell displays the result of the calculation. To change the background color of column letters and row numbers for tables 1 Click a grid line to select a table. 2 Right-click.
Quick Reference FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. TABLE Creates an empty table object. TABLEEXPORT Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. TABLESTYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles. UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style.
1056
Dimensions and Tolerances 28 You can add measurements to your drawing with several dimensioning commands. Use dimension styles to format dimensions quickly and maintain industry or project dimensioning standards. Understand Basic Concepts of Dimensioning You can create several types of dimensions, and you can control their appearance by setting up dimension styles or by editing individual dimensions. Overview of Dimensioning Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing.
NOTE To simplify drawing organization and dimension scaling, it is recommended that you create dimensions on layouts rather than in model space. To create a dimension 1 Create a layer designated for dimensions and make it the current layer. 2 Near the bottom-left corner of the application window, click a layout tab. 3 Click Dimension menu. Click a dimension option. 4 Follow the Command prompts. Quick Reference Commands DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension. DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension.
DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. DIMBREAK Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. DIMJOGGED Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs. DIMBREAK Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension. DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions. DIMRADIUS Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.
Parts of a Dimension Here is a list of the parts of a dimension along with their descriptions. Dimensions have several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines. Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances. A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular dimensions, the dimension line is an arc.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Associative Dimensions Dimensions can be associative, nonassociative, or exploded. Associative dimensions adjust to changes in the geometric objects that they measure. Dimension associativity defines the relationship between geometric objects and the dimensions that give their distance and angles. There are three types of associativity between geometric objects and dimensions. ■ Associative dimensions.
Special Situations and Limitations You may need to use DIMREGEN to update associative dimensions after panning or zooming, after opening a drawing that was modified with an earlier release, or after opening a drawing with external references that have been modified.
3 Do either or both of the following: ■ Click Apply to record the current Options settings in the system registry. ■ Click OK to record the current Options settings in the system registry and close the Options dialog box. All subsequently created dimensions in the drawing use the new setting. Unlike most other option settings, dimension associativity is saved in the drawing file rather than in the system registry. Quick Reference Commands DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions.
Use Dimension Styles You can control the appearance of dimensions by changing settings. For convenience and to help maintain dimensioning standards, you can store these settings in dimension styles. Overview of Dimension Styles A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls the appearance of dimensions, such as arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances.
5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Compare Dimension Styles and Variables You can view all the settings in a dimension style. Dimension styles used in externally referenced drawings are differentiated from those defined in your current drawing. You can list the dimension styles in the current drawing.
To list all dimension settings for the current dimension style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style from the Styles list. 3 Click Compare. The dimensioning system variables, their current settings, and a brief description are listed. Overrides are included. To list settings for an existing dimension style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Control Dimension Geometry You can control the appearance of dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks. Control Dimension Lines You can control dimension line properties including color, lineweight, and spacing. You can control several aspects of a dimension line.
■ Control the distance by which the dimension line extends beyond the extension lines for architectural tick (oblique stroke) arrowheads To modify the display of dimension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, change the settings under Dimension Lines as needed. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLTYPE Sets the linetype of the dimension line. DIMLWD Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. DIMSD1 Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. DIMSD2 Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead. DIMSOXD Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines.
■ Specify how far beyond from the dimension line the extension line extends (overshoot) ■ Control the extension origin offset, the distance between the extension line origin, and the start of the extension line ■ Specify a fixed length for extension lines, as measured from the dimension line toward the extension line origin ■ Specify a noncontinuous linetype, typically used for centerlines ■ Modify the angle of the extension lines of a selected dimension to make them oblique 1070 | Chapter 28 Dime
Fixed-Length Extension Lines You can specify a dimension style that sets the total length for extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin point. The extension line offset distance from the origin will never be less than the value specified by the DIMEXO system variable. See also: ■ Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines on page 1111 To modify the display of extension lines 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
System Variables DIMCLRE Assigns colors to extension lines, center marks, and centerlines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMEXE Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line. DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. DIMFXL Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin.
You can choose from many standard types of arrowheads, or you can create your own arrowheads. Additionally, you can ■ Suppress the display of arrowheads, or use one arrowhead only ■ Apply a different type of arrowhead to each end of a dimension line ■ Control the size of arrowheads ■ Flip the direction of an arrowhead using the dimension shortcut menu NOTE Flipped arrowheads maintain their appearance in versions later than AutoCAD 2002.
2 Right-click. Click Flip Arrow. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. DIMSD1 Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. DIMSD2 Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead.
NOTE The insertion point a block is defined with affects its placement as a custom arrowhead on a dimension or leader. For information on changing the insertion point of a block, see Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks on page 767. If you use paper-space scaling, the scale factor is computed before applying it to the arrowhead size value.
WBLOCK Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file. System Variables DIMASZ Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. DIMBLK Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of dimension lines. DIMBLK1 Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. DIMBLK2 Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.
Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines Dimension text and arrowheads usually appear between the extension lines when there is enough space. You can specify how these elements are placed when space is limited. Many factors, such as the size of extension line spacing and arrowhead size, influence how dimension text and arrowheads fit within the extension lines. In general, the best fit, given the available space, is applied.
Even if the arrowheads are outside the extension lines, you can have a line drawn between the extension lines. This is called forcing an internal line and is illustrated as follows. Fit Diameter Dimension Text You can draw several different diameter dimensions depending on text placement, horizontal settings on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, and whether you select the Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines option on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab.
3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fit Options, select an option. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. If there is enough room, text is fit between extension lines. To force an internal line and choose a fit option 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify.
DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. DIMTIH Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate. DIMTIX Draws text between extension lines. DIMTOFL Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
Many of the settings are interdependent. Example images in the Dimension Style Manager are updated dynamically to illustrate how text appears as you change the settings. Align Dimension Text Whether text is inside or outside the extension lines, you can choose whether it is aligned with the dimension line or remains horizontal. The following examples show two combinations of these options. The default alignment is horizontal dimension text, even for vertical dimensions.
First and second extension lines are defined by the order in which you specified the extension line origins when you created the dimension. For angular dimensions, the second extension line is counterclockwise from the first. In the following illustrations, 1 is the first extension line origin and 2 the second. If you place text manually, you can place the dimension text anywhere along the dimension line, inside or outside the extension lines, as you create the dimension.
Other settings, such as Text Alignment, affect the vertical alignment of text. For example, if Horizontal Alignment is selected, text inside the extension lines and centered within the dimension line is horizontal, as shown in the leftmost illustration above. The text is horizontal even if the dimension line is not itself horizontal. To align text with the dimension line 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change.
4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To place dimension text manually 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Fine Tuning, select Place Text Manually When Dimensioning. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. As you create dimensions, you can move the text along the dimension line.
DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. System Variables DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text. DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. DIMTIH Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
Control the Text Style in Dimensions The appearance of dimension text is governed by the text style selected in the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab. You can choose a text style while creating a dimension style and specify a text color and a height independent of the current text style's height setting. You can also specify the gap between base dimension text and the box that surrounds it. The text styles used for dimensions are the same text styles used by all text created in your drawing.
To control the text style in dimensions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Text tab, under Text Appearance, select a text style. 4 If the current text style does not have a fixed height, enter the height of dimension text in the Text Height box. 5 Under Tolerances, enter a height for tolerance values in the Scaling for Height box.
DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMTFAC Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. DIMTFILL Controls the background of dimension text. DIMTFILLCLR Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. DIMTXSTY Specifies the text style of the dimension.
These settings are available on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab. Control the Display of Alternate Units You can create dimensions in two systems of measurement simultaneously. A common use of this feature is to add feet and inches dimensions to drawings created using metric units. The alternate units appear in square brackets ([ ]) in the dimension text. Alternate units cannot be applied to angular dimensions.
To add and format primary units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear or Angular Dimensions, select a unit format and precision value for the primary units. 4 Under Linear Dimensions, enter any prefix and suffix for the displayed dimension. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALT Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. DIMALTD Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units. DIMALTF Controls the multiplier for alternate units. DIMALTTD Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTU Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except Angular.
DIMDSEP Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when creating dimensions whose unit format is decimal. DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. DIMPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement. DIMTDEC Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab, under Linear Dimensions, enter the round-off value. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMRND Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value.
number of inches is indicated as zero, no matter which option you select. Thus, the dimension 4'-3/4" becomes 4'-0 3/4".
To display dimension value in sub units 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab or Alternate Units tab, under Zero Suppression, select Leading. ■ Sub-units factor: Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to display the dimension distance in a sub unit, for distances less than one unit.
DIMZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Display Lateral Tolerances Lateral tolerances are values indicating the amount a measured distance can vary. You can control whether lateral tolerances are displayed and you can choose from several styles of lateral tolerances. A lateral tolerance specifies the amount by which a dimension can vary. By specifying tolerances in manufacturing, you can control the degree of accuracy needed for a feature.
Format Lateral Tolerances You can control the vertical placement of tolerance values relative to the main dimension text. Tolerances can align with the top, middle, or bottom of the dimension text. Along with vertical placement of tolerance values, you can also control the horizontal alignment of the upper and lower tolerance values. The upper and lower tolerance values can be aligned using either the operational symbols or decimal separators.
See also: ■ Add Geometric Tolerances on page 1154 To specify methods for lateral tolerances 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Tolerances tab, under Tolerance Format, select a method from the Method list, and then do one of the following: ■ If you select Limits, enter upper and lower tolerance deviation in the Upper Value and Lower Value boxes.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMALTTD Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTTZ Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values. DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. DIMLIM Generates dimension limits as the default text.
DIMTZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values. Control the Display of Fractions You can control the format of the fraction displayed in dimensions. You can set the fraction format in dimensions using the DIMFRAC system variable when the DIMLUNIT system variable is set to 4 (architecture) or 5 (fractional). The following illustration shows the different fraction formats available. These settings are available on the Modify/New Dimension Style dialog box, Primary Units tab.
Quick Reference Commands DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMFRAC Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional). DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. Set the Scale for Dimensions You can specify the size of dimensions in your drawing. How you set dimension size depends on the method you use to lay out and plot drawings.
■ Dimension in model space for plotting in paper space. This was the preferred method for complex, multiple-view drawings prior to AutoCAD 2002. Use this method when the dimensions in a drawing need to be referenced by other drawings (xrefs) or when creating isometric dimensions in 3D isometric views. To prevent the dimensions in one layout viewport from being displayed in other layout viewports, create a dimensioning layer for each layout viewport that is frozen in all other layout viewports.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. To set the dimension scale for model space dimensions in layouts 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Fit tab, under Scale for Dimension Features, select Scale Dimension to Layout (Paper space). 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager.
DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Create Dimensions You can create all of the standard types of dimensions. Create Linear Dimensions You can create linear dimensions with horizontal, vertical, and aligned dimension lines. These linear dimensions can also be stacked, or they can be created end to end.
As you create linear dimensions, you can modify the content of the text, the angle of the text, or the angle of the dimension line. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions You can create dimensions using only the horizontal or vertical components of the locations or objects that you specify.
■ To edit the text, enter m (multiline text). In the In-place Text Editor, revise the text. Click OK. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value. ■ To rotate the text, enter a (Angle). Then enter the text angle. 4 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension.
To create an aligned dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Aligned. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension, or specify the first and second extension line origins. 3 Before specifying the dimension line location, you can edit the text or change the text angle. Editing within or overwriting the brackets (<>) changes or removes the dimension value calculated by the program. Adding text before or after the brackets appends text before or after the dimension value.
You must create a linear, aligned, or angular dimension before you create baseline or continued dimensions. You create baseline dimensions incrementally from the most recently created dimension in the current session. Both baseline and continued dimensions are measured from the previous extension line unless you specify another point as the point of origin. TIP Hover over a dimension line endpoint grip to quickly access the Baseline or Continued commands from the grip menu.
To create a continued linear dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue. The program uses the origin of the second extension line of the existing dimension as the first extension line origin. 2 Use object snaps to specify additional extension line origins. 3 Press Enter twice to end the command. Quick Reference Commands DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension.
To create a rotated dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear. 2 Press Enter to select the object to dimension or specify the first and second extension line origins. 3 To rotate the dimension line, enter r (Rotated). Then enter the dimension line angle. 4 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMLINEAR Creates a linear dimension.
New dimensions are not affected when you make an existing dimension oblique. To make extension lines oblique 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Oblique.. 2 Select the dimension. 3 Enter a value for the angle of obliqueness, or specify two points. Quick Reference Commands DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. Create Radial Dimensions Radial dimensions measure the radii and diameters of arcs and circles with optional centerlines or a center mark.
There are two types of radial dimensions: ■ DIMRADIUS measures the radius of an arc or circle, and displays the dimension text with the letter R in front of it. ■ DIMDIAMETER measures the diameter of an arc or circle, and displays the dimension text with the diameter symbol in front of it.
a gap between the arc and arc extension line is made. The size of the gap drawn is controlled with the DIMEXO system variable. Control Centerlines and Center Marks Depending on your dimension style settings, center marks and lines generate automatically for diameter and radius dimensions. They are created only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. You can create centerlines and center marks directly with the DIMCENTER command.
Create Jogged Radius Dimensions With the DIMJOGGED command, you can create jogged radius dimensions, also called “foreshortened radius dimensions,” when the center of an arc or circle is located off the layout and cannot be displayed in its true location. The origin point of the dimension can be specified at a more convenient location called the center location override.
■ Changing the locations of the features with the Properties palette ■ Using STRETCH NOTE Jogged radius dimensions can be viewed but not edited in versions previous to AutoCAD 2006. Also, if you make dramatic changes to the associated geometry, you may get unpredictable results for the jogged radius dimension. See also: ■ Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines on page 1077 To create a diameter dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Diameter. 2 Select the arc or circle to dimension.
4 Specify the leader line location. To create a jogged radius dimension 1 Click Dimension menu ➤ Jogged. 2 Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment. 3 Specify a point for the dimension origin (the center location override). 4 Specify a point for the dimension line angle and the dimension text location. 5 Specify another point for the location of the dimension jog. To create centerlines automatically with radial dimensions 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Center Mark. 7 Select an arc or a circle. To change the display arc extension line for radial or diametric dimensions 1 Select the radial or diametric dimension for which you want to suppress the arc extension line. 2 Right-click in the drawing. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, Lines & Arrows category, click Ext Line. 4 Click the arrow next to Ext Line, and select On or Off from the list.
System Variables DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. DIMCEN Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands. DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. DIMJOGANG Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension.
DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. Create Angular Dimensions Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines or three points. To measure the angle between two radii of a circle, you select the circle and specify the angle endpoints. With other objects, you select the objects and then specify the dimension location. You can also dimension an angle by specifying the angle vertex and endpoints.
The location that you specify for the dimension line arc determines the quadrant of the dimensioned angle. Dimension to a Quadrant Angular dimensions can measure a specific quadrant that is formed when dimensioning the angle between of the endpoints of a line or arc, center point of a circle, or two vertices. As an angular dimension is being created, there are four possible angles that can be measured. By specifying a quadrant it allows you to ensure that the correct angle is dimensioned.
4 Specify the dimension line arc location. Quick Reference Commands DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. System Variables DIMADEC Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions. DIMAUNIT Sets the units format for angular dimensions.
Ordinate dimensions consist of an X or Y value with a leader line. X-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance of a feature from the datum along the X axis. Y-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance along the Y axis. Locate the Datum The location and orientation of the current UCS determines the ordinate values. Before creating ordinate dimensions, you typically set the UCS origin to coincide with the datum.
After creating an ordinate dimension, you can easily relocate the dimension leader and text using grip editing. The dimension text is always aligned with the ordinate leader line. To create ordinate dimensions 1 Click View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Origin. 2 At the Specify New Origin Point prompt, specify an origin point. The origin point specified is used to define the value assigned to the ordinate dimension. Typically, the origin point is defined on the model.
UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. Create Arc Length Dimensions Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment. Typical uses of arc length dimensions include measuring the travel distance around a cam or indicating the length of a cable. To differentiate them from linear or angular dimensions, arc length dimensions display an arc symbol by default.
3 Specify the dimension line location. Quick Reference Commands DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMARCSYM Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. Modify Existing Dimensions You can modify all components of the existing dimension objects in a drawing either individually or by using dimension styles.
At times you might want to modify a dimension to simply improve readability. You can make sure that the extension or dimension lines do not obscure any objects; you can reposition dimension text; and you can adjust the placement of linear dimensions so they are evenly spaced. The easiest way to modify dimensions individually is to use the multi-functional dimension grips. Modify Dimension Geometry You can modify dimensions with the editing commands and with grip editing.
Modify Non-associative Dimensions For non-associative dimensions, when you edit dimensioned objects, you must include the relevant dimension definition points in the selection set, or the dimension is not updated. Definition points determine the dimension location. For example, to stretch a dimension, you must include the appropriate definition points in the selection set. You can easily include them by turning on grips and selecting the object so that the grips are highlighted.
NOTE Definition points are drawn on a special layer named DEFPOINTS, which is not plotted. Use Dimension Line Grips Hover over the grip on the endpoint of a dimension line to quickly access the following functionality: ■ Stretch. Stretches the extension lines to move the dimension line farther away or closer to the object being dimensioned. Use command line prompts to specify a different base point or copy the dimension line. This is the default grip behavior. ■ Continue dimension.
DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects. EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects. STRETCH Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. System Variables DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded.
geometric object. Association points determine the attachment of extension lines to locations on geometric objects. NOTE When you create or modify associative dimensions, it is important to locate their association points carefully so that if you make a future design change, the geometric objects that you change will also change the dimensions associated with them.
3 Do one of the following: ■ Specify the new location of the extension-line origin point. ■ Enter s and select a geometric object to associate with the dimension. ■ Press Enter to skip to the next extension-line origin point. ■ Press Esc to end the command but keep any associations you made up to that point. 4 Repeat the previous step as needed. To disassociate a dimension 1 At the Command prompt, enter DIMDISASSOCIATE.
Modify Dimension Text Once you've created a dimension, you can change the location and orientation of the existing dimension text or replace it with new text. Once you've created a dimension, you can rotate the existing text or replace it with new text. You can move the text to a new location or back to its home position, which is the position defined by the current dimension style. In the following illustration, the home position is above and centered on the dimension line.
Use Dimension Text Grips Hover over a dimension text grip to quickly access the following functionality: ■ Stretch. This is the default grip behavior: ■ If the text is positioned on the dimension line, Stretch moves the dimension line farther away or closer to the object being dimensioned. Use command line prompts to specify a different base point or copy the dimension line.
To return dimension text to its home position 1 Select the dimension text you want to return to its home position. 2 Hover over the text grip and click Rest Text Position on the grip menu. To replace existing dimension text with new text 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit. 2 Select the dimension text you want to edit. 3 In the In-Place Text Editor, enter the new dimension text. Click OK. To move text to the left side of the dimension line 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Left Justify.
2 In the Dimension Style Manager, select the style you want to change. Click Modify. 3 In the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Lines tab, under Extension Lines, enter the new value for Offset from Origin. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Close to exit the Dimension Style Manager. Quick Reference Commands DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines.
DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. DIMTIH Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate. DIMTMOVE Sets dimension text movement rules. DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. DIMTVP Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text. MTEXTED Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
Once you add a jog to a linear dimension, you can position it by using grips. To reposition the jog, select the dimension and then select the grip. Move the grip to another point along the dimension line. You can also adjust the height of the jog symbol on a linear dimension on the Properties palette under Lines & Arrows. To add a jog to a linear dimension 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Select a linear dimension. 3 Specify a point on the dimension line to place the jog.
To remove a jog 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line. 2 Enter r (Remove) and press Enter. 3 Select the linear dimension to remove the jog from. To modify the height of a jog using the Properties palette 1 With no command active, select the linear dimension with the jog whose height you want to change. 2 Right-click over the drawing window. Click Properties. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Lines & Arrows. 4 Select Jog Height Factor, and enter a new height for the jog.
DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.
under Misc. The values include the properties that are used to control the look of the frame, and the text for both the label and rate values. To create an inspection dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect. 2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the dimension you want to make an inspection dimension. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
To remove an inspection dimension 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect. 2 In the Inspection Dimension dialog box, click Select Dimensions. The Inspection Dimension dialog box closes. You are prompted to select dimensions. 3 Select the dimension you want to remove the inspection dimension from. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. 4 Click Remove Inspection. 5 Click OK.
You can add dimension breaks to the following dimension and leader objects: ■ Linear dimensions, including aligned and rotated ■ Angular dimensions, including 2- and 3-point ■ Radial dimensions, including radius, diameter, and jogged ■ Arc length dimensions ■ Ordinate dimensions ■ Multileaders that use straight-line leaders The following dimension and leader objects do not support dimension breaks: ■ Multileaders that use spline leaders ■ Leaders created with the LEADER command The following
Dimension Break Exceptions Condition Description mask option. If the intersecting point of an object and the dimension are at the arrowhead or dimension text, the break will not be displayed until the intersecting object, or dimension or multileader are moved. No break on transspatial dimensions Automatic breaks are not supported for objects and dimensions or multileaders that are in different spaces.
Automatic Dimension Breaks To create dimension breaks automatically, you select a dimension or multileader, and then use the Auto option of the DIMBREAK command. Automatic dimension breaks are updated any time the dimension or multileader, or intersecting objects are modified. Dimension Break Gap Size You control the size of dimension breaks on the New/Modify Dimension Style dialog box, Symbols and Arrows tab.
To create a single dimension break based on an intersecting object 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Select an object that intersects the dimension or multileader. Press Enter. To create a manual dimension break 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Select a dimension or multileader. 3 Enter m (Manual) and press Enter. 4 Specify the first point on the dimension, extension, or leader line for the dimension break.
To remove all dimension breaks from multiple dimensions or multileaders 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. 2 Enter m (Multiple), and press Enter. 3 Select the dimensions or multileaders from which to remove the dimension breaks, and press Enter. 4 Enter r (Remove), and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands DIMBREAK Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles.
be linear or angular, of the same type (rotated or aligned), parallel or concentric to one another, and on the extension lines of each other. You can also align linear and angular dimensions by using a spacing value of 0. The following illustration shows parallel linear dimensions that are not equally spaced and then those that are equally spaced after using the DIMSPACE command. To equally space parallel linear and angular dimensions automatically 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space.
To align parallel linear and angular dimensions 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space. 2 Select the dimension that you want to use as the base dimension when equally spacing dimensions. 3 Select the next dimension to align. 4 Continue to select dimensions and then press Enter. 5 Enter 0 and press Enter. Quick Reference Commands DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension.
System Variables DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style. If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update the dimensions associated with that dimension style. When you create a dimension, the current dimension style is associated with that dimension.
Alternate ■ On the Styles toolbar, click the arrow in the Dimension Styles control and select a dimension style. Quick Reference Commands DIMOVERRIDE Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions. DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines.
if you choose Override in the Dimension Style Manager, and change the color of extension lines on the Override Current Style dialog box, Lines tab, the current dimension style remains unchanged. However, the new value for color is stored in the DIMCLRE system variable. The next dimension you create will have extension lines in the new color. You can save the dimension style overrides as a new dimension style.
3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, make changes to the dimension style by clicking the appropriate tab. 4 Click OK to return to the Dimension Style Manager. The dimension style overrides are listed below the style they modify in the dimension style name list. 5 Click Close. To apply dimension style overrides 1 Click Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, click Override. 3 In the Override Current Style dialog box, enter the style overrides. Click OK.
Add Geometric Tolerances You can add geometric tolerances that show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. Overview of Geometric Tolerances Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. You add geometric tolerances in feature control frames. These frames contain all the tolerance information for a single dimension.
You can also create annotative on page 1518 tolerances. For more information about creating and working with an annotative tolerances, see Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances on page 875. See also: ■ Scale Annotations on page 860 ■ Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances on page 875 To create geometric tolerances 1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Tolerance. 2 In the Geometric Tolerance dialog box, click the first square under Sym and select a symbol to insert.
3 Specify the second point of the leader. 4 Press Enter twice to display the Annotation options. 5 Enter t (Tolerance), and create a feature control frame. The feature control frame is attached to the endpoint of the leader. Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Material Conditions Material conditions apply to features that can vary in size.
Quick Reference Commands LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Datum Reference Frames The tolerance values in the feature control frame are followed by up to three optional datum reference letters and their modifying symbols. A datum is a theoretically exact point, axis, or plane from which you make measurements and verify dimensions.
TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Projected Tolerance Zones Projected tolerances are used to make the tolerance more specific. Projected tolerances are specified in addition to positional tolerances to make the tolerance more specific. For example, projected tolerances control the perpendicularity tolerance zone of an embedded part. The symbol for projected tolerance ( ) is preceded by a height value, which specifies the minimum projected tolerance zone.
tolerance to each feature within the pattern. The individual feature tolerance is more restrictive than the pattern tolerance. In the following illustration, the point where datums A and B intersect is called the datum axis, the point from which the position of the pattern is calculated. A composite tolerance could specify both the diameter of the pattern of holes and the diameter of each individual hole, as in the following illustration.
1160
Plot and Publish Drawings 1161
1162
Specify Settings for Plotting and Publishing 29 Before you plot or publish a drawing, you must specify the settings that determine the output. To save time, you can store these settings with the drawing as a named page setup. Save Plot Settings as Named Page Setups If you want to plot the same layout more than one way, or if you want to specify the same output options for several layouts, use named page setups.
In addition, the page setup also includes many other settings and options such as ■ The orientation of the plot, portrait or landscape ■ The plot scale ■ Whether lineweights should be plotted ■ The shading style By default, the first time you access a layout, it becomes initialized, and a default page setup is assigned to it. Default page setups are assigned names such as *model*, *layout1*, *layout2*, and so on.
3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, modify the required settings. Click OK. 6 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. To apply a layout's named page setup to another layout 1 Click the layout tab to which you want to apply another layout's page setup settings. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
Reuse Named Page Setups You can save plot device and other page setup settings as named page setups that can be modified and imported into other drawings. Named page setups are saved in the current drawing file and can be imported into other drawing files and applied to other layouts. If you want to plot the same layout more than one way, or if you want to specify the same output options for several layouts, use named page setups.
2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, under Page Setups, select a named page setup from the list. NOTE A page setup that is not named is shown in the Page Setup Manager with an asterisk on either side of its layout name. An unnamed page setup does not have the same functionality as a named page setup. For example, if you set an unnamed page setup as the current page setup for another layout, the values are applied to the layout.
To import named page setups from another drawing 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 2 In the Page Setup Manager, click Import. 3 In the Select Page Setup From File dialog box, select a drawing file from which you want to import one or more named page setups. Click Import. 4 In the Import Page Setups dialog box, select one or more page setups to import. Click OK.
3 Click Close. To rename a page setup 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 2 In the Page Setup Manager, under Page Setups, right-click the named page setup you want to rename. Click Rename. NOTE A page setup that is not named is shown in the Page Setup Manager with an asterisk on either side of its layout name. An unnamed page setup does not have the same functionality as a named page setup.
Select a Printer or Plotter for a Layout To print a layout, select a printing or plotting device in the Page Setup dialog box. You can also view details about the name and location of the device, and change the device's configuration. The printer or plotter you select in the Page Setup dialog box determines the printable area of the layout. This printable area is indicated by the dashed line in the layout.
5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, click Properties. 6 In the Plotter Configuration Editor, change the required settings. Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup dialog box, click OK. 8 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout.
See also: ■ “Control PC3 File Device and Document Settings” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide To set the paper size for a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to set the paper size. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Paper Size, select a paper size from the list. Click OK. 6 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close.
5 Under Custom Paper Sizes, click Add. 6 In the Custom Paper Size wizard, Begin page, select Start from Scratch. Click Next. 7 On the Media Bounds page, in the Units list, select either Inches or Millimeters for paper size. When a nondimensional raster image, such as BMP or TIFF, is plotted, the size of the plot is specified in pixels, not inches or millimeters. 8 In the Width and Length lists, specify the paper width and length. Click Next.
4 Select Custom Paper Sizes. 5 Under Custom Paper Sizes, click Add. 6 In the Custom Paper Size wizard, Begin page, select Use Existing. 7 In the list of existing standard paper sizes, select a paper size on which to base the custom paper size you are creating. 8 Follow the instructions in To add a custom paper size from scratch to continue through the Custom Paper Size wizard. The new paper size is a user-defined size, not a standard size. 9 Click Finish to exit the Custom Paper Size wizard.
4 Click Custom Paper Sizes. 5 Under Custom Paper Sizes, select a paper size from the list. 6 Click Delete. To modify a standard paper size 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plotter Manager. 2 In the Plotter Manager, double-click the Plotter Configuration (PC3) file you want to edit. 3 In the Plotter Configuration Editor, Device and Document Settings tab, double-click User-Defined Paper Sizes & Calibration to display the calibration and paper size settings. 4 Select Modify Standard Paper Sizes.
Determine the Drawing Orientation of a Layout You can specify the orientation of the drawing on the paper using the Landscape and Portrait settings. Landscape orients the drawing on the paper so that the long edge of the paper is horizontal, and Portrait orients the paper so that the short edge is horizontal. Changing the orientation creates the effect of rotating the paper underneath the drawing..
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Set the Plot Area of a Layout You can specify the plot area to determine what will be included in the plot. When you prepare to plot from model space or a layout, you can specify the plot area to determine what will be included in the plot. When you create a new layout, the default Plot Area option is Layout.
5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Area, select one of the following options: ■ Layout. Prints all objects within the printable area of the paper. This option is only available from a layout tab. ■ Limits. Prints or plots the current grid limits. This option is only available from the Model tab. ■ Extents. Plots all objects in the drawing. ■ Display. Plots all objects displayed in the drawing area. ■ View. Prints or plots a saved view. Select a named view from the list provided. ■ Window.
You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y Offset boxes. However, this may result in the plot area being clipped. If you choose to plot an area other than the entire layout, you can also center the plot on the sheet of paper. To adjust the plot offset of a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to adjust the plot offset. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. System Variables PLOTOFFSET Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. Set the Plot Scale for a Layout When you plot a drawing layout, you can either specify a precise scale for the layout or fit the image to the paper. Normally, you plot a layout at a 1:1 scale. To specify a different scale for the layout, set the plot scale for the layout in the Page Setup or the Plot dialog box.
The default scale when plotting a layout is 1:1. To set a custom plot scale, enter values in the Inches or Millimeters box and the Units box. The type of unit is determined by the paper size, but you can change it in the list box. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. To set the Fit to Paper option when plotting 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to set the plot scale to Fit to Paper. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager.
SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Set the Lineweight Scale for a Layout You can scale lineweights proportionately in a layout with the plot scale. Typically, lineweights specify the line width of plotted objects and are plotted with the line width size regardless of the plot scale. Most often, you use the default plot scale of 1:1 when plotting a layout.
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Select a Plot Style Table for a Layout A plot style table is a collection of plot styles assigned to a layout or model space. A plot style is an object property, similar to linetype and color. Therefore, it can be assigned to an object or a layer and they control an object's plotted properties.
7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. To create a new plot style table for a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to create a new plot style table. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, Under Plot Style Table, select New from the list.
To display plot styles in a layout 1 Click the layout tab for which you want to display plot styles. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manager. 3 In the Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, select the page setup that you want to modify. 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Style Table, select the Display Plot Styles option. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close.
Shaded Viewport Plotting Options With shaded plotting options, you can choose whether to plot a set of shaded objects using the As Displayed, Wireframe, or Hidden option. Shaded viewport plotting options apply to all objects in viewports and model space. If you use the Shaded option, plot style tables included in the page setup do not affect plots. NOTE Shaded viewport plotting requires a raster-capable device. Most modern plotters and printers are raster-capable devices.
5 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Options, select the required settings. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Page Setup Manager, click Close. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Other Ways to Create Page Setups There are several other ways to create named page setups.
You can edit the information entered in the wizard later. Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Manger. click Modify. In the Page Setup Manager, To create a layout using the wizard 1 Click Insert menu ➤ Layout ➤ Layout Wizard. 2 On each page of the Create Layout wizard, select the appropriate settings for the new layout. When finished, the new layout will be the current layout tab. Quick Reference Commands LAYOUTWIZARD Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings.
■ Plot Offset In addition, a PC2 file contains any resolution information that has been modified by a plotter calibration. Pen assignment information can also be imported and saved in a plot style table using the Add Plot Style Table wizard. To import plotting device and pen settings information, you can use the Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard to choose a PCP or PC2 file whose settings you want to import. You can also choose to modify any of the imported settings using the Page Setup dialog box.
1190
Print or Plot Drawings 30 Once you have completed a drawing, you can use a number of methods to output the drawing. You can plot the drawing on paper or create a file for use with another application. In either case, you select the plot settings. Overview of Plotting Understanding terms and concepts that relate to plotting makes your first plotting experience in the program easier. Am I Printing or Plotting? The terms printing and plotting can be used interchangeably for CAD output.
Layouts A layout represents a drawing sheet, and typically includes ■ A drawing border and title block ■ One or more layout viewports that display views of model space ■ General notes, labels, and possibly dimensions ■ Tables and schedules Usually a drawing file contains only one layout, but you can create as many layouts as you need. The first time you display a layout, it is initialized and a default page setup is assigned to it.
one type to the other. You can also change the type of plot style table a drawing uses once it has been set. For color-dependent plot style tables, an object's color determines how it is plotted. These plot style table files have .ctb extensions. You cannot assign color-dependent plot styles directly to objects. Instead, to control how an object is plotted, you change its color. For example, all objects assigned the color red in a drawing are plotted the same way.
4 (Optional) Under Number of Copies, enter the number of copies to plot. 5 Under Plot Area, specify the portion of your drawing to plot. 6 Under Plot Scale, select a scale from the Scale box. 7 For more options, click the More Options button. 8 (Optional) Under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), select a plot style table from the Name box. 9 (Optional) Under Shaded Viewport Options and Plot Options, select any appropriate settings. NOTE Plot stamping happens at plot time and is not saved with the drawing.
To cancel part or all of a plot job that is processing in the background ■ In the status tray, right-click the plotter icon. Click Cancel Sheet or Cancel Entire Job. To view details about jobs you have plotted 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ View Details. ■ In the status tray, click the plotter icon. 2 In the Plot and Publish Details dialog box, view details about plotted jobs. Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. VIEWPLOTDETAILS Displays information about completed plot and publish jobs. System Variables BACKGROUNDPLOT Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and publishing. Use a Page Setup to Specify Plot Settings You can use a page setup to save and reuse settings for your plot jobs.
5 Click Plot. To save plot settings as a new named page setup 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, change the required settings. 3 Under Page Setups, click Add. 4 In the Add Page Setup dialog box, enter a name for the new named page setup. Click OK. To save plot settings to the layout 1 Select a layout tab. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 3 In the Plot dialog box, under Page Setups, select a page setup or specify settings individually. 4 Click Apply to Layout.
Select a Printer or Plotter Before plotting a drawing, you must select a printer or plotter. The device you select affects the printable area of the drawing. After selecting a printing or plotting device, you also can easily plot a drawing using the default settings in the Plot dialog box. See also: ■ Specify Settings for Plotting and Publishing on page 1163 ■ “Use Plotters and Printers” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide To select a printer or plotter 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot.
Specify the Area to Plot When plotting a drawing, you must specify the area of the drawing to plot. The Plot dialog box provides the following options under Plot Area. ■ Layout or Limits. When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. When plotting the Model tab, plots the entire drawing area defined by the grid limits.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Set Paper Size When plotting a drawing, select the paper size that you want to use. If you plot from a layout, you may have already specified a paper size in the Page Setup dialog box. However, if you plot from the model space, you need to specify a paper size when you plot. In the Plot dialog box, select the paper size that you want to use.
3 Under Paper Size, select a paper size from the list. The paper sizes that are listed depend on the plotter you selected. To set the default paper size for a layout 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup. 2 In Page Setup Manager, Page Setups area, the layout for which you want to set the paper size should be selected. If not, select the layout. Click Modify. 3 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Paper Size, select a paper size from the list. Click OK.
NOTE The available paper sizes depend on the printer or plotter. Some plotter manufacturers may control paper size differently in the Plotter Configuration Editor. To create or edit a custom paper size for a non-system printer 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Manage Plotters. 2 In the Plotter Manager, double-click the PC3 file whose configuration you want to change.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration. System Variables PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file. Position the Drawing on the Paper There are several ways to position a drawing on the paper.
Modify Standard Paper Sizes (Printable Area) option on the Device and Document Settings tab in the Plotter Configuration Editor. NOTE The Modify Standard Paper Sizes option is not a margins feature. Specify where your drawing is plotted on the page in the Plot Offset area in the Plot dialog box. Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
Quick Reference Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration. Set Drawing Orientation The drawing orientation determines whether the position of the plotted drawing is landscape (the longer edge of the drawing is horizontal) or portrait (the longer edge of the drawing is vertical).
Control How Objects Are Plotted You can control how objects are plotted by setting the plot scale, by using plot styles and plot style tables, and by setting an object's layer properties. Set Plot Scale When you specify a scale to output your drawing, you can choose from a list of real-world scales, enter your own scale, or select Fit to Paper to scale the drawing to fit onto the selected paper size. Usually, you draw objects at their actual size.
Scale the Drawing to Fit the Page When you review drafts, a precise scale is not always important. You can use the Fit to Paper option to plot the view at the largest possible size that fits the paper. The height or width of the drawing is fit to the corresponding height or width of the paper. When you select the Fit to Paper option, the text boxes change to reflect the ratio of plotted units to drawing units.
If you enter a custom scale, Custom is automatically selected in the Scale box, even if the scale you enter is the same as a standard scale in the list. A custom scale is the ratio between the plotted units and drawing units. For example, 1:12 and 2:24 are plotted at the same scale. 3 Click OK to plot the drawing. To scale a drawing to fit the page 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Plot Scale, select the Fit to Paper option.
Set Options for Plotted Objects In the Plot, and the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can choose from options that affect how objects are plotted. ■ Shaded Viewport Plotting. Specifies shaded plotting options: As Displayed, Wireframe, or Hidden. The effect of this setting is reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout. ■ Plot Object Lineweights. Specifies that lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted. ■ Plot Transparency.
2 In the Plot dialog box, Shaded Viewport Options area, Shade Plot drop-down list, select an option. To set shaded plotting options from a layout tab 1 Select a layout viewport. 2 Double-click the viewport border to display the Properties palette. 3 On the Properties palette, click Shade Plot. 4 In the Shade Plot drop-down list, select an option. To remove hidden lines when plotting from the Model tab 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot.
To plot lineweights 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Plot Options, select Plot Object Lineweights. You can change this option only if the Plot with Plot Styles option is cleared. 3 Click OK to plot the drawing. To plot transparency Plot Transparency applies to wireframe and hidden plots only. Other visual styles, such as Realistic, Conceptual, or Shaded will always plot with transparency. 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot.
To turn off plot styles 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Plot Options, clear the Plot with Plot Styles option. 3 Click OK to plot the drawing. To change the order in which objects are plotted 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Plot Options, select Plot Paperspace Last. Clear the Plot Paperspace Last option to plot paper space first. 3 Click OK to plot the drawing.
PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTSTAMP Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects You can control many aspects of how an object is plotted by using plot styles. Overview of Plot Styles A plot style is an object property, similar to linetype and color. A plot style can be assigned to an object or assigned to a layer.
Groups of plot styles are saved in either of two types of plot style tables: color-dependent (CTB) or named (STB). Color-dependent plot style tables set style based on the color of the object. Named plot styles can be assigned to an object independent of color. Quick Reference Commands CONVERTCTB Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB). CONVERTPSTYLES Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles.
PSTYLEPOLICY Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. Choose a Type of Plot Style Table A plot style table is a collection of plot styles assigned to a layout or the Model tab. There are two types of plot style tables: color-dependent plot style tables and named plot style tables.
Quick Reference Commands OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Switch the Type of Plot Style Table You can change which type of plot style table, color-dependent or named, is used in a drawing. You can use CONVERTPSTYLES to change which type of plot style table, color-dependent or named, is used in a drawing.
NOTE If the Display Plot Styles option was already selected in the dialog box, you must enter regen at the command prompt to display the plot style settings. To convert a drawing to use color-dependent plot styles 1 At the command prompt, enter convertpstyles. 2 Click OK. A message is displayed to confirm that the drawing was converted. To convert a color-dependent plot style table into a named plot style table 1 At the command prompt, enter convertctb.
Assign Plot Style Tables to Layouts By assigning different plot style tables to each layout in your drawing, you can control how objects in the layout are plotted. The plot style table affects both model space and paper space objects. To plot the drawing without applying plot style properties, select None from the list of plot style tables. If you use named plot style tables, each object in the drawing either is assigned a plot style directly or inherits a plot style from its layer.
To preview the effects of a plot style table in a layout 1 Click the layout tab in which you want to preview the effects of the plot style table. 2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup. 3 In Page Setup Manager, click Modify. 4 In the Page Setup dialog box, under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), select the Display Plot Styles option. 5 Click OK. 6 In Page Setup Manager, click Close. The effects of the plot style table are previewed in the layout.
new plot style table on an existing plot style table, or start from scratch. If you use an existing plot style table, the new plot style table uses the same type of table as the original. Click Next. 4 On the Pick Plot Style Table page, select Color-Dependent Plot Style Table or Named Plot Style Table. 5 If you are importing pen settings from a PCP, PC2, or CFG file, or if you are basing the new plot style table on an existing plot style table, specify the file on the Browse File Name page.
4 Click Save & Close. To edit plot styles in a plot style table 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table you want to change. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, under Plot Styles, select a plot style and edit the settings. 4 Click Save & Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables.
Use Predefined Color-Dependent Plot Style Tables Several color-dependent plot style tables are installed in the Plot Styles folder, also known as the Plot Style Manager. Table Description acadlt.ctb Default plot style table fillPatterns.ctb Sets first 9 colors to use first 9 fill patterns, all others to use object's fill grayscale.ctb Converts all colors to grayscale when plotted monochrome.ctb Plots all colors as black None Applies no plot style table screening 100%.
Use Named Plot Style Tables You can only create, delete, and apply plot styles in a named plot style table. You can define as many or as few plot styles as you need in a drawing. Use Named Plot Styles Named plot styles are assigned to objects and layers in the same way that linetype and color are assigned to objects. An object whose plot style is set to BYLAYER inherits the plot style assigned to its layer.
4 To select a plot style from a different plot style table, select Other. In the Select Plot Style dialog box, you can attach a different plot style table to the current layout and select a plot style from that plot style table. 5 To edit the current plot style table, click Editor. 6 Click OK when finished. Any changes made in the Properties palette are immediate. If you change the plot style table attached to the current layout, both model space and paper space objects are affected.
The plot styles displayed are those available in the current plot style table. 3 To select a plot style from a different plot style table, under Active Plot Style Table, select a plot style table. The list of plot styles changes to those in the selected plot style table. 4 To edit the selected plot style table, click Editor. Change settings as necessary. Click Save & Close. 5 Click OK. The plot style that you made current is used for any new objects created in the drawing.
NOTE You cannot delete or edit the NORMAL plot style. Also, you cannot add, delete, copy, or rename plot styles in a named plot style table if a color mapping table has been attached to the plot style table. A color mapping table associates every plot style with an ACI color. See also: ■ Change Plot Style Settings on page 1230 To create a named plot style 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the STB file to which you want to add a plot style.
NOTE You cannot copy plot styles if the plot style table uses a color mapping table. You cannot copy plot styles in a color-dependent plot style table. To change a plot style's description 1 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table that contains the plot style whose description you want to change. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style whose description you want to change. 4 Under Description, change the plot style's description.
2 Double-click the STB file you want to edit. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style that you want to delete from the list of plot styles. 4 Click Delete Style. 5 Click Save & Close. NOTE You cannot delete or edit the NORMAL plot style. You cannot delete plot styles if the plot style table uses a color mapping table. You cannot delete plot styles from a color-dependent plot style table.
Quick Reference Commands PLOTSTYLE Controls the named plot styles that are attached to the current layout and can be assigned to objects. STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Delete Color Mapping Tables If you delete the mapping table, the plot style table becomes an ordinary plot style table and is no longer useful for applying plot styles to old drawings.
4 Read the warning. Click Yes to delete the color mapping table, or click No to keep it. 5 Click Save & Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Change Plot Style Settings You can modify plot styles using the Plot Style Table Editor. Changes you make to a plot style affect the objects to which that plot style is assigned.
4 Under Properties, click the arrow next to the property you want to change. Select an option from the list. 5 Edit other properties or plot styles as needed. 6 Click Save & Close. Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Set Color, Screening, Grayscale, and Dither in Plot Style Tables You can use a plot style to assign color, screening, grayscale, and dither properties.
plotter. If the plotter does not support dithering, the dithering setting is ignored. The most common reason for turning off dithering is to avoid false line typing from dithering of thin vectors and to make dim colors more visible. When you turn off dithering, colors are mapped to the nearest color, which limits the range of colors used for plotting. Dithering is available whether you use the object's color or assign a plot style color. NOTE Dithering disables merge control.
To use screening 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table that you want to modify. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style you want to change. 4 In the Screening box, enter an intensity value between 1 and 100. 5 When finished, click Save & Close. You can edit properties for multiple plot styles while in the Plot Style Table Editor.
4 Select On or Off. 5 When finished, click Save & Close. You can edit properties for multiple plot styles while in the Plot Style Table Editor. Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Assign Pen Numbers and Virtual Pens in Plot Style Tables The pen assignments used by the plotter differ depending on whether you use a pen plotter or another kind of printer, such as a laser printer.
Assign Pen Settings to Plotters Without Pens Many plotters that do not use pens can simulate the performance of a pen plotter by using virtual pens. For many devices, you can control the virtual pens in the device with software or, by configuring them from the plotter's control panel, with hardware.
To specify a virtual pen number 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Double-click the plot style table that you want to modify. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style you want to change and click Virtual Pen. 4 Under Virtual Pen #, enter a number between 1 and 255 or enter 0 or Automatic to have the program assign the ACI color of the object you are plotting to the virtual pen. 5 When finished, click Save & Close.
Assign Linetypes When you select the Linetype field in the Plot Style Table Editor, a list with a sample and a description of each linetype are displayed. The default setting for plot style linetype is Use Object Linetype. Whether you choose to assign a linetype as a property of the object or as a plot style, you can set the Adaptive Adjustment option. This option adjusts the scale of the linetype to complete the linetype pattern.
3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Form View tab, select the plot style you want to change. 4 Click the Linetype arrow and select a linetype from the list. To specify that the object's linetype should be used, select Use Object Linetype. 5 To adjust the linetype scale to show the complete pattern, on the Form View tab, select On in the Adaptive box. 6 Click Save & Close. You can edit properties for multiple plot styles while in the Plot Style Table Editor.
Assign Line End Style The program includes the following line end style options: ■ Butt ■ Square ■ Round ■ Diamond The default setting for Line End Style is Use Object End Style, which is rounded. Assign a line end style in a plot style to override the object's default line end style at plot time. NOTE SHX text plots best with the Round End and Round Join styles.
Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Assign Plotted Fill Styles You can assign a variety of fill style options when plotting wide polylines, donuts, objects hatched with a solid fill, and solids.
To assign a fill style 1 Click Format ➤ Plot Style. 2 Right-click a CTB or STB file. Click Open. 3 In the Plot Style Table Editor, Table View tab, click the Fill Style field for the plot style you want to change. 4 Select a fill style from the drop-down list. Quick Reference Commands STYLESMANAGER Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Preview a Plot It is good practice to generate a preview of the plotted drawing before sending the drawing to the printer or plotter.
3 Right-click to display a shortcut menu with the following options: Plot, Pan, Zoom, Zoom Window, or Zoom Original (to zoom to the original preview magnification). 4 Press ESC to exit the preview and return to the Plot dialog box. 5 If necessary, make additional adjustments to the plot settings and preview the plotted drawing again. 6 Once the settings are correct, click OK to plot the drawing. Quick Reference Commands PAN Moves the view planar to the screen.
You can use the program to create DWF files. A DWF file is a 2D vector file that you can use to publish your drawing on the World Wide Web or an intranet network. Each DWF file can contain one or more drawing sheets. ® DWF files can be opened, viewed, and plotted by anyone using Autodesk Design Review. With the DWF file viewer, you can also view DWF files in ® Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later.
You can use the DWFx ePlot (XPS Compatible) plot configuration file to plot to a DWFx file. Each DWFx file can contain one or more drawing sheets. DWFx files can be opened, viewed, and plotted by anyone using the following applications: ■ With Internet Explorer, you can view and print the 2D geometry of DWFx files. ■ With Autodesk Design Review, you can view the complete DWFx file; zoom and pan within the DWF file; turn layers on and off; and mark up the drawings.
Plot to DXB File Formats DXB (drawing interchange binary) file formats are supported using the DXB non-system file driver. This is commonly used to “flatten” 3D drawings to 2D. The output is compatible with the ADI DXB driver delivered with earlier releases. The DXB driver shares these limitations of the ADI driver: ■ The driver produces 16-bit integer DXB files containing only vectors. ■ DXB output is monochrome; all vectors are color 7. ■ Raster images and embedded OLE objects are not supported.
Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Plot to Raster File Formats The nonsystem raster driver supports several raster file formats, including Windows BMP, CALS, TIFF, PNG, TGA, PCX, and JPEG. The raster driver is most commonly used to plot to files for desktop publishing. All but one of the formats supported by this driver produce “dimensionless” raster files that have size in pixels but do not have size in inches or millimeters.
2 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 3 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, in the Name box, select a raster format configuration from the list. 4 Select plot settings for the raster file as needed. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the raster file. 7 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands BMPOUT Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format. JPGOUT Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format.
Plot Adobe PDF Files Using the DWG to PDF driver, you can create Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) files from drawings. The Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) is a standard for electronic information exchange. PDF files can be easily distributed for viewing and printing in the Adobe Reader available from the Adobe web site without cost. Using PDF files, you can share drawings with virtually anyone. Like DWF6 files, PDF files are generated in a vector-based format, for maintaining precision.
4 Click OK. 5 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the PDF file. 6 Click Save. To plot a PDF file in landscape orientation 1 Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot. 2 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, in the Name box, select the DWG to PDF.pc3 configuration from the Name list. 3 Under Paper Size, select a paper size that has the longer dimension listed first. For example, ANSI A (11.00 x 8.50 Inches). 4 Click OK.
Use the custom Properties dialog box in the Plotter Configuration Editor to customize the output. To display this dialog box, on the Device and Document Settings tab, in the tree view, select Custom Properties. Then under Access Custom Dialog, click the Custom Properties button. The PostScript driver supports three types of PostScript. ■ Level 1: Use for most plotters. ■ Level 1.5: Use for plotters that support color images.
3 In the Plot dialog box, under Printer/Plotter, in the Name box, select a PostScript format configuration. 4 Select plot settings for the PostScript file as needed. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the PostScript file. 7 Click Save. Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
5 Click OK. 6 In the Browse for Plot File dialog box, select a location and enter a file name for the plot file. 7 Click Save. To create a batch file for plot spooling Plot files are meant to be used with spooling software or to be given to a service bureau for output. A simple batch file can be used to output PLT files. 1 Open a text editor and save a batch file to a folder where you save your PLT files. 2 Name the batch file something like MySpooler.bat.
Quick Reference Commands PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
1254
Publish Drawings 31 Publishing provides a streamlined alternative to plotting multiple drawings. You can easily publish a set of drawings as a single, electronic, multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. Publishing an electronic drawing set as a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file saves time and increases productivity by providing accurate, compressed representations of drawings in a file that's easy to distribute and view. Using Autodesk Design Review, you can view and plot DWF and DWFx files.
■ A single multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file ■ Multiple single-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF files Publishing for Autodesk Design Review Publishing an electronic drawing set as a DWF or DWFx file saves time and increases productivity by providing accurate, compressed representations of drawings in a file that is easy to distribute and view. This also maintains the integrity of your original drawings.
To cancel part or all of a published job that is processing in the background ■ Right-click the plotter icon in the status tray. Click Cancel Sheet or Cancel Entire Job. To view details about jobs you have published 1 Do one of the following: ■ Click Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ View Details. ■ In the status tray, click the plotter icon. 2 In the Plot and Publish Details dialog box, view details about published jobs.
BACKGROUNDPLOT Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and publishing. Create and Modify a Drawing Set for Publishing You can assemble a collection of drawing sheets to publish all at once to single or multiple DWF, DWFx, or PDF files. You can customize your drawing set for a specific user; and you can add, remove, reorder, copy, and rename sheets in a drawing set as a project evolves.
NOTE To include all layouts when you add sheets to a drawing set, ensure the Include Layouts When Adding Sheets option is selected in the shortcut menu. ■ Include model layouts. If you include an uninitialized (the paper size is not defined in the page setup or is set to 0 x 0) model layout, it will be marked as Uninitialized in the Status column on the sheet list.
at the end of the original sheet name. For example, if you create one copy of a sheet called Plumbing, the copied sheet is called Plumbing-Copy(1). Each time you copy the same sheet, the n is incremented by 1. By creating copies of a sheet, you can have different page setups and other settings for the same sheet. 3 When your list of drawing sheets is assembled and configured the way you want for your drawing set, click the Save List button.
5 In the Page Setup list, select a page setup to apply to the drawing sheets. NOTE Change the page setup for each layout depending on your desired output. Model space page setups can only be applied to model space sheets; paper space page setups can only be applied to paper space sheets. To publish multiple layouts in a drawing 1 In the drawing area, click a layout tab that you want to publish. 2 Press and hold the Ctrl key, and then click the other layout tabs that you want to publish.
2 Right click and select Publish Selected Layouts. 3 In the Publish dialog box, select Plotter, PDF, DWF, or DWFx from the Publish To: drop-down list and click Publish. Quick Reference PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
You can use the default plotter driver as installed, or you can modify configuration settings such as color depth, display resolution, file compression, font handling, and other options. Once you modify the original plotter configuration file, all future plotting and publishing of DWF, DWFx, or PDF files will be affected. IMPORTANT Create a copy of the original plotter configuration file before you make any changes.
dialog box from the page setup drop-down list under Page Setups in the sheet list. NOTE To include the model space when you add sheets to a drawing set, select — Include Model When Adding Sheets option in the shortcut menu or Model Tab in the Include when adding sheets group. ■ Remove sheets. To remove sheets from the list, select one or more sheets, and then click the Remove Sheets button. To remove all sheets, right-click. Click Remove All. ■ Reorder sheets.
NOTE Ensure that you have saved your drawing before you click the Save Sheet List button. 4 In the Save List As dialog box, in the File Name box, enter a name for the list. Click Save. The drawing set list is saved as a drawing set descriptions (DSD) file. 5 In the Publish dialog box, under Publish To, click DWF Format, and select DWF File or DWFx File. Click Publish. 6 In the Specify DWF File dialog box, enter a file name. The Files of Type is DWF or DWFx based on the selected DWF format.
3 Right-click the selection. Click Publish DWF. The Specify DWF File dialog box appears in a temporary AutoCAD session. 4 Specify Files of type as either *.dwfx or *.dwf. 5 Type a file name, or select a file. AutoCAD publishes the drawing file with the following options: DWF type = Multi-sheet Password = Disabled Layer information = Don’t include Block information = Don’t include By default, the DWF/ DWFx/PDF file will be saved to the same location as the selected drawing file/s.
Block information = Don’t include 6 AutoCAD launches your default mail application with the newly created DWF or DWFx as an attachment. Quick Reference PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. PUBLISHHATCH Controls whether hatch patterns published to DWF or DWFx format are treated as a single object when they are opened in Autodesk Impression.
5 In the Publish To group, click to select the DWF Format. Click DWF File or DWFx File. 6 Click Publish to start the process. The animated plotter icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the publish job is in progress. 7 If you have background publishing enabled, you can view information about the processed publish job. Right-click the plotter icon on the right side of the status bar. Click View Plot and Publish Details.
Recipients of drawing sets in DWF or DWFx format do not have to own or know the program. From anywhere in the world, they can view and print high-quality layouts using Autodesk Design Review. Autodesk Design Review runs as a stand-alone application or embedded in any application that supports ActiveX controls, such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer. For product information and a download link for the Autodesk Design Review, refer to the Products page on the Autodesk website.
The DWFx file is displayed in either of the following applications (if installed): Autodesk Design Review (by default), or in Internet Explorer 7 (2D DWFx files only). Quick Reference PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. Set Publish Options Set options for publishing, such as output file location, multi-sheet name options, password protection, and whether or not to include layer information.
3 In the Publish Options dialog box, change the desired settings. Click OK. NOTE DWF or DWFx passwords are case-sensitive. The password or phrase can consist of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, or non-ASCII characters. Keep a list of passwords and their corresponding DWF or DWFx file names in a safe place. If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be recovered. PDF files cannot be password protected.
5 In the DWF Data Options, do one of the following: ■ Under Layer Information, click to display the drop-down list, and select Include. ■ Under Block Information, click to display the drop-down list, and select Include. NOTE By default, Layer and Block Information is set to Don't Include.
The program scans the DWG file for all unique block definitions and their associated properties and attributes. ■ If this drawing does not contain the block properties you want to include in the published DWF or DWFx file, click Add. The Select Drawings dialog box is displayed. Select drawings to add to the block source drawings list. You can also add and remove drawings that contain target blocks whose properties you want to include in the published DWF or DWFx file. Click Scan for Blocks.
3 Click DWF File or DWFx File. 4 Click Publish Options. The Publish Options dialog box appears. 5 In the DWF Data Options pane, under Block Information, click to display the drop-down list, and select Include. 6 Under DWF Data Options, Block Template File, click to display the drop-down list, and select Edit. 7 In the Select Block Template dialog box, click the Block Template (BLK) file you want to edit, and then click Select.
Quick Reference AUTOPUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files automatically to a specified location. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. AUTODWFPUBLISH Controls whether DWF (Design Web Format) files are created automatically when you save or close drawing (DWG) files. AUTOMATICPUB Controls whether electronic files (DWF/PDF) are created automatically when you save or close drawing (DWG) files.
1276
Share Data Between Files 1277
1278
Reference Other Drawing Files 32 Attached xrefs are linked to, but not actually inserted in, another drawing. Therefore, with xrefs you can build drawings without significantly increasing the drawing file size. See also: ■ Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) By using referenced drawings, you can ■ Coordinate your work with the work of others by referencing other drawings in your drawing to keep up with the changes being made by other designers.
See also: ■ DesignCenter on page 79 Quick Reference Commands ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Closes the External References palette. REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition.
XCLIP Crops the display of a selected external reference or block reference to a specified boundary. XREF Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command. System Variables ERSTATE Indicates whether the External References palette is open or closed. INDEXCTL Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files. INSBASE Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) You can insert any drawing file as an external reference or xref in the current drawing. When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced drawing are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. A drawing file can be attached as an xref to multiple drawings at the same time. Conversely, multiple drawings can be attached as referenced drawings to a single drawing.
When one or more xrefs are not found, an exclamation point is added to the Xref icon. If you click the Xref icon, the External References palette is displayed. Highlight External References in a Drawing To find an external reference in a complex drawing, select an item in the External References palette to highlight all visible instances in the drawing. Conversely, select an external reference in the drawing to highlight its name in the External References palette.
Control the Properties of Referenced Layers You can control the visibility, color, linetype, and other properties of an xref's layers and make these changes temporary or permanent. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 0, these changes apply only to the current drawing session. They are discarded when you end the drawing session, or when you reload or detach the xref. You can also control the fade display of the DWG xref. The XDWGFADECTL system variable defines the fade percentage for all DWG xrefs.
Attachment includes all nested xrefs. 5 Click OK. To attach or overlay an xref using DesignCenter 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter. 2 In the content area or in the Search dialog box, locate the DWG reference you want to attach or overlay. 3 Right-click. Drag the DWG reference into the open drawing. 4 Release the right-pointing device button. Click Attach as Xref. 5 In the External Reference dialog box, under Reference Type, select Attachment or Overlay.
The DWG xref fades as you drag the slider. Quick Reference Commands ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Closes the External References palette. TRAYSETTINGS Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray. XATTACH Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref). XREF Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command.
TRAYNOTIFY Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray. TRAYTIMEOUT Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are displayed. VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. XDWGFADECTL Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. XLOADPATH Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files.
You can also overlay an xref on your drawing. Unlike an attached xref, an overlaid xref is not included when the drawing is itself attached or overlaid as an xref to another drawing. Overlaid xrefs are designed for data sharing in a network environment. By overlaying an xref, you can see how your drawing relates to the drawings of other groups without changing your drawing by attaching an xref. In the following illustration, several people are working on drawings referenced by master.dwg.
Relative Saved Paths and Nested Xrefs The saved path for an xref can be a full path, a relative (partially specified) path, or no path. For a nested xref, a relative path always references the location of its immediate host and not necessarily the currently open drawing. See also: ■ To overlay an xref 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach. 2 In the Select Reference File dialog box, select the file you want to attach and then click Open.
You can choose from three types of folder path information to save with an attached reference: a full path, a relative path, and no path. Specify a Full (Absolute) Path A full path is a fully specified hierarchy of folders that locates the file reference. A full path includes a local hard drive letter, a URL to a website, or a network server drive letter. Specify a Relative Path Relative paths are partially specified folder paths that assume the current drive letter or the folder of the host drawing.
■ ® ® Start In folder specified in the Microsoft Windows application shortcut Specifying the No Path option is useful when moving a set of drawings to a different folder hierarchy or to an unknown folder hierarchy. Know when a Referenced Drawing has been Relocated If the drawing you are working on contains an xref that has been moved to a different folder, a message is displayed at the site of the xref when you load the drawing. The message indicates that the xref cannot be loaded using the old path.
Erasing xrefs does not remove, for example, layer definitions associated with those xrefs. Using the Detach option removes the xrefs and all associated information. To detach an xref 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ External References . 2 In the External Reference palette, select a DWG reference. 3 Right-click the selected DWG reference and select Detach from the shortcut menu. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette.
Whenever you modify and save an externally referenced drawing in a network environment, other people can access your changes immediately by reloading the xrefs in their open drawings. Receive Notification of Changed Xrefs When you attach xrefs to a drawing, the program periodically checks whether the referenced files have changed since the last time the xrefs were loaded or reloaded. The XREFNOTIFY system variable controls xref notification.
Update Xrefs with Demand Loading Turned On If demand loading is turned on when you load or reload an xref ■ With the XLOADCTL system variable set to 1, the referenced drawing is kept open and locked. No one else can modify the referenced drawing. ■ With XLOADCTL set to 2, a temporary copy of the most recently saved version of the referenced file is opened and locked. Others can open and modify the referenced drawing.
TRAYICONS Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar. TRAYNOTIFY Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray. TRAYTIMEOUT Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are displayed. XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy.
option. For more information, see Resolve Name Conflicts in External References on page 1313. Binding xrefs to a drawing is also an easy way to send a drawing to reviewers. Rather than sending a master drawing plus each of the drawings it references, you can use the Bind option to merge the xrefs into the master drawing. NOTE You cannot bind xrefs that contain proxy objects. For more information, see Work with Custom and Proxy Objects on page 1434.
System Variables XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. Clip External References and Blocks You can specify clipping boundaries to display a limited portion of an external reference drawing or block reference. You can clip external references such as DGN, DWF, IMAGE, PDF underlays, or block references.
the entire external reference or block is visible, provided that the objects are on layers that are turned on and thawed. Clipping results can be turned on or off using the clipping commands. This controls whether the clipped area is hidden or displayed. Control the visibility of clipping boundaries. You can control the display of the clipping boundary with a clipping frame.
Resize Clipping Boundaries If you want to change the shape or size of a clipping boundary for external references and block references, you can use grips to edit the vertices just as you edit any object with grips. In case of rectangular grip editing, you can maintain the closed four-sided rectangle or square shape of the rectangular clipping boundary because two vertices of the same side of the rectangular clipping boundary are edited together.
5 (Optional) Use the Invert Clip option to change the area to be hidden from outside to inside the clipping boundary. The xref is clipped based on the area that you specified. NOTE You can use DGNCLIP, DWFCLIP, PDFCLIP, or IMAGECLIP to clip their corresponding xref attachments: DGNATTACH, DWFATTACH, PDFATTACH, or IMAGEATTACH. To invert a clipped reference 1 Select the external reference or block reference to be clipped. 2 Set XCLIPFRAME, DWFFRAME, DGNFRAME, IMAGEFRAME, or PDFFRAME to 1.
System Variables DGNFRAME Determines whether DGN underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. DWFFRAME Determines whether DWF or DWFx underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. FRAMESELECTION Controls whether the frame of an image, underlay, or clipped xref can be selected. IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. XCLIPFRAME Determines whether xref clipping boundaries are visible or plotted in the current drawing.
See also: ■ Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or Attributes on page 1310 ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks on page 1303 To edit an xref in a separate window 1 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ External References Palette. 2 In the External References palette, select the xref that you want to edit. 3 Right-click, and click Open. To edit a nested xref in a separate window 1 Select an xref that contains nested xrefs.
Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks You can modify external references and redefine block definitions from within the current drawing by using in-place reference editing. Both blocks and xrefs are considered references. By editing the reference in place, you can modify the reference within the visual context of your current drawing. Often, a drawing contains one or more xrefs as well as multiple block references.
NOTE Objects outside the working set are not faded during in-place reference editing unless VSCURRENT is set to a value of 2D wireframe. Use the Refedit Ribbon Contextual Tab If you select nested objects to edit when the ribbon is active, the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab is displayed. Using the buttons on the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab, you can add objects to or remove objects from the working set, and you can discard or save back changes to the reference.
■ Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or Attributes on page 1310 To edit an xref or block reference in place 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Edit Reference. 2 From within the current drawing, select the reference that you would like to edit. If the object you select in the reference belongs to any nested references, all the references available for selection are displayed in the Reference Edit dialog box.
REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing. REFSET Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. SHADEMODE Controls the display of solid object shading in the current viewport. System Variables BINDTYPE Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs or editing xrefs in place. REFEDITNAME Displays the name of the reference being edited.
An object that is removed from the working set is added to the host drawing and removed from the reference when changes are saved back. An object that is added to the working set is removed from the host drawing, and is restored to the reference when the changes are saved back. Use the External Reference Tab on the Ribbon If you select a reference to edit in-place when the ribbon is active, the Edit Reference ribbon contextual tab is displayed.
Quick Reference Commands REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing. REFSET Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. System Variables XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing.
you make to objects in the current drawing (not in the xref or block) are not discarded. If you delete any object that is not in the working set, the object is not restored even if you choose to discard changes. You can return the drawing to its original state by using UNDO. If you make unwanted changes to an xref and use REFCLOSE to save back the changes, you must use UNDO to undo any changes made during the reference editing session.
Quick Reference Commands REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. XOPEN Opens a selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window. Edit Referenced Drawings and Blocks with Nesting, OLE, or Attributes If the reference you select for editing has attached xrefs or block definitions, the reference and its nested references are displayed and available for selection in the Reference Edit dialog box.
subsequent insertions of the block; the attributes in existing block instances are not affected. See also: ■ Edit a Referenced Drawing in a Separate Window on page 1301 ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks on page 1303 Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing.
In the drawing, at each insertion of the missing xref, the program displays text that displays the folder path of the missing xref. You can use the XREF Path option to update or correct the path. Along with error messages being displayed at the Command prompt, a task dialog box might be displayed that allows you to ignore all missing xrefs or update their folder locations. You can use the External References palette to update the locations of the unresolved references.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. Resolve Circular External References If a referenced drawing contains a sequence of nested references that refers back to itself, an error message is displayed. A drawing that contains a sequence of nested references that refers back to itself is considered a circular reference.
A typical xref definition includes objects, such as lines or arcs. It also includes xref-dependent definitions of blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles. When you attach an xref, the program differentiates the names of these xref-dependent named objects from those in the current drawing by preceding their names with the name of the referenced drawing and a vertical bar character ( | ).
2 In the Xbind dialog box, click the plus (+) sign next to an external reference. The five types of named object definitions (Block, Dimstyle, Layer, Linetype, and Textstyle) are listed. 3 Click the plus (+) sign of one of the definition types. The names of the definition table entries are listed. 4 Select a named object definition. Click Add. The named object definition is listed under Definitions to Bind. 5 If necessary, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6 Click OK.
This log is maintained only if the XREFCTL system variable is set to 1. The default setting is 0. The log file is an ordinary ASCII text file with the same name as the current drawing and the file extension .xlg. If you load a drawing with the file name sample.dwg, for example, the program searches for a log file named sample.xlg in the current folder. If the file does not exist, a new file is created with that name.
Example: A Sample Log File Entry Showing Nested Xrefs In the following example, the xref ENTRY_DR contains two nested xrefs: HARDWARE and PANELS. The xrefs HARDWARE and PANELS also each contain two xrefs.
The log file lists the definition (symbol) table affected and the name of the definition added, along with a status message. ============================== Drawing: test Date/Time: 12/18/99 14:06:34 Operation: Attach Xref ============================= Attach Xref STAIR: \ACAD\DWGS\STAIR.dwg Searching in ACAD search path Update block symbol table: Appending symbol: STAIR|BOLT Appending symbol: STAIR|BOLT-HALF ... block update complete.
System Variables XREFCTL Controls whether external reference log (XLG) files are created. Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings There are several features that can improve performance when dealing with large referenced drawings. Overview of Demand Loading The program uses demand loading and saving drawings with internal indexes to increase performance with large referenced drawings that have been clipped, or that have many objects on frozen layers.
Unload Xrefs in Large Drawings When a referenced drawing (xref) is unloaded from the current drawing, the drawing opens much faster and uses less memory. The xref definition is unloaded from the drawing file, but the internal pointer to the referenced drawing remains. The xref is not displayed, and nongraphical object information does not appear in the drawing. However, you can restore all the information by reloading the xref.
To realize the maximum benefits of demand loading, you need to save the referenced drawings with layer and spatial indexes. The performance benefits of demand loading are most noticeable when you do one of the following: ■ Clip the xref with the program to display a small fraction of it. A spatial index is saved in the externally referenced drawing. ■ Freeze several layers of the xref. The externally referenced drawing is saved with a layer index.
3 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. System Variables INDEXCTL Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files. XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes To receive the maximum benefit of demand loading, it is recommended that you save any drawings that are used as xrefs with layer and spatial indexes.
To save a drawing with layer and spatial indexes 1 At the Command prompt, enter INDEXCTL. 2 Enter 1, 2, or 3, depending on how you want to save the drawing. INDEXCTL set to 1 creates a layer index. INDEXCTL set to 2 creates a spatial index. INDEXCTL set to 3 creates both layer and spatial indexes. INDEXCTL set to 0 (the default) does not create an index. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette.
sessions until you indicate a different path. If no value for XLOADPATH is specified, the temporary file copies are placed in the standard folder for temporary files. If you find that referencing drawings over a network is slow, it is recommended that you set XLOADPATH to reference a local folder, and set XLOADCTL to 2 so that the externally referenced files are demand loaded from your local machine.
Link and Embed Data (OLE) 33 Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a Windows feature that combines data from different applications into one document. For example, you can create an Adobe PageMaker layout that contains an AutoCAD LT drawing, or you can create an AutoCAD LT drawing that contains all or part of a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Overview of Object Linking and Embedding Object linking and embedding is a way to use information from one application in another application.
Link Objects A linked object is a reference to information in another document. Link objects when you want to use the same information in more than one document. Then, if you change the original information, you need to update only the links in order to update the document containing the OLE objects. You can also set links to be updated automatically. When you link a drawing, you need to maintain access to the source application and the linked document.
You can also adjust OLE plot quality in the Plotter Configuration Editor. The Graphics option displays a Raster Graphics dialog box with a slider that controls OLE plot quality. NOTE Nested OLE objects may cause problems. For example, an Excel spreadsheet embedded in a Word document may fail to plot. Also, an OLE object that is not in the current view plane is not plotted, but the frame is plotted based on the setting of the OLEFRAME system variable.
OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. System Variables OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects. Import OLE Objects You can import information into a drawing from other applications that support OLE. Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Use one of the following methods to insert information from another application as an OLE object: ■ Copy or cut information from an existing file and paste it into the drawing.
Quick Reference Commands INSERTOBJ Inserts a linked or embedded object. OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. OLESCALE Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. System Variables MSOLESCALE Controls the size of an OLE object with text that is pasted into model space.
Reconnect Links Because a link references the location of the linked document, you need to reconnect the link if the document changes location or is renamed. Break Links Breaking a link does not remove the inserted information from the drawing. Instead, it removes the connection to the linked document. You can break a link when you no longer need to update the information. To link objects in a drawing 1 Start the source application and open a document.
To update links manually 1 Click Edit menu ➤ OLE Links. 2 In the Links dialog box, select the links you want to update. 3 Click Update Now. 4 Click Close. NOTE If you want to select the links from the drawing area rather than from a list in the Links dialog box, select the OLE objects before step 1. To reconnect a link to an OLE object 1 In the drawing, select the OLE object whose link you want to change. 2 Click Edit menu ➤ OLE Links. 3 In the Links dialog box, click Change Source.
OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. OLESCALE Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. System Variables OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects.
To embed an OLE object in a drawing 1 Open the document in the source application. 2 Copy the information you want to embed to the Clipboard. 3 Open the drawing. 4 Click Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste. 5 Click OK. To create an object in another application and embed it in a drawing 1 Open the drawing. 2 Click Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object. 3 In the Insert Object dialog box, under Object Type, select Create New. 4 Under Object Type, select an application. Click OK.
3 Click OK to apply changes. To scale text in an OLE object according to its font 1 Select an OLE object. 2 Right-click. Click Text Size. 3 In the OLE Text Size dialog box, select a font. The OLE Text Font list contains all of the fonts that appear in the selected OLE object. 4 Select a point size. The OLE Point Size list contains all of the sizes for the selected font. 5 In Text Height, enter a value in drawing units. This value is the height for text in the selected font and point size.
PASTESPEC Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data. System Variables OLEHIDE Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects. OLEQUALITY Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. OLESTARTUP Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. Export OLE Objects from Drawings You can link or embed a view of a drawing in another application that supports OLE.
To embed objects in another document 1 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 2 In the drawing area, select the objects that you want to embed and then press ENTER. The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. 3 Start the destination application, and open a new or existing document. 4 Paste the Clipboard contents into the document, following the destination application's instructions for embedding the Clipboard contents.
INSERTOBJ Inserts a linked or embedded object. OLELINKS Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. System Variables WMFBKGND Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. WMFFOREGND Controls the assignment of the foreground color when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. Edit OLE Objects in Drawings You can edit a linked or embedded OLE object in a drawing by double-clicking the object to open the source application.
Edit OLE Objects When AutoCAD LT Is the Source Application The document that contains a linked drawing stores the drawing's file location. You can edit a linked drawing either from the destination application or in the source program. The program must be loaded or accessible on the system along with the document you are editing. An AutoCAD LT drawing that is embedded in a document can be edited only from within the destination application. Double-click the OLE object to start the program.
How the link is updated depends on the destination application. Some applications support automatic updating of links; others require manual updating of links. To edit embedded objects 1 Open the document that contains the embedded AutoCAD LT objects (for example, a Microsoft Word file). 2 Double-click the embedded objects to start the program and display the objects. 3 Modify the objects as necessary. 4 To save changes to the embedded objects, click File menu ➤ Update.
■ 2 Frame is displayed but is not plotted. The frame must be displayed in order for grips to be visible. Quick Reference Commands COPYCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing. ERASE Removes objects from a drawing. PASTECLIP Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing. U Reverses the most recent operation.
Work with Data in Other Formats 34 You can work with many different types of files, including files created with other applications and files created in earlier releases of the program. You can also specify search paths for drawing and support files. Convert Drawing File Formats You can convert AutoCAD-based drawing files to other AutoCAD drawing formats. Choose the file format, conversion options, and the type of output you want.
overwriting the originals or packaged together in a file folder, compressed in a self-extracting EXE file, or compressed in a ZIP file in a different location. Specify the Output of the Conversion The conversion setup controls the output for the converted drawing files.
3 In the Select File dialog box, navigate to the folder of the drawing file that you want to convert. 4 Click the drawing file name and click Open. 5 (Recommended) In the DWG Convert dialog box, click Conversion Setups. In the Conversion Setups dialog box, create a new conversion setup, modify an existing conversion setup, or select a previously created conversion setup. Click Close. 6 In the DWG Convert dialog box, click Convert.
Associativity in Dimensions Associative dimensions created in AutoCAD 2002-based products or later generally maintain their associativity when converted to a previous release and then reopened in the current release of an AutoCAD-based product.
Layer Property Overrides If you convert an AutoCAD 2008-based drawing containing layer property overrides, the overrides are not visible in previous releases. The property override settings are retained when the drawing is saved in a previous release, and are visible again when the drawing is opened in an AutoCAD 2008-based product.
Multiline text with new formatting that is edited and saved in previous releases loses the new formatting when reopened in AutoCAD 2008-based products. Tables and Data Extraction Editing AutoCAD 2008 tables in previous releases removes AutoCAD 2008 table formatting. Also, AutoCAD 2008 table cells with long block and text strings may extend outside of cell borders when opened in previous releases.
There is a conversion process required for drawings with lighting prior to AutoCAD 2007. AutoCAD-based products include a system variable, 3DCONVERSIONMODE, to automatically convert drawings with lighting from previous versions to the AutoCAD 2007 and AutoCAD 2008 lighting format. Other lighting fidelity issues include ■ Lights in blocks. Lights in blocks created in AutoCAD 2008 do not always display in AutoCAD 2007. ■ Texture illumination.
Converting a drawing to AutoCAD 2000 format is subject to the following limitations: ■ File size can increase. ■ Encryption and digital signatures are not preserved. Converting a drawing in AutoCAD Release 14/AutoCAD LT 98/AutoCAD LT 97 format is subject to the following limitations: ■ Hyperlinks are converted to AutoCAD Release 14 attached URLs. ■ Database links and freestanding labels are converted to AutoCAD Release 14 links and displayable attributes.
If you convert drawings using the same settings each time, then you can simply modify the Standard conversion setup to your requirements, and you do not need to save additional ones. To specify an existing conversion setup 1 Click Application button ➤ Save As ➤ DWG Convert. 2 In the DWG Convert dialog box, under Select a Conversion Setup, click the conversion setup that you want to use.
Save Lists of Files for Batch Conversions For repetitive conversions, the drawing files that you select for conversion can be saved to a list, called a batch control list. Batch control lists are saved as BCL files that can also be opened and viewed in a text editor such as Notepad. Once you add several drawing files to the current list, you can remove any of them from the list by clearing its check box.
Quick Reference DWGCONVERT Converts drawing format version for selected drawing files. Import Other File Formats You can import files, other than DWG files, that were created with other applications into your drawings. Convert DXF Files to DWG Format A DXF (drawing interchange format) file is a type of drawing interchange files used to transfer data between various applications. A DXF (drawing interchange format) file is either an ASCII or a binary representation of a drawing file.
Import MicroStation DGN Files You can import MicroStation® DGN drawing files into DWG files. The import process translates basic DGN data into the corresponding DWG file data. There are several translation options to determine how certain data such as text elements and external references are handled.
■ Ensure that you create uniformly scaled blocks in MicroStation. Entities with DGN line styles in non-uniformly scaled blocks display differently in MicroStation. ■ All line style modifier settings of an element in the DGN file are lost when exporting them from AutoCAD back to MicroStation. ■ The closed property of a DGN polygon or closed polyline is automatically set to No when importing a DGN file into AutoCAD. This is done to ensure that linetypes display properly.
master units in the Import DGN Settings dialog box. This matches the meters in the DGN file to the meters in the DWG file. Import Custom Line Style Definitions If a DGN file does not contain linetype definitions and these definitions do not exist in any .rsc files in the support path, then all linetypes in the DGN file are displayed as a continuous linetype in AutoCAD. To ensure that custom linetypes are displayed, copy the corresponding .
The DGN Mapping Setups dialog box is displayed when you click the Mapping Setups button in the Import DGN Settings and Export DGN Settings dialog boxes. You can also enter DGNMAPPING at the Command prompt. To import a MicroStation DGN drawing 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import. 2 In the Import File dialog box, in the Files of type box, select MicroStation DGN (*.dgn). 3 Find and select the DGN file you want to import, or enter the name of the DGN file at File Name. 4 Click Open.
NOTE The Rename button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. 2 Click Rename. 3 Enter new mapping setup name. 4 Click anywhere outside the text box. You can also right-click the mapping setup name from the mapping setup list, click Rename and then continue with step 3. To modify a DGN mapping setup 1 In the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box , select the mapping setup you want to modify. NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. 2 Click Modify.
To add properties from a DGN file 1 In the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box , click Modify. NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. 2 In the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box, click Add Properties from DGN File button. 3 The Add Properties from DGN File dialog box is displayed. Select a DGN file and click Open. The unique properties of the file are added to the bottom of the DGN column for each tab (Level, Linestyle, Lineweight, and Color).
DGNMAPPING Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.ini file where DGN mapping setups are stored. System Variables DGNIMPORTMAX Sets the maximum number of elements that are translated when importing a DGN file. DGNIMPORTMODE Controls the default behavior of the DGNIMPORT command. DGNMAPPINGPATH Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.ini file where DGN mapping setups are stored.
3 Specify an insertion point for the WMF file. 4 To specify the scaling, use one of the following methods: ■ To specify an imaginary box whose dimensions correspond to the scale factor, enter c (Corner) at the Command prompt. Specify the opposite corner above and to the right of the insertion point to avoid inserting a mirror image. ■ To specify 3D scale factors, enter xyz. ■ To set the X and Y scale settings, enter a scale at the Command prompt. You can set different horizontal and vertical scales.
WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN. Attach Files as Underlays You can display DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN files as underlays in your drawing. Overview of Underlays You can underlay and snap to 2D geometry stored in DWF, DWFx, DGN, and PDF files. Underlays are similar to attached raster images in that they provide visual content but also support object snapping and clipping. Unlike external references, underlays cannot be bound to the drawing.
file. If the file contains 3D solids, surfaces, or other 3D objects, a warning is displayed. This content is not supported in this file. Use the Ribbon Contextual Tab to Work with Underlays If you select an underlay when the ribbon is active, the DWF Underlay Ribbon Contextual Tab, PDF Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab, or the DGN Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab displays depending on the type of underlay selected. The contextual tab contains options for adjusting, clipping and displaying underlays.
Attach PDF Files There are a few things specific to PDF files that you do not have to consider with DWF or DGN files. PDF files with more than one page are attached one page at a time (as opposed to one sheet at a time for DWF files or one model at a time for DGN files). Also, hypertext links from PDF files are converted to straight text and digital Signatures are not supported. Drag Underlay Files You can drag underlays directly into the drawing.
Password Protected Underlay Files If a file you want to attach as an underlay is password protected, you are prompted to enter the password after you have selected the file. You cannot attach the file until you have correctly entered the password. After an underlay is attached to a DWG file, you are prompted for the underlay file’s password each time you open the DWG file.
4 In the Attach PDF Underlay dialog box, select one page, or use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple pages. 5 Use one of the following methods to specify the insertion point, scale, or rotation of the underlay file: ■ Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to attach the underlay at the location, scale, or angle you want. ■ Clear Specify On-Screen and enter values for Insertion Point, Scale, and Rotation at the command prompt. 6 Click OK.
DWFATTACH Insert a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay into the current drawing. EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. NCOPY Copies objects that are contained in an xref, block, or DGN underlay. PDFATTACH Insert a PDF file as an underlay into the current drawing. XATTACH Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref).
MicroStation to AutoCAD Terms MicroStation Term AutoCAD Term Notes ByLevel setting BYLAYER setting Setting that controls whether color, line weight, and line style are set for each level (layer). Cell libraries N/A No reference in AutoCAD terminology. Cells: shared and normal Blocks In AutoCAD, all blocks behave like shared cells. There is no reference in AutoCAD terminology to a normal cell. Design model Model space DWG workmode and AutoCAD only allow for a single model.
MicroStation to AutoCAD Terms MicroStation Term AutoCAD Term Notes Key-in Command Line Place for entering commands/variables manually. Levels Layers Organizational structure used to control the appearance of objects in a drawing. Line styles Linetypes Setting used to control the appearance of the line work in a drawing. Merge into Master Bind XREF Inserting an external reference into the current drawing. Message Center Text Window Place for viewing text messages from program feedback.
MicroStation to AutoCAD Terms MicroStation Term AutoCAD Term Notes For DGNEXPORT, the chosen seed file determines what master and sub units are used for translation to DGN as well as resolution and accuracy values. Sheet model Drawing layout (paper space) Commonly used to control the output of a drawing for plotting. Smart Line Polyline Multi-segmented lines. Tags Attributes Element used to store textual information in a cell (block).
DGNEXPORT Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. DGNIMPORT Imports the data from a DGN file into a new DWG file or the current DWG file, depending on the DGNIMPORTMODE system variable. DGNLAYERS Controls the display of layers in a DGN underlay. DGNMAPPING Allows users to create and edit user-defined DGN mapping setups. System Variables DGNFRAME Determines whether DGN underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing.
NOTE Erasing an individual instance of an underlay is not the same as detaching it. An underlay must be detached to remove the link from your drawing to the file. To detach an underlay 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference ➤ . 2 In the External References palette, in the File References pane, select the underlay you want to detach. 3 Right-click on the underlay and click Detach. The underlay is no longer linked to the drawing file. All instances of the underlay are removed from the drawing.
3 Right-click, and click Unload or Reload. When unloaded, the DGN underlay is still linked to the drawing file, but it is not displayed in the drawing. Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. Work with Underlays You can control the display of layers, use object snaps, and adjust display settings with attached underlays. Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay You can turn layers on and off in an underlay.
Use the DWFLAYERS, PDFLAYERS, DGNLAYERS, or ULAYERS command or right-click a selected underlay and click Layers on the shortcut menu. NOTE If the Underlay Layers dialog box is empty, there are no layers in the underlay. You can use the Properties palette to determine whether any layers are turned off in an underlay. ■ If no layers are turned off, the Layer Display Override property is set to None. ■ If at least one layer is turned off, the Layer Display Override property is set to Applied.
■ If it is a PDF underlay, click PDF Layers. ■ If it is a DGN underlay, click DGN Layers. 3 In the Underlay Layers dialog box, click the light bulb icon for the layer name that you want to turn on or off. You can use CTRL or SHIFT when you click to select several layers. 4 Click Apply to save your changes, or click OK to save and close. Quick Reference Commands DGNLAYERS Controls the display of layers in a DGN underlay. DWFLAYERS Controls the display of layers in a DWF or DWFx underlay.
Use Grips with Underlays While underlay behavior generally mimics raster image behavior, one exception is the way that grips work. In this case, the behavior more closely parallels block behavior. Normally, an underlay displays only a base grip. You can use a base grip to reposition an underlay in a drawing. If you create a clipping boundary, additional grips display for each corner of the boundary. See Clip Underlays on page 1379. The grip for the base point is the lower-left corner of the underlay.
Quick Reference Commands DWFATTACH Insert a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay into the current drawing. DGNATTACH Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing. PDFATTACH Insert a PDF file as an underlay into the current drawing. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Use Object Snaps with Underlays Use object snaps to draw or edit objects relative to a precise location.
architectural plans, the PDF is a raster image, not a vector-based image. Therefore, object snapping does not work. Also, geometry from PDF’s that were created outside of AutoCAD LT may contain nonstandard snapping points, such as circles with no center points. Use the DWFOSNAP, PDFOSNAP, DGNOSNAP, and UOSNAP system variables to turn object snapping on and off. Object snapping can also be turned on and off from a shortcut menu. Select an underlay and right-click to display the object snap menu option.
Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the Background You can modify the contrast, fade, and monochrome settings of an underlay. Also, so that the underlay is visible, you can adjust the underlay colors based on the AutoCAD background colors. Adjusting these settings does not alter the original file and does not affect other instances of the underlay in the drawing. You can change the contrast, fade, monochrome, and colors in the Properties palette when an underlay is selected.
To use the DWFADJUST command to adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DWF underlay 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust. 2 Select the DWF underlay to adjust. 3 On the Enter DWF Underlay Options menu, select one of the following: ■ Select Fade and enter a fade value. ■ Select Contrast and enter a contrast value. ■ Select Monochrome and set monochrome to Yes or No. The appearance of the DWF underlay is updated after you enter the new value and the command is completed.
3 On the Enter DGN Underlay Options menu, select one of the following: ■ Select Fade and enter a fade value. ■ Select Contrast and enter a contrast value. ■ Select Monochrome and set monochrome to Yes or No. The appearance of the PDF underlay is updated after you enter the new value and the command is completed. Quick Reference Commands DWFADJUST Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DWF or DWFx underlay.
When the clipping boundary is no longer needed, you can delete the clipped boundary from the underlay and the underlay is displayed with its original boundary. You can also invert the area to be hidden inside or outside the clipping boundary. With grips located at the midpoint on the first edge of the clipping boundary, you can invert the display of the clipped reference inside or outside the boundary. You can control the way clipping boundaries and grips display with the clipping frame system variables.
See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks on page 1297 ■ Clip Raster Images on page 1400 To clip an underlay 1 Click the bounding box of an underlay to select it. 2 Click Contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create Clipping Boundary. 3 At the command prompt, Enter s (Select Polyline), p (Polygonal), r (Rectangular), or i (Invert Clip) and then, draw the specified boundary on the underlay.
If you are drawing a polygonal boundary, you are prompted to specify consecutive vertices. To finish drawing a polygon, press Enter or right-click anywhere in the drawing area. To edit the existing boundary on a clipped underlay 1 Select a clipped underlay. 2 Click one of the corner grips and drag it to a new location. 3 Click again to set the corner grip.
PDFCLIP Crops the display of a selected PDF underlay to a specified boundary. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Hide and Show Underlay Frames You can display and plot a border around the underlay or the clipping boundary. A frame is a visual border that shows the extents of the underlay, or the clipped boundary of the underlay. When underlay frames are hidden, clipped underlays are still displayed to their specified boundary limits; only the boundary is affected.
The foreground example shows the underlay with a visible frame. To hide and show underlay frames Do the following: 1 To hide frames, click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Frame Settings drop-down ➤ Hide Frames 2 To display and plot frames, click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Frame Settings drop-down ➤ Display And Plot Frames. 3 To display frames without plot, click Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Frame Settings drop-down ➤ Display But Don’t Plot Frames.
Manage and Publish Drawings Containing Underlays You can view and manipulate underlays and change paths to underlays in the External References palette. View Underlay Information You can view file-specific information about the underlays that are attached to a drawing in the External References palette. You can also load and unload underlays and perform other operations there. In the External References palette, you can view underlay information either as a list or as a tree.
The following information is displayed in the list view: ■ Name of DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN file ■ Status (loaded, unloaded, or not found) ■ File size ■ File type ■ Date and time file was last saved ■ Name of the saved path If the program cannot find an underlay, its status is listed as Not Found. If the underlay is unreferenced, no instances are attached for the underlay. If the underlay is not loaded, its status is Unloaded.
To display a list of the underlays attached to a drawing 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference ➤ . 2 In the External References palette, click the List View button. To display underlay names and their nesting levels within xrefs and blocks 1 Click Insert tab ➤ Reference ➤ . 2 In the External References palette, click the Tree View button. To display underlay layer override status 1 Select the underlay of which you want to view the layer override status. 2 Click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties.
Change File Paths of Underlays You can change the file path to a referenced DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN file or search for an underlay when it is reported as not found. When you open a drawing with an attached DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN file, the path of the selected underlay is displayed in the External References palette under Found At in the Detail list. The displayed path is the actual path where the source file was found. The path where the source file was originally attached is displayed under Saved Path.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. System Variables DGNMAPPINGPATH Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.ini file where DGN mapping setups are stored. Publish, Save, and eTransmit Drawings Containing Underlays When you eTransmit a file, DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays are tracked and managed.
AutoCAD 2009, AutoCAD 2008 will only recognize the underlay if it is a V8 MicroStation file. eTransmit Underlay attachments are tracked and managed when you use eTransmit in the same way you track and manage raster image attachments. Quick Reference Commands DGNEXPORT Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. EXPORTDWF Creates a DWF file and allows you to set individual page setup overrides on a sheet by sheet basis.
System Variables EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT Sets the default electronic file output type: PDF, DWF, or DWFx. EXPORTMODELSPACE Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from Model space EXPORTPAGESETUP Specifies whether to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file with the current page setup. Reference Manager and Underlays With the Reference Manager, you can view DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays that are attached to a DWG file and edit the paths of the attachments.
To check underlays with the Reference Manager 1 Click Start menu (Windows) ➤ All Programs (Programs) ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD LT 2012 ➤ Reference Manager. 2 In the Reference Manager, click the Add Drawings button. 3 In the Add Drawings dialog box, select a drawing and then click Open. Attach Raster Image Files You can view and manipulate raster images and associated file paths in drawings. You can add raster images to your vector-based drawings, and then view and plot the resulting file.
document management, engineering, mapping, and geographic information systems (GIS). Images can be bitonal, 8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color. Images with 16-bit color depth are not supported. Several image file formats support images with transparent pixels. When image transparency is set to on, the program recognizes those transparent pixels and allows graphics in the drawing area to “show through” those pixels. (In bitonal images, background pixels are treated as transparent.
Supported image file formats Type Description and versions File extension JPEG2000 Wavelet-based compression standard created by the Joint Photographics Expert Group .jp2, .j2k JFIF or JPEG Joint Photographics Expert Group .jpg, .jpeg MrSID Multiresolution Seamless Image Database .sid NITF National Imagery Transmission Format .nitf NOTE NITF files containing elevation data require AutoCAD Raster Design OpenEXR Industrial Light & Magic High-Dynamic Range image .
IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. Attach, Scale, and Detach Raster Images You can add or remove references to raster images within drawing files, or you can change their relative size. Attach Raster Images You can attach a reference to a raster image file to a drawing file using a linked image path. The image file can be accessed from the Internet. Images can be referenced and placed in drawing files, but like external references (xrefs), they are not actually part of the drawing file.
what custom cabinets will look like has the manufacturer create a rendered image of the cabinets, post it to a website, and then attach the image to the drawing file as a URL; any design changes can be updated immediately. For more information, see Reference Other Drawing Files on page 1279. To attach an image 1 Click Insert tab ➤ References panel ➤ Attach. 2 In the Select Image File dialog box, select a file name from the list or enter the name of the image file in the File Name box. Click Open.
Quick Reference Commands IMAGE Displays the External References palette. IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. Scale Raster Images You can control the size of a raster image in a drawing to match the scale of the drawing. You can specify the raster image scale factor when you attach the image so that the scale of the geometry in the image matches the scale of the geometry in the drawing. The default image scale factor is 1, and the default unit for all images is “Unitless.
3 In the Image dialog box, use one of the following methods to specify insertion point, scale, or rotation: ■ Select Specify On-Screen to use the pointing device to insert the image at the location, scale, or angle you want. ■ Clear Specify On-Screen and enter values under Insertion Point, Scale, or Rotation. To view the unit of measurement for the image, click Details. 4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands IMAGE Displays the External References palette. IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. Modify Raster Images and Image Boundaries You can control the clipping boundaries and image display properties of a raster image. Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries You can control whether the clipping boundaries of a raster image are displayed or hidden in a drawing. You can hide image boundaries. Hiding the image boundary prevents the boundary from being plotted or displayed.
Quick Reference Commands IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. System Variables FRAMESELECTION Controls whether the frame of an image, underlay, or clipped xref can be selected. Clip Raster Images You can clip and display specific portions of a raster image in a drawing with a clipping boundary. With a clipping boundary, only the parts of the image that you want visible are displayed.
With IMAGEFRAME system variable, you can control the visibility of the clipping boundary. See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks on page 1297 ■ Clip Underlays on page 1379 To clip an image 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Clip ➤ Image. 2 Select the image to clip by selecting the image boundary. 3 At the Command prompt, Enter n (New Boundary). 4 Enter p (Polygonal) or r (Rectangular), and then draw the boundary on the image.
To change the boundary of a clipped image 1 Click Modify menu ➤ Clip ➤ Image. 2 Select the image to clip by selecting the image boundary. 3 Enter n (New Boundary). 4 Enter n (No) or y (Yes) to delete the old boundary. 5 Enter p (Polygonal) or r (Rectangular), and then draw the new boundary on the image. If you are drawing a polygonal boundary, you are prompted to specify consecutive vertices. To finish drawing a polygon, press Enter or right-click anywhere in the drawing area.
System Variables IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade You can change several display properties of raster images in a drawing for easier viewing or special effects. You can adjust brightness, contrast, and fade for the display of an image as well as for plotted output without affecting the original raster image file and without affecting other instances of the image in the drawing.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Modify Color and Transparency for Bitonal Raster Images Bitonal images are images that consist only of a foreground color and a background color. You can change the foreground color and turn the transparency of the background color on and off. Bitonal raster images are images consisting only of a foreground color and a background color. When you attach a bitonal image, the foreground pixels in the image inherit the current settings for color.
Quick Reference Commands PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. TRANSPARENCY Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque. Manage Raster Images You can view and manipulate raster images and change paths to image files using the External References palette. View Raster Image Information You can view file-specific information about the raster images that are attached to a drawing.
level within referenced drawings and blocks. The status, size, and other information is displayed below in the Details pane. In either view, you can display information about an image; attach or detach the image; unload or reload the image; and browse for and save a new search path. Use the List View The list view displays the images and any other external references attached to the current drawing, but it does not specify the number of instances. It is the default view.
View Image File Details In the lower panes of the External References palette, you can preview a selected image or view image file details, including ■ Image name ■ Saved path ■ Active path (where the image is found) ■ File creation date ■ File size ■ File type ■ Color ■ Color depth ■ Image size (pixel width and height, resolution and default size) View Image Information in the Text Window You can view image information at the Command prompt.
3 If the View Pane is not open, click the Preview button. The file preview is displayed. 4 To view file details, click the Details button. The file details (image size) are displayed. To preview an image that has not been attached 1 Click Insert menu ➤ Raster Image Referencemage. 2 In the Select Image File dialog box, select an image file to display a preview. If a preview of the image is not displayed, click Show Preview. 3 Click Open. 4 In the Image dialog box, click Details.
Assign Descriptive Names to Raster Images When the name of a raster image file is not sufficient to identify an image, you can add a descriptive name using the External Reference palette. Image names are not necessarily the same as image file names. When you attach an image to a drawing, the program uses the file name without the file extension as the image name. Image names are stored in a symbol table; thus you can change the image name without affecting the name of the file.
To locate the image file, the program searches the following paths and folders in the following order: ■ Path specified when the image was attached ■ Folder containing the current drawing file ■ Project search paths specified on the Files tab of the Options dialog box ■ Support search paths specified on the Files tab of the Options dialog box ■ Start In folder specified in the program shortcut If you open a drawing that contains an image that is not in the saved path location or in any of the defi
System Variables Tune Raster Image Performance You can reduce the demands on system performance when manipulating large or many small raster images. Load and Unload Raster Images You can improve performance by unloading images when you do not need them in the current drawing session. Unloaded images are not displayed or plotted; only the image boundary is displayed. Unloading an image does not alter its link.
Quick Reference Commands EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the External References palette. PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images To increase the display speed of images, you can change image display quality, hide images not currently needed, use image tiling, or suppress image selection highlighting. To increase the display speed of images, you can change image display quality from the default high quality to draft quality.
■ True Color (24 or 32 bits per pixel) You can save tiled TIFF images with most image scanning tools. The image tiles should be no smaller than 64 x 64 pixels and no larger than 512 x 512 pixels. Additional file readers that support other tiled formats, such as CALS Type II, are available from third-party developers.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. System Variables IMAGEHLT Controls whether the entire raster image or only the raster image frame is highlighted. Export Drawings to Other File Formats If you need to use the information from a drawing file in another application, you can convert it to a specific format by exporting it. Export DWF and DWFx Files Sets of drawings are the primary deliverable for most design groups.
To export multiple layouts to a DWF or DWFx file 1 Hold the Shift key down and click to select the layout tabs. 2 Right click and select Publish Selected Layouts. 3 In the Publish dialog box, select DWF or DWFx from the Publish To: drop-down list and click Publish. Quick Reference Commands DGNEXPORT Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format.
System Variables DWFFORMAT Sets the default format to DWF or DWFx for output in specific commands. EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT Sets the default electronic file output type: PDF, DWF, or DWFx. EXPORTMODELSPACE Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from Model space EXPORTPAGESETUP Specifies whether to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file with the current page setup. Export PDF Files You can export a drawing as a PDF file to facilitate sharing information with other design groups.
3 In the Publish dialog box, select PDF from the Publish To: drop-down list and click Publish. Quick Reference Commands EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. EXPORTPDF Creates a PDF filewhere you can set individual page setup overrides on a sheet-by-sheet basis. EXPORTSETTINGS Adjusts the page setup and drawing selection when exporting to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. PUBLISH Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters.
program that accepts DXF files, you can share a drawing by saving it as a DXF file. You can control floating-point precision of the DXF format up to 16 decimal places and save the drawing in either ASCII or binary format. ASCII format results in a text file that you can read and edit; binary format results in a significantly smaller file that is faster to work with. If you do not want to save the entire drawing, you can choose to export selected objects only.
The export process translates basic DWG file data into the corresponding DGN file data. There are several translation options to determine how certain data such as external references are handled, the dynamic range of the DGN file as controlled by the master and subunits specified, and whether the DGN file is to accept data with non-zero Z coordinates. Exchanging and reusing basic drawing data is very useful in collaborative projects.
these linetype definitions in the Symbology path in MicroStation, then when the DGN file is exported from AutoCAD and opened in MicroStation, the linetypes do not display correctly because of missing linetype definitions. See the DGNEXPORT Conversion Table specific details about the scope of exporting DWG objects and other data to DGN files. NOTE Do not export drawings that include V8 DGN underlays to a V7 DGN format file.
WARNING Some programs that work with DGN files do not support extended characters that the Windows operating system considers valid for file names. Thus, it is recommended that you do not use accented or Asian characters in file names when using DGNEXPORT. To export a MicroStation DGN drawing 1 Click Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export. 2 In the Export Data dialog box, in the Files of type box, select V8 DGN (*.dgn) or V7 DGN (*.dgn). 3 Specify the name of the DGN file at File Name.
3 Select a folder and enter a file name. Click Save. 4 Select the objects to be included in the exported file. Quick Reference Commands EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. WMFOUT Saves objects to a Windows metafile. System Variables WMFBKGND Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. Export Raster Files You can create a device-independent raster image of the objects in your drawing.
To create a JPEG file (JPG) 1 At the Command prompt, enter jpgout. 2 In the Create Raster File dialog box, select a folder and enter a file name. Click Save. The .jpg extension is appended to the file name. 3 Select the objects you want to save. To create a TIFF file (TIF) 1 At the Command prompt, enter tifout. 2 In the Create Raster File dialog box, select a folder and enter a file name. Click Save. The .tif extension is appended to the file name. 3 Select the objects you want to save.
PNGOUT Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format. TIFOUT Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format. Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications You can share drawing files from AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT, drawing files from previous versions, and drawing files that contain custom objects. In some cases there are limitations.
displayed on the Model tab, and more objects may be displayed in paper space viewports at different sizes than in AutoCAD LT 2008 and later releases. For a procedure to set visual fidelity for annotative objects, see To save drawings with visual fidelity for annotative objects.
■ Jogged linear dimensions ■ Inspection dimensions ■ Angular dimensions that are dimensioned using the quadrant option ■ Arc extension lines for radial and diameter dimensions Multileader Objects in Previous Releases Multileaders display as proxy objects in releases prior to AutoCAD 2008. The PROXYSHOW system variable controls the display of proxy objects in a drawing.
Mtext with new formatting that is edited and saved in previous releases loses the new formatting when re-opened in AutoCAD 2008. Tables in Previous Releases Editing AutoCAD 2008 tables in previous releases removes AutoCAD 2008 table formatting. Also, AutoCAD 2008 table cells with long block and text strings may extend outside of cell borders when opened in previous releases.
with a system language setting that differs from the system in which the drawing was last saved. NOTE Drawings that include external references (xrefs) to drawing files saved in earlier releases also have the limitations described above. To save drawings with visual fidelity for annotative objects 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, under File Save, select Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects. 3 Click OK.
Maintain Associativity in Dimensions Associative dimensions created in AutoCAD 2002 or later generally maintain their associativity when saved to a previous release and then reopened in the current release. However, if you modify dimensioned objects using a previous release to the extent that new objects are formed, the dimension associations change when the drawing is loaded into the current release.
■ Dimensions created using the DIMARC and DIMJOGGED commands may not retain their original color in Release 14/LT 98/LT 97. Saving a drawing in Release 12/LT 2 DXF format is subject to the following limitations: ■ Lightweight polylines and hatch patterns are converted to Release 12 polylines and hatch patterns. ■ All solids, bodies, regions, ellipses, leaders, multilines, rays, tolerances, and xlines are converted to lines, arcs, and circles as appropriate.
Quick Reference Commands CONVERT Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD LT 95 or earlier. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. SAVE Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT AutoCAD LT offers full compatibility when working with AutoCAD drawings.
When you open an AutoCAD drawing file in AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD LT uses only the UCS from the current viewport. If you edit the drawing in AutoCAD LT, and then save it and reopen it in AutoCAD, you may notice some discrepancies in UCS usage. User coordinate systems that were set individually in AutoCAD will probably change if the viewports that use them were activated in the AutoCAD LT session.
A constrained object will move in a predictable manner when edited or moved. A single variable change can cause all related objects to change automatically, enabling you to run through design iterations simply and effectively. There are two general types of constraints supported: Geometric and Dimensional. ■ Geometric constraints determine the relationships between 2D geometric objects or points on objects relative to each other. Use constraint bars to view the geometric constraints applied to objects.
When you work with constrained dynamic blocks in the Block Editor in AutoCAD LT, you can modify the constraint values and delete constraints but cannot add constraints in the Block Editor. You can manage the constraints while in the Block Editor from the Parametric tab. Modify 3D Point Clouds While you cannot index or attach a point cloud in AutoCAD LT, you can open drawings created in AutoCAD that contain point clouds.
® parametric solids (AutoCAD Mechanical), intelligently interactive door ® ® symbols (AutoCAD Architecture), polygon objects (AutoCAD Map 3D), and associative dimension objects (AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT). In addition to Autodesk, many software vendors use ObjectARX to write programs that create graphical and nongraphical custom objects that are useful in their AutoCAD based applications.
For a complete list of the currently available Object Enablers, go to the Autodesk Web site at http://www.autodesk.com/enablers. Object Classification ® If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature (object) classification to an object, you can view the classification in the Properties palette in the Class Name entry.
Access External Databases 35 You can use the program to associate, or link, data stored in external database programs such as dBASE, Oracle, and Microsoft Access with graphical objects. You can use all of the external database features without prior knowledge of databases or query languages. This section, however, does not cover in detail the theory of database design or the semantics of Structured Query Language (SQL).
1438
Collaborate with Others 1439
1440
Protect and Sign Drawings 36 You can provide a safe environment for sending and receiving data, and maintain the authenticity of drawings. A password protects a drawing with encryption, and a digital signature identifies an individual or an organization through a digital ID (certificate). Drawing Encryption When a password is attached to a drawing, the password encrypts the drawing and prevents unauthorized people from viewing it.
Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. View Password-Protected Drawings To view the data in a password-protected drawing, you must first obtain and enter the password. After you enter the password, it stays with the drawing, even if you modify and save the drawing, unless you remove the password.
4 Click OK. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. View Password-Protected Xrefs You can view drawings that contain xrefs to password-protected drawings. If you open a password-protected drawing that contains xrefs, you must enter a password for any xref whose password is different from the current drawing's password. You are only prompted to enter passwords that you have not yet entered.
View Properties of an Encrypted Drawing You can view drawing properties, such as the title, author, subject, and keywords, unless they were encrypted when a password was attached to the drawing. If drawing properties were not encrypted when a password was attached, you can view the properties in your operating system's Properties dialog box. To view properties of an encrypted drawing 1 In Windows Explorer, locate the file whose properties you want to view. 2 Right-click the file name. Click Properties.
■ A signed file cannot be rejected as invalid. The signer of a file cannot disown the file later by claiming the signature was forged. A digital signature is not the same as a digitized signature. While a digital signature helps prove your identity and a drawing's authenticity, a digitized signature is nothing more than an electronic version of your own signature. It can be forged and copied, and has no real security value.
Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. Personally Sign Drawings When you attach a digital signature to a file, anyone who views the file is notified if modifications were made after you signed it. Modifications invalidate a digital signature. Obtain a Digital ID To attach a digital signature to a file, you must have a digital ID (certificate), which is issued by a certificate authority. A digital ID identifies either an individual or an organization.
2 Click a search result to find out more about a digital ID vendor and how to obtain a digital ID. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. SIGVALIDATE Displays information about the digital signature attached to a drawing file. System Variables SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files.
■ Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, click Tools ➤ Security Options. 2 In the Security Options dialog box, Digital Signature tab, select Attach Digital Signature After Saving Drawing. 3 Click OK. NOTE In the Security Options dialog box, you can attach digital signatures only to files that are compatible with the AutoCAD 2000 and later drawing-file formats. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file.
You can attach a digital signature to the following file types: ■ EXE and ZIP files generated by eTransmit ■ DWG and DWT files that are compatible with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawing-file formats When you attach a digital signature to a set of files, you can select the files individually from within the signing utility or drag them into the utility from Windows Explorer.
■ To cancel the application of the digital signature to all of the read-only files, click Cancel. NOTE If you chose either a Medium or High security level when you obtained your digital ID, a message is displayed each time you try to attach a digital signature to a file. 9 When all files have been signed, the Signing Complete message displays the number of files that were signed. Click OK. Files that were successfully signed display the text “Signed” in the Status column of the Files to Be Signed list.
Add a Comment and Time Stamp You can add a comment and time stamp to a digital signature. Servers are used to obtain the current time when adding a time stamp to a digital signature. When you send drawing files over the Internet or work on collaborative projects, you can use a specific server to create an accurate, consistent time stamp.
■ Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, click Tools ➤ Security Options. 2 In the Security Options dialog box, Digital Signature tab, select Attach Digital Signature After Saving Drawing. 3 In the Get Time Stamp From box, click a time server. 4 In the Comment box, add a comment. 5 Click OK. To add a time server to the Time Server list 1 Locate and open the timesrvr.txt file. The timesrvr.txt file contains time service information. 2 In the timesrvr.
System Variables SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. View Drawings with Digital Signatures Digital signatures provide an electronic means of verifying the authenticity of signatures that are attached to drawing files.
NOTE If you want to retain valid digital signature status, do not add a password or otherwise modify or save a file that already has a digital signature attached. Make modifications, such as adding passwords, before signing the file. Signature information does not remain intact if you modify, save, or export drawing data. View Digital Signature Details When you receive a file that contains a digital signature, you can check whether the file was modified since it was signed, and other information.
2 In the Options dialog box, Open and Save tab, select Display Digital Signature Information. 3 Click OK. 4 Open a signed file. In the Digital Signature Contents dialog box, in the Other Fields list, select details of the digital signature, such as the issuer, beginning and expiration dates of the digital ID, and the serial number. 5 Click Close. To validate a signature using the Validate Digital Signatures icon 1 Open a signed file. 2 On the status bar, click the Validate Digital Signatures icon.
A Valid Signature icon is displayed if a digital signature is valid, and an Invalid Signature icon is displayed if the digital signature is not valid. 4 In the Other Fields list, select an option from the list to view details of the digital signature, such as the issuer, description, and expiration date of the digital ID. You can also view the time stamp and time service. 5 When you have finished viewing the digital signature information, click OK.
Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. SIGVALIDATE Displays information about the digital signature attached to a drawing file. System Variables SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Utilities Attach Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files.
2 When you receive the root certificate, click Start menu (Windows) ➤ Settings ➤ Control Panel ➤ Internet Options. 3 In the Internet Properties dialog box, Content tab, click Certificates. 4 In the Certificate Manager, click Import to run the Certificate Manager Import Wizard. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to obtain a root certificate for the current file. Quick Reference Commands SECURITYOPTIONS Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file.
37 Use the Internet for Collaboration You can access and store drawings and related files on the Internet. Get Started with Internet Access Before you can transfer or save files to an Internet or an intranet location, you have to get access permissions and take security precautions. In this topic and others, the term Internet is used to refer to both the Internet and an intranet. An intranet is a private network that uses the same standards as the Internet.
Quick Reference Commands BROWSER Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. System Variables HYPERLINKBASE Specifies the path used for all relative hyperlinks in the drawing. INETLOCATION Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web dialog box. Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing You can add hyperlinks that provide jumps in your drawings to specific files or websites.
partial path to a file location, relative to a default URL or directory you specify using the HYPERLINKBASE system variable. Quick Reference Commands ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing. DETACHURL Removes hyperlinks in a drawing. GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink.
When you create a hyperlink to a drawing and specify a named view to jump to, that view is restored when the hyperlink is opened. You can also create a hyperlink that opens a drawing in a specific layout. Use Relative and Full (Absolute) Paths in Hyperlinks Relative paths provide greater flexibility and are easier to edit than full hyperlinks. With relative hyperlinks, you can update the relative path for all the hyperlinks in your drawing at the same time, rather than editing each hyperlink individually.
To create a hyperlink to a named location 1 Create a hyperlink (see To create a full hyperlink to another file on page 1462). 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink. 3 Select the graphical object that the hyperlink is associated with. 4 In Type the File or Web Page Name, enter a pound sign (#) after the name of the file that the hyperlink is linked to, and then enter the named location.
■ Right-click. Click Hyperlink. Select the name of the hyperlink you want. Each hyperlink has either a description or the full URL to the referenced file. NOTE If you have turned off display of the hyperlink cursor, Hyperlink options are not available on the shortcut menu. You can turn on the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu in the Options dialog box on the User Preferences tab. The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
Quick Reference Commands ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing. DETACHURL Removes hyperlinks in a drawing. DWGPROPS Sets and displays the file properties of the current drawing. GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. HYPERLINKOPTIONS Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu. OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
For example, consider a design project with several drafters responsible for updating different components of a drawing. As drafters add new components to the drawing, they can associate hyperlinks that include their email addresses with the components. This provides a convenient way to identify who created various drawing components and to send that person an email message with any design-related issues.
hyperlinks adopt the relative base path of the current drawing when you insert them. When you select a block element in the drawing area that contains multiple hyperlinks, the available hyperlinks are listed in the Hyperlink shortcut menu. You can activate any hyperlink associated with the currently selected block element, and edit or remove a hyperlink associated with a particular block instance. For example, suppose you have a block that contains a line and a circle.
GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. Use a Hyperlink to Start a New Drawing Hyperlinks can be associated with drawing template files to quickly start new drawings. When you activate a hyperlink that points to a drawing template (DWT) file, a new drawing file is created based on the template rather than opening the actual template file.
Quick Reference Commands GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. System Variables PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
Use the Browse the Web dialog box to navigate to the Internet location where ® the file is stored, or access project collaboration sites hosted by Autodesk ® Buzzsaw using the Buzzsaw icon in the Select File or Save Drawing As dialog box. Use the Browse the Web Dialog Box With the Browse the Web dialog box, you can navigate quickly to a specific Internet location to open or save a file. You can specify a default Internet location that is loaded each time you open the Browse the Web dialog box.
9 Click Open. To open a drawing file from the Internet by browsing a web folder 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Select File dialog box, under Look In, select Web Folders (or My ® ® Network Places, depending on your version of Microsoft Windows ). 3 Double-click one of the web folders and select a file. You can create new web folders in Windows Explorer. Consult your system administrator or Windows Explorer Help for more information about web folders. 4 Click Open.
3 Double-click one of the web folders. You can create new web folders in Windows Explorer. Consult your system administrator or Windows Explorer Help for more information about web folders. 4 Specify a file name and select a file format from the Files of Type list. 5 Click Save. You must have access rights to save files to the specified location. To specify the default Internet location used by the Browse the Web dialog box 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Options.
To save an file to an Internet location with the Browse the Web dialog box 1 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 Click the Search the Web button. Many Internet connections require you to enter a valid user name and password before accessing the Internet. AutoCAD LT prompts you to enter this information. 3 In the Browse the Web dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Click a hyperlink on the HTML page that is displayed. ■ Enter a full or partial URL in Look In, and then press ENTER.
Overview of Unicode All characters are processed numerically by the computer operating system, which assigns a number to each character. Various numeric encoding systems have been used in the past, however these encoding systems often conflicted. As a result, operating systems and applications relied on code pages with specific character sets and numbering assigned to countries or regions.
■ Block attributes NOTE You can still use eTransmit to convey transmittal sets to countries and regions that use the same code page. Quick Reference Commands OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. SAVE Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name. SAVEAS Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. System Variables TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT Provides Unicode options for log files.
Buzzsaw URL, user name, and password so that you can log in, access, and post files. Use Buzzsaw You can access Buzzsaw from several standard file selection dialog boxes (such as New or Open). The Buzzsaw icon is displayed in the Places list for quick access. With eTransmit, you can send a transmittal set of DWG files to a Buzzsaw site. If you plan to use Buzzsaw for project collaboration, set up some shortcuts so you can navigate to frequently used sites more quickly.
NOTE Select the Save Login Name and Password check box, if you want to save your login name and password for future use. 6 In the Create a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut dialog box, under Select a Buzzsaw Folder, Project, or Document Set, click Browse. 7 In the Select a Buzzsaw Location dialog box, navigate to a project or folder you want to access. Click OK. The path is displayed in the Select a Buzzsaw Folder, Project, or Document Set box.
(The user name is provided to you by the person granting you access to the Buzzsaw site.) 5 Under Login, Password, enter a password. Click OK. NOTE Check the box, Save Login Name and Password, if you want to save your login name and password on this computer for future use. 6 In the Create a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut dialog box, under Select a Buzzsaw Folder, Project, or Document Set, click the Browse button to navigate to the location of the project or folder.
3 In the Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts dialog box, select a shortcut. Click Modify. 4 In the Log In To Buzzsaw Site dialog box, click to log in to the Buzzsaw site. 5 In the Edit a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut dialog box, modify the shortcut location or the shortcut name. 6 Click OK. Click Close. To delete a Buzzsaw location shortcut 1 In a file navigation dialog box that supports Buzzsaw, in the Places list, click the Buzzsaw icon.
To send a transmittal set to Buzzsaw 1 Click Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ eTransmit. 2 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click OK. 3 In the Specify Zip File dialog box, in the Places list, click the Buzzsaw icon. Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts is displayed in the Save In box. Existing Buzzsaw shortcuts are displayed in the Site column. 4 Double-click an existing shortcut or create a new shortcut. NOTE If you have not logged into the site, the Log In To Buzzsaw dialog box is displayed.
7 In the Publish Options dialog box, click OK 8 In the Publish dialog box, click Publish. 9 In the Specify DWF File dialog box, click Select. Publishing begins. A status box indicates when publishing is complete. Quick Reference Commands OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Use AutoCAD® WS to share, edit, and manage AutoCAD drawings on the Web. AutoCAD WS is an application that interfaces directly with AutoCAD.
Use the Timeline The timeline allows you to track the history of an online drawing. Use the timeline to view previous versions of the drawing, including versions resulting from real-time collaborations. All comments made over the progress of a drawing are displayed. While viewing a past version of the drawing, you cannot make changes. Save a copy of the drawing to continue working on the selected version. For additional information and tutorials on how to use AutoCAD WS, see the AutoCAD WS website.
NOTE You can stop and restart the uploading process for drawing files only. 3 To remove a file from the list, right-click the file and click Remove from This List. To open and edit drawings online ■ Click Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Open Online. The current drawing is uploaded and opened in AutoCAD WS. Use the available online tools to edit the drawing and collaborate with others. To view your online files in AutoCAD WS 1 Click Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Online Drawings.
3 Define the access permissions for each recipient. 4 (Optional) Enter a message to include in the email notification. 5 Click Share. To get a URL to the online copy of the current drawing 1 Click Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Get Link. 2 In the Get Link dialog box, select the Share Link check box. 3 Define the access permissions for each recipient. 4 Click Copy to copy the link to your clipboard. 5 Click OK. 6 Paste the link into any text editor and share it with others.
OPENONLINE Opens the AutoCAD WS Editor in a web browser and displays an online copy of the current drawing for online editing and sharing. SHARE Shares the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing with other users. TIMELINE Provides access to previous versions of the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing. UPLOAD Uploads the current drawing to AutoCAD WS and controls whether to automatically upload changes. UPLOADFILES Uploads selected files to AutoCAD WS.
You must include the transfer protocol (for example, http:// or ftp://) in the URL. ■ Click the Search the Web button, and then use the Browse the Web dialog box to navigate to the file you want to attach. If your network or ISP requires a user name and password, you are prompted to enter this information. 3 Click Open. 4 In the External Reference dialog box, click OK. 5 Specify an insertion point for the xref.
■ Files Table. This tab displays a table of files, their folder locations, and file details. Each file can be checked or unchecked, providing the most direct control over the contents of the transmittal package. Files are not automatically checked or unchecked. The following table lists the common file types that are automatically added to a transmittal package.
File Types Automatically Added to a Transmittal Package File Type Description the drawings of the transmittal set when plotting *.stb Named plot style files used to control the appearance of the objects in the drawings of the transmittal set when plotting *.
File Types Not Automatically Added to a Transmittal Package File Type Description OLE objects (linked files) OLE objects that are linked to files in the drawing are not included in the transmittal package Include Instructions to the Recipient A report file is automatically generated that includes a list of files in the transmittal package.
When the transmittal package is created, the transmittal package and transmittal report file are automatically attached to a new email. NOTE Regardless of which folder structure option you select for the transmittal package, any fully specified (absolute) paths of dependent files are converted to relative paths or “no path” to ensure that the dependent files can be located by the drawing file.
To create a transmittal package in a folder you specify 1 Click Application menu ➤ Publish ➤ eTransmit. 2 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, Files Tree or Files Table tab, click Add File. 3 (Optional) In the Add File to Transmittal dialog box, locate and select the files that you want to include. Click Open. Repeat this step for additional files, if necessary.
2 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, Files Tree or Files Table tab, click Add File. 3 (Optional) In the Add File to Transmittal dialog box, locate and select the files that you want to include. Click Open. Repeat this step for additional folder locations, if necessary. 4 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, in the tree or table of files, click to clear the check marks beside any files that you do not want to include.
4 If the transmittal package is password protected, you are prompted to enter the password. 5 Click OK to close each dialog box. Quick Reference Commands ETRANSMIT Packages a set of files for Internet transmission. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. Review and Markup Files with Design Review Autodesk® Design Review is a free program used for creating and reviewing DWF files.
shipping costs associated with distributing paper copies to your extended team. Much like Adobe® PDF files, DWF files are no more alterable than printed paper copies. Unlike PDF files, however, DWF files retain detailed design information and scale, and are therefore more suitable for architects, engineers, and designers. The newest version of the DWF file format, DWFx, is based on the XML Paper Specification (XPS) from Microsoft.
■ Review. Reviewers add digital comments and markup to the DWF file using callouts, text, shapes, dimensions, stamps, and custom symbols, saving changes to the DWF file. ■ Return. Reviewers send the marked-up DWF file back to the original publisher. ■ Revise. The designer uses the publishing software to import the marked-up DWF file, referring to comments in context to revise the original design quickly. ■ Republish.
■ Themes. You can apply a theme to the template you've chosen. With themes, you can modify the colors and fonts in your web page. ■ i-drop. You can activate drag-and-drop capability on your web page. Visitors to your page can drag drawing files into a program session. i-drop files are ideally suited for publishing block libraries to the Internet. For information about using i-drop to create an i-drop handle on a website, see the i-drop documentation on the Autodesk website at http://www.autodesk.
When you are working in a design program, you may want to include products that, for example, meet design standards for Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) or the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Autodesk Seek can help you locate such information and products, and get them into your design. ■ For more information about LEED green building certification, visit the U.S. Green Building Council website: http://www.usgbc.org.
If the drawing is new or contains unsaved changes, you are prompted to save the file. 4 If prompted, enter a new file name and save the file. A progress bar is displayed while the file is prepared and uploaded. 5 Your web browser displays the Autodesk Seek website, after the file is uploaded. Enter information about your submission on the web page to complete the Share with Autodesk Seek process. Quick Reference Commands ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
Use Markups for Design Review 38 When you are in the final stages of a design, you can publish drawings for review, and receive corrections and comments electronically. You can then implement and respond to these comments and republish your drawings. Doing all this electronically streamlines communication, shortens review cycles, and results in a more efficient design process. Overview of Using Markups for Design Review You can use only Autodesk Design Review to mark up DWF or DWFx files for review.
Quick Reference Commands MARKUP Opens the Markup Set Manager. MARKUPCLOSE Closes the Markup Set Manager. OPENDWFMARKUP Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Publish Drawings for Review Publish drawings for review at the end of the design cycle. You should publish drawings for review at the end of the design cycle.
Quick Reference Commands PUBLISH Insert Markups Use Autodesk Design Review to insert markups into a DWF or DWFx file. A markup is a single comment or a redline geometry correction inserted into a DWF or DWFx file. Using Autodesk Design Review, you can add markups electronically, just as you would mark up a paper version of the drawing. You can also assign a status to the markup and add comments. The markups and their status are saved in the DWF or DWFx file.
■ Add sheets to a DWF or DWFx file NOTE Markup Set Manager displays the Sheet status (in Detail view) as “File is missing”, if you add sheets using Autodesk Design Review. The reason is that the newly added sheets are not listed in the DSD file. ■ Delete sheets from a DWF or DWFx file Markup Set Manager will reflect the new order for every markup set that has sheets added to, deleted from, or rearranged from within Autodesk Design Review.
■ Put the drawing files you used to publish the DWF or DWFx file in the search path. This action ensure that you can load the corresponding drawing sets for a marked-up DWF or DWFx file. Set the search path using the Files tab in the Options dialog box. NOTE You can view markups in AutoCAD LT only if the marked-up DWF or DWFx file was originally created in AutoCAD 2005 or later. You must also have the original drawing file to view its markups in AutoCAD LT.
2 In the Open Markup DWF dialog box, select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Click Open. NOTE If you open a digitally signed DWFx file, click Open File in the DWFx - Digital Signature Warning dialog box. The Markup Set Manager displays the markup set in the tree view. 3 In the Markup Set Manager, click an individual markup node. The Markup Details area in the lower portion of the Markup Set Manager displays details for the selected markup.
4 Click the View DWG Geometry button to hide the DWG geometry. You can click the same button again to show the DWG geometry. NOTE If you open a DWG file that does not have associated markups or the markup set has not been loaded into the Markup Set Manager, you will not be able to use the following buttons in the Markup Set Manager: Republish All Markup Sets, View DWG Geometry, View DWF or DWFx Geometry, View Redline Geometry.
4 Click the View Redline Geometry button to hide the redline geometry. You can click the same button again to show the redline geometry. To print a drawing with markups ■ In Windows Explorer, double-click a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. The DWF or DWFx file opens in Autodesk Design Review. You can then print the marked-up DWF or DWFx file. To close the Markup Set Manager ■ With the Markup Set Manager open, click Tools menu ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager.
Changes in markup status and added comments are automatically saved in the DWF or DWFx file and included when you republish it. You can also save markup changes by right-clicking the markup set node and clicking Save Markup History Changes on the shortcut menu. WARNING Saving changes to a digitally signed DWFx file will invalidate the digital signature. See also: ■ Review and Markup Files with Design Review on page 1493 To change the status of a markup 1 Click File menu ➤ Load Markup Set.
To save changes to markups 1 Click File menu ➤ Load Markup Set. 2 In the Open Markup DWF dialog box, select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Click Open. The Markup Set Manager opens and displays the markup set in the tree view. 3 In the Markup Set Manager, click a markup node and change its status or add comments. 4 Right-click the markup set node. Click Save Markup History Changes.
be reflected in the republished DWF or DWFx file; however, if any sheets were added to the DWF or DWFx file in Autodesk Design Review, those sheets will not be included in the republished DWF or DWFx file. See also: ■ Review and Markup Files with Design Review on page 1493 To republish a marked-up drawing set 1 Click File menu ➤ Load Markup Set. 2 In the Open Markup DWF dialog box, select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Click Open.
Quick Reference Commands MARKUP Opens the Markup Set Manager. MARKUPCLOSE Closes the Markup Set Manager. OPENDWFMARKUP Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups.
Render Drawings 1511
1512
Draw 2D Isometric Views 39 The Isometric Snap/Grid mode helps you create 2D isometric images that represent 3D objects. The Isometric Snap/Grid mode helps you create 2D images that represent 3D objects. By setting the Isometric Snap/Grid, you can easily align objects along one of three isometric planes; however, although the isometric drawing appears to be 3D, it is actually a 2D representation.
Choosing one of the three isometric planes causes Ortho and the crosshairs to be aligned along the corresponding isometric axes. For example, when Ortho is on, the points you specify align along the simulated plane you are drawing on. Therefore, you can draw the top plane, switch to the left plane to draw another side, and switch to the right plane to complete the drawing. To turn on an isometric plane 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings.
Quick Reference Commands DSETTINGS Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. GRID Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport. ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane. ORTHO Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction. SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. System Variables SNAPISOPAIR Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.
To draw an isometric circle 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Drafting Settings. 2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, select Isometric Snap. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Draw ➤ Ellipse ➤ Axis, End. 5 Enter i (Isocircle). 6 Specify the center of the circle. 7 Specify the radius or diameter of the circle. Quick Reference Commands ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane.
Glossary Commands associated with definitions are shown in parentheses at the end of the definition. absolute coordinates Coordinate values measured from a coordinate system's origin point. See also origin, relative coordinates, user coordinate system (UCS), world coordinates, and world coordinate system (WCS). acquired point In the tracking or object snap tracking methods of locating a point, an intermediate location used as a reference.
angular unit The unit of measurement for an angle. Angular units can be measured in decimal degrees, degrees/minutes/seconds, grads, and radians. annotation scale A setting that is saved with model space, layout viewports, and model views. When you create annotative objects, they are scaled based on the current annotation scale setting and automatically displayed at the correct size. annotational constraint Dimensional constraint used to control the size of the geometry as well as annotate the drawing.
aspect ratio Ratio of display width to height. associative dimension A dimension that automatically adapts as the associated geometry is modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also nonassociative dimension and exploded dimension. associative hatch Hatching that conforms to its bounding objects such that modifying the bounding objects automatically adjusts the hatch. (BHATCH) attribute definition An object that is included in a block definition to store alphanumeric data.
AutoCAD LT window The drawing area, its surrounding menus, and the command line. axis tripod Icon with X, Y, and Z coordinates that is used to visualize the viewpoint (view direction) of a drawing without displaying the drawing. (VPOINT) B-spline curve A blended piecewise polynomial curve passing near a given set of control points. See also Bezier curve. (SPLINE) base point 1.
block constraint parameter A dimensional constraint that has block authoring information associated with it. See also: dynamic constraint See also: annotational constraint block definition The name, base point, and set of objects that are combined and stored in the symbol table of a drawing. See also block and block reference. block definition table The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block definitions. See also named object. block instance See block reference.
CMYK For cyan, magenta, yellow, and key color. A system of defining colors by specifying the percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and the key color, which is typically black. coincident grip Grip shared by multiple objects. Color bleed scale Increases or decreases the saturation of the reflected color from the material. color map A table defining the intensity of red, green, and blue (RGB) for each displayed color. column A vertically adjacent table cell selection spanning the height of the table.
control point See control frame. coordinate filters Functions that extract individual X, Y, and Z coordinate values from different points to create a new, composite point. Also called X,Y,Z point filters. crosshairs A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect. crossing selection A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its borders. CTB file SA color-dependent plot style table.
decimal degrees A notation for specifying latitude and longitude. For example, 35.1234°, 100.5678°. Latitude always precedes longitude default drawing See initial environment. default value The value that is accepted when you press Enter at a sub-prompt. The default value is displayed in angle brackets <>. See also default. definition points Points for creating a dimension.
dockable window A user interface element that can be either docked, anchored, or floating in the drawing area. Dockable windows include the command window, tool palettes, Properties Palette, and so on. drawing area The area in which your drawings are displayed and modified. The size of the drawing area varies, depending on the size of the AutoCAD LT window and on how many toolbars and other elements are displayed. See also AutoCAD LT window.
DWF underlay See underlay. DWFx A version of DWF based on the XML Paper Specification (XPS) from Microsoft. DWFx enables DWF files to be viewed using the free Microsoft XPS Viewer. Generically referred to as DWF. DWG Standard file format for saving vector graphics. See also DWF and DXF. DXF For drawing interchange format. An ASCII or binary file format of a drawing file for exporting drawings to other applications or for importing drawings from other applications. See also DWF and DWG.
from being changed. A CAD manager creates an enterprise CUxI file by modifying a main CUIx file and then saving the file to the support location defined in the Options dialog box, Files tab. environment map A bitmap that is used to simulate reflections in materials that have reflective properties. The map is “wrapped” around the scene and any reflective object will show the appropriate portion of the map in the reflective parts of its material.
fit tolerance The setting for the maximum distance that a B-spline can pass for each of the fit points that define it. floating panel A ribbon panel that is not attached to the rest of the ribbon or file window. floating viewports See layout viewports. font A character set, made up of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols of a distinctive proportion and design. footcandle The American unit of illuminance (symbol: fc). Lm/ft^2. footcandle The American unit of illuminance (symbol: fc).
grip menu options See multi-functional grip menu options. grip modes The editing options you can access from selected grips on selected objects: stretching, moving, rotating, scaling, and mirroring. grips Small squares and triangles that appear on objects you select. After selecting the grip, you edit the object by dragging it with the pointing device instead of entering commands. HDI For Heidi Device Interface.
indirect bump scale Scales the effect of the base material’s bump mapping in areas lit by indirect light. initial environment The variables and settings for new drawings as defined by the default drawing template, such as acadlt.dwt or acadltiso.dwt. See also template drawing. interface element A user interface object that can be customized, such as a toolbar, pull-down menu, shortcut key, dockable window, and so on. interpolation points Defining points that a B-spline passes through.
link To use object linking and embedding (OLE) to reference data in another file. When data is linked, any changes to it in the source document are automatically updated in any destination document. See also embed. LL84 coordinate system Common latitude longitudinal-based coordinate system where latitude and longitude are both measured from -90 to 90 degrees. Longitude begins at 0 degrees at the Prime Meridian in Greenwich, England and is measured from -180 to 180.
multileader A leader object that creates annotations with multiple leader lines. named object Describes the various types of nongraphical information, such as styles and definitions, stored with a drawing. Named objects include linetypes, layers, dimension styles, text styles, block definitions, layouts, views, and viewport configurations. Named objects are stored in definition (symbol) tables. named objects, dependent See dependent named objects (in xrefs).
OLE For object linking and embedding. An information-sharing method in which data from a source document can be linked to or embedded in a destination document. Selecting the data in the destination document opens the source application so that the data can be edited. See also embed and link. origin The point where coordinate axes intersect. For example, the origin of a Cartesian coordinate system is where the X, Y, and Z axes meet at 0,0,0.
any custom plotter calibration or custom paper size information. See also PMP file, STB file, and CTB file. PCP file Partial plotter configuration file. PCP files contain basic plot specifications and pen parameters that were saved in previous versions. Plot settings that are stored in a PCP file include pen assignments, plotting units, paper size, plot rotation, plot origin, scale factor, and pen optimization level. See also PC2 file and PC3 file.
point filters See coordinate filters. pointer A cursor on a video display screen that can be moved around to place textual or graphical information. See also crosshairs. polar array Objects copied around a specified center point a specified number of times. (ARRAY) Polar Snap A precision drawing tool used to snap to incremental distances along the polar tracking alignment path. See also polar tracking on page 1535.
regenerate To update a drawing's screen display by recomputing the screen coordinates from the database. See also redraw. (REGEN) region Two-dimensional enclosed areas that have physical properties such as centroids or centers of mass. You can create regions from objects that form closed loops. They area commonly created in order to apply hatching and shading. (REGION) relative coordinates Coordinates specified in relation to previous coordinates.
running object snap Setting an Object Snap mode so it continues for subsequent selections. See also Object Snap mode and object snap override. (OSNAP) scale representation The display of an annotative object based on the annotation scales that the object supports. For example, if an annotative object supports two annotations scales, it has two scale representations script file A set of commands executed sequentially with a single SCRIPT command.
snap angle The angle that the snap grid is rotated. snap grid The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid points according to the spacing set by Snap. Snap grid does not necessarily correspond to the visible grid, which is controlled separately by GRID. (SNAP) Snap mode A mode for locking a pointing device into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid. When Snap mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point on the grid.
text style A named, saved collection of settings that determines the appearance of text characters—for example, stretched, compressed, oblique, mirrored, or set in a vertical column. thaw A setting that displays previously frozen layers. See also freeze. (LAYER) thickness The distance certain objects are extruded to give them a 3D appearance. (PROPERTIES, CHPROP, ELEV, THICKNESS) tiled viewports See model viewports.
underconstrained geometry Objects with unsolved degrees of freedom are underconstrained. underlay A DWF, or DGN file used to provide visual context in a drawing file. Underlays cannot be edited, and do not provide the full range of notification. Underlays cannot be bound to a drawing. See also external reference (xref). up direction A vector defining what direction is Up. By default this is the positive Z – axis (0,0,+1).
viewpoint The location in 3D model space from which you are viewing a model. See also view and viewport. (VPOINT) viewport A bounded area that displays some portion of the model space of a drawing. The TILEMODE system variable determines the type of viewport created. 1. When TILEMODE is off (0), viewports are objects that can be moved and resized on a layout. (MVIEW) 2. When TILEMODE is on (1), the entire drawing area is divided into non-overlapping model viewports. See also TILEMODE, view, and viewpoint.
world coordinate system (WCS) The fixed coordinate system used as the basis for defining all objects and other coordinate systems. See also user coordinate system (UCS). world coordinates Coordinates expressed in relation to the world coordinate system (WCS). wrap around Behavior where the cursor wraps around the window and appears on the opposite side to allow the continuation of a drag operation instead of stopping at the edge of the drawing area. X,Y,Z point filters See coordinate filters.
Index 2D Cartesian coordinates coordinate filters 506 entering 468 x and y values 466 2D coordinates Cartesian 466 entering 468 polar 466 2D Drafting & Annotation workspace 181 2D isometric views 1513 2D Navigation wheel 247 2D objects multi-functional grips 637 simplified display 447 simulating 3D 1513 2D polar coordinates 466, 470 2D UCS icon 463 3D Cartesian coordinates coordinate filters 506 defining 3D views 257 entering 473 3D coordinates Cartesian coordinates 473 cylindrical coordinates 475 entering
actions dependencies 812 actions (dynamic blocks) about 815 array actions 822 Block Authoring palettes 805 Block Editor display 810 Chain Actions property 827 flip actions 821 grips and 838 lookup tables and 823 move actions 816 overriding 837 parameter sets and 805 polar stretch actions 820 properties 830 rotate actions 820 scale actions 817 selection sets 815 stretch actions 819 types 815 actions (user) redoing 626 undoing 625 adaptive grid display 495 adaptive plot style adjustments 1237 Add-a-Plotter wi
model space and 293 multi-functional grips 637 multileaders as 880 orientation 892, 1344 previous release formats 1344 previous release formats and 1425 scale representations 889 scaling 294, 861, 863 text 871, 938 tolerances as 875 types of 859 updating 863 updating scale 889 visibility 887 visual fidelity 221, 867, 1424 workflow overview 862 annotational constraints 734 annotative blocks previous release formats 1344 annotative dimensions 1101 Annotative property 861, 865 aperture box (AutoSnap) 490 appli
attached xrefs demand loading and 1294 Internet-based xrefs 1485 notification of 1282 relocated xrefs 1291 updating 1292 attaching block attributes 775, 779 DGN underlays 1361 digital signatures 1445–1446, 1449 DWF underlays 1361 DWFx underlays 1360–1361 files to drawings 1351 passwords 1441 PDF underlays 1361 raster images 1395 xrefs 1282, 1287 attribute definitions 778 attribute extraction templates 782 attribute tags 778 attributes of blocks 775 auditing drawings examples 230 Auto-hide option 163 auto-hi
xrefs to drawings 1295 bisecting objects with construction lines 590 bitcodes 45 bitmaps (BMP images) exporting 1422 importing 1392 pasting 632 plotting to 1246 bitonal raster images 1404 blank text objects 628 BLK files 1270 Block Attribute Manager duplicate tags 792 reordering prompts 779 block attributes about 775 annotative 865 attaching 779 attribute definitions 778 attribute extraction templates 782 attribute tags 778, 783, 792 attribute values 792 constant 776 definitions 792 editing 779 error handli
hyperlinks in 1467 inserting 753 layers and 752 leader objects and 990 linetypes 771 model space settings 294 nested 772 OLE objects and 1310, 1328 orientation 892 paper space and 768 pasted objects as 632 pasted text as 974 properties 770 saving changes to 1308 scaling 753 table cells and 1047 updating 793 visibility 761 xrefs vs.
cells (tables) address format 1052 AutoFill feature 1052 blocks in 1047 cell ranges 1052 formulas in 1052 merging 1039 modifying 1038 text in 1047 center location overrides 1115 center marks in dimensions 1060, 1114 centerlines in dimensions 1060, 1114 centers of gravity 526 certificate authorities 1446, 1457 certification of hardware and software 179 Chain Actions property 827 chamfering hatch boundaries 694 objects 694 characters formatting 953, 1004 height 1014 international 1009 stacking 967 Unicode tex
filtering selection sets by 609 grid elements 494 grips 759 layer property overrides 395 layers and 380, 382, 391 masking objects with 932 names 420 numbers of 264 Pantone color books 420 pasted objects 632 plot styles 1231 RAL color sets 420 raster images 1392, 1404 screening 325, 1231 shades 909 table elements 1045 tints 909 True Colors 420 underlays 1377 xref layer properties 1284 columns (multiline text) 970 columns (tables) adding or deleting 1039 formatting 1045 modifying 1037 combining regions 592 co
editing 723, 736 editing constrained objects 727, 736 fix constraints 722 formulas 740 fully constrained drawings 715 geometric constraints 717, 720 multiple constraints 722 parameters 740 Parameters Manager 742, 762 parametric constraints 713 relaxing 716 removing 716 unconstrained drawings 714 underconstrained drawings 715 construction geometry 774 construction lines drawing 589 modifying 601 content accessing 131 accessing in DesignCenter 82 adding to DesignCenter 86 Content Explorer 96 content sources 1
absolute values 466 calculating 521 coordinate filters 506 cursor location 466 displaying values 529 Dynamic Input and 479 entering 466 geographic locations 200 relative values 466 types of 455 unit types 466 copying arrays of objects 657 block definitions 773 demand loading and 1323 dragging objects 656 formulas to table cells 1052 grip modes and 641 hatch properties 926 layers 388 multiple copies of objects 655 object properties 379 objects 631, 654 objects to other drawings 218 offsetting objects 673 cor
D damaged drawing files 229 data extraction 1346 converting older files and 1427 data extraction tables converting older files and 1427 data links defined 1042 locking linked spreadsheets 1043 updating 1042 data types in tables 1045 databases about 1437 block attribute data in 782 dates date stamps on layouts 318 date-related searches 127 datum composite tolerances 1158 geometric tolerances 1157 ordinate dimensions 1122 DC Online tab (DesignCenter) 92 deleting block attributes 792 block definitions 763 clip
MicroStation and AutoCAD terminology 1365 seed files 1420 translation mapping 1354 types of 1360 underlays 1360–1361 DGN seed files 1420 dialog boxes calculations in 533, 546 display options 49 suppressing display 49 transparent commands and 43 diameter constraints 731 diameter dimensions 1113 creating 1113 definition points 1128 text 1078 DIC color guide 420 dictionaries 1029 digital design workflow 1494 digital IDs about 1446 certificate authorities 1446, 1457 obtaining 1446 root certificates 1457 digital
model space settings 294 modifying 1126 nonassociative 1061, 1128, 1131 ordinate 1122 previous release formats and 1425, 1429 radial 1113 scale 1101 spacing between 1147 styles 1064, 1150 text 1060, 1076, 1133 text styles 1086 types 1057, 1104 units of measurement 1085, 1088 values 1088 direct distance entry 466, 514 disassociated dimensions 1127 disassociating compound objects 701 display drivers 178 display performance 447, 1412 displaying alignment paths 510 annotative objects 887 colors 264 constraints
circles 570 construction lines 589 curved objects 565 direct distance entry 514 donuts 578 double lines 559 ellipses 580 isometric circles 580, 1515 layout viewports and 308 lines 549 object properties 373 objects 549 Ortho mode 500 parametric drawing 713 polygons 556, 573 polyline arcs 573 polylines 551 precision 455 rays 589 rectangles 556 reference points 588 revision clouds 596 splines 582 squares 556 tangent arcs and lines 568 triangles 556 viewports and 284 wide polylines 574 drawing extents 242, 1177
exporting 1414 extents 242 file formats 220 file locations 208, 227 finding 198, 226 fitting on paper 1203, 1207 fully constrained drawings 715 geographic location 200 importing files into 1351 incremental saves 221 information about 7 inserting as blocks 767 international files 221 Internet-based 1469 layers 380 layouts 299, 301 linking to databases 1437 markups 1499 measurement units 191 metadata 198 model space 291 multiple open drawings 210 naming 221 object properties 373 opening 132, 205, 1469 orienta
DWG files saving underlays as 1389 DWG to PDF driver 1248 DWT files saving layouts as 334 sheet creation templates 361 starting drawings 196 DXF files (drawing interchange format) converting to DWG 1351 exporting 1417 exporting block attribute data 785 saving 220 DXX files 785 dynamic block definitions about 758, 799 actions 810, 815 assigning data to 823 AutoCAD LT functionality 1433 block attributes 775 Block Editor 801 construction geometry 774 correcting 808 creating 800 dependencies 812 designing 800 g
printable areas 1203 revision clouds 597 sheet and sheet set properties 358 sheets 349 splines 709 tables 1037, 1047 text 1018, 1032 text styles 1004 underlays 1373 xrefs 1301, 1303 educational products 1284 electronic drawing sets plotting 1261 publishing 1255, 1258, 1262 republishing 1267 viewing published files 1269 ellipses calculating geometric data for 524 drawing 580 grips on 638 modifying 601 elliptical arcs modifying 601 email hyperlinks 1466 embedded objects (OLE) 632, 1325, 1332 empty text object
origins of 1104 properties 1069 text on 1077, 1082 external databases 1437 external references (xrefs) about 1279 archiving drawings with 1295 attaching 1282, 1287 Autodesk Educational Products 1284 binding 1295, 1309 blocks and 754, 768 circular references 1313 clipping 1297, 1321 constraints 715 copying 1321 defined 1279 demand loading 1294, 1321–1323 DesignCenter and 1282 detaching 1292 editing 1301, 1303 error messages 1311 exploding 702 fields in 999 freezing layers of 1321 icons 1282 Internet-based xr
raster formats 1392, 1422 saving drawings 220, 1348 saving in older formats 1428 trusted formats 207 web page publishing 1495 file input and output commands 1469 file management 1437 files attaching 131 backups 232 Buzzsaw sites and 1476 Content Explorer tasks 131 creating 14 currently open 17 default locations 208 digital signatures and 1446 encryption 1441 exporting 1414 finding 198 Home view settings 112 importing 1351 inserting 131 large objects in 207 markups 1499 metadata 198 migrating 185 navigating
flip actions 821 flip grips 759, 838 flipping arrowheads 1073 blocks 821 objects 676 floating properties 770 floating toolbars 37 floating windows 51, 163 flyouts tool palettes 58 FMP files (font mapping) 1012 folders browsing 126 DesignCenter content 82 file locations 208 Home view settings 112 watched folders 107, 117 font mapping files 1011 fonts alternative fonts 1011 Asian set 1009 assigning 1006 Big Fonts 1009 converting 1012 display settings 158 file locations 227 international sets 1009 mapping 1012
geometric tolerances about 1154 composite tolerances 1158 datum reference frames 1157 lateral tolerances 1096 material conditions 1156 projected tolerances 1158 geometry authoring blocks with constraints 774 object geometric data 521 global constants 541 global linetype scale factor 436 Google Earth 200 gradient fills creating 909 simplified display 447 graphics cards 178 grayscale 1232 grid displaying 494 snapping to 494 grid limits calculating 295 overriding 494 zooming to 242 grip modes 637 grip-editing
background colors 909 boundaries 903, 930 bounded hatches 896 chamfering boundaries 694 customizing 908 density 917 draw order 925 exploding 702 file locations 227 filleting boundaries 690 gradient fills 909 islands within 903–904 ISO patterns 908 large or complex drawings and 905 model space settings 294 modifying 925 nonassociative 904 orientation 892 origin point 914 pattern libraries 908 pre-defined 908 properties 920, 926 rotating 927 scaling patterns 917, 927 simplified display 447 solid fills 896 sty
IG4 files 1392 imperial units converting to metric 191 linetype definition file for 429 QuickCalc display 535 importing DGN files 1352 files into drawings 1351 layer states 417 layouts as sheets 348 named page setups 1166 OLE objects 1328 plotter configuration settings 1188 text 974 tool palettes 77 WMF files 1358 in-place reference editing about 1304 inheritance and 1309 saving changes 1308 undoing changes 1308 In-Place Text Editor columns 970 fonts in 1008 indents and 963 multiline text 946 table text and
inverting layer filters 402 invisible block attributes 776 invisible objects in blocks 843 islands hatch patterns and 903 island detection styles 904 ISO hatch patterns 908 ISO pen widths 429 isolating objects 453 isometric circles 580, 1515 isometric drawings 1513 isometric planes 1513 Isometric Snap/Grid mode 1513 isometric views 2D views 1513 3D views 257 J JFIF files 1392 jog lines in dimensions 1138 jogged radius dimensions 1115 joining line join styles 1239 polylines 704 JPEG files attaching 1392 exp
layer states 412, 417 Layer States Manager LMAN layer states 417 restoring layer states 412 xrefs and 414 layers about 380 block elements and 752 colors 382, 391, 423 copying 388 creating 387 current 388 default properties 382 deleting 388 displaying 401 exporting layer states 417 filtering 388, 400 freezing 322, 382 hiding 382 importing layer states 417 inverting filters 402 LAS files 417 layer 0 381 layer states 412 layout viewports and 322 linetypes 382, 391, 434, 1284 lineweights 382, 391, 439, 445 LMAN
initializing 1164, 1192 inserting from DesignCenter 334 layer visibility 309, 382 layout tabs 299 layout templates 334 layout viewports 299 Layout Wizard 306, 1187 lineweights in 441, 1182 named layouts 305 opening 210 orientation 892, 1176, 1205 page setups 1163 paper size 1171, 1200 plot scale 1180 plot settings 1163, 1199, 1206 plot style tables 1218 plotting 1191 previewing 210 settings 306 sheet sets and 342, 348 switching to model space 215 work process 305 leaders (leader lines) annotations 859, 880
linetypes about 427 applying 432 blocks 770–771 converted DGN files 1353 current 432 defaults 382 deleting 429 displaying on short segments 437 file locations 227 filtering selection sets by 609 freehand sketches 564 hardware linetypes 428 layers and 380, 391, 434 layout viewports and 328 loading 429 model space settings 294 plot style linetypes 1237 polylines 437 reapplying 434 scaling 328, 435, 1237 lineweights about 438 applying 439 block properties 770 current 443 defaults 382 dimension elements 1067 di
magnifying views 241 major grid lines 494 manufacturer data DesignCenter 93 mapping fonts 1012 markers equal segments on objects 516–517, 519 geographic 200 object snaps 489 point markers 517, 519 tracking points 509 Markup Set Manager responses to markups 1506 viewing markups 1501 markups 1499 inserting 1501 markup sets 1501 publishing 1500 republishing 1508 responding to 1506 revision clouds 596 status 1506 viewing 1501 masking objects 932 mass properties 526 master drawings 1279 material condition symbol
exporting layout objects to 311 layer states and 413 layer visibility settings 309 lineweight display in 439, 441 markups and 1502 moving objects to paper space 305 parallel projections 256 plot scale 1206 plotting from 294, 1200, 1209 switching to layouts 215 text in 1026 viewports 281 model space viewports creating 281 modifying AutoCAD WS files 1481 block attribute definitions 779 block attributes 790, 792 block definitions 788, 1301 block references 788, 1301, 1303 colors 423 columns of text 970 constra
styles 987 text in 990 multiline text about 946 aligning 952 annotations 859 columns 970 converting 1345 creating 946 editing 1021 finding 1023 formatting 953 grips 970 height 953, 1014 indenting 963 justification 952, 1027 leader objects and 975 line spacing 965 lists in 955 obliquing angle 1015 orientation 1016 previous release file formats and 1426 previous release formats and 1345 properties 947 replacing 1023 stacked 966 styles 953, 1004 tabs 963 text editors 1032 text wrap 947 Multiline Text Editor 10
non-associative arrays 658 nonassociative dimensions 1061, 1128, 1131 nonassociative hatches 904, 929 nonrectangular layout viewports 314 nonsystem plotter drivers PDF output 1248 plotting to 1242 PostScript driver 1249 raster driver 1246 nonuniform rational B-spline curves 582 Not Found raster images 1406 notes about 935 annotations 859, 871 creating text 938 markups 1506 notification attached xrefs 1282 changed xrefs 1293 new layers added 408 relocated xrefs 1291 nudging objects 647 Number of Grips proper
grouping 619 highlighting 614 isolating 453 large objects 207, 222, 1490 layers 380 layout viewports and 308 linetypes 427 lineweights 438 magnifying 242 masking 932 mass properties 526 mirroring 676 moving 647 offsetting 641, 673 OLE objects 1325 overlapping 451 paper space and 305 pasting 632 plotting 1209 proxy objects 1435 reshaping 685 resizing 685 rotating 650 saving 220 scaling 686 searching by type 127 selecting 601 simplified display 447 snapping 485 stretching 685 transparency 450 visibility 322 o
ordinate dimensions 1122 Ortho mode 500 orthographic views 257 overlapping objects draw order 451 selecting 601 overlaying xrefs 1287 overlays 380 overrides angle overrides 506 array properties 667 center locations of dimensions 1115 dimension styles 1065, 1151 dynamic block actions 837 grid spacing 496 identifying 395 layer property overrides 383, 394, 412 linetypes 434 lineweights 445 object snaps 491 previous release formats and 1425 removing 397 sheet set page setups 343, 361 snap spacing 496 tool prope
defined 814 dependencies 812 dynamic blocks 838 grips and 838 groups 746 key points 815 labels 830 lookup tables and 823 parameter sets 805 Parameters Manager 742 parametric constraints 740 values 834 visibility parameters 843 Parameters Manager 742, 762 parametric constraints 1343 about 713 dimensional constraints 730 displaying 724, 734 editing constrained objects 727, 736 formulas 740 geometric constraints 717, 720 parameters 740 relaxing 716 removing 716 parametric drawing about 713 parametric constrain
layers and 381 lineweights and 441, 447 performance tuning 178 raster image display 1411 software acceleration 178 text display 447 performance tuner 178 perimeters 524 perpendicular lines 500 perspective views AutoCAD LT functionality and 1434 pickbox cursor 32, 601 PICT files 1392 pinned files 16 pixels raster images 1392 removing strays on display 628 plan views changing viewpoints 259 defined 257 planar closed spline curves 524 planes workplanes 466 plot areas printable areas 1203 setting 1177, 1199 plo
plot scale 1206 plot style tables 1183 plot styles 1209, 1213 positioning image on paper 1203 previewing 1241 publishing 1255 scaling drawings for 1180 screened objects 325 selecting output devices 1198 terminology 1191 test plot performance 447 text frames 447 transparent objects 450, 1209 underlays 1389 wipeout objects 932 PNG files (Portable Network Graphics) exporting 1422 importing 1392 plotting to 1246 web page images 1495 point clouds AutoCAD LT functionality 1434 point markers 517, 519 pointer input
predefined searches creating 123 preset 3D views 257 previewing drawings 210, 226 files 20 layouts 210 object selections 614 online content 91 plotted drawings 1241 previous release formats annotative blocks 1344 annotative objects 1344 associate dimensions and 1344 batch conversion 1350 converting lists of files 1350 custom objects and 1347 data extraction and 1346 dimensions 1344 layer properties and 1345 lighting and 1346 limitations 1343 materials and 1346 multiline text objects and 1345 restoring conve
object properties 376 proxy fonts 1008 proxy objects 1435 proxy servers 1459 PS files (PostScript) plotting to 1249 public keys 1445 Publish to Web wizard about 1495 publishing about 1255 background processing 1256 Buzzsaw sites and 1475 drawing sets 1255, 1258 drawings for review 1500 files 14 markups 1508 page setups 1163 plotting vs.
recovering after system failures 234 damaged drawings 229 sheet set data 343 recovery audits 230 rectangles drawing 556 modifying 601 rectangular arrays 658 redline markups 1499 redoing actions 21, 626 redrawing screen display 628 Refedit toolbar 1304 Reference Manager underlays and 1391 reference points drawing 588 offsetting from 515 referenced layers 388 references (xrefs) 1279 reflection lines 821 refreshing screen display 628 regardless of feature size values 1156 regenerating drawings 441 layer displa
fitting drawings on paper 1180 layout viewports 315 object grips and 638 objects 685 OLE objects 1337 tables 1038 text 1019, 1021, 1026 toolbars 37 trimming objects 678 windows 163 resolution PDF files 1248 raster images 1397 restoring backup files 232 damaged drawings 232 layer settings 412 previous view 241 UCSs 460 viewports 286 views 253 restoring conversion settings 1348 reverse lookup 824 reversing actions 626 reviewing drawings 1500 new layers in drawings 408 revision clouds 596 revision clouds 596 r
incremental saves 221 layer indexes 1321 layer property overrides 412 layer settings 412 layer states 412 layout templates 334 markups 1507 objects 220 page setups 1166 partial saves 220 predefined searches 123 preview images 226 previous release formats 1341, 1348, 1350 publish options 1270 selection filters 609 sheet selections 362 sheet sets 367 spatial indexes 1321 tool palettes 72, 77 UCSs 460 unreconciled layers and 410 viewports 286 views 253 visual fidelity and 221, 867, 1424 xref editing changes 13
finding DesignCenter Online content 91, 94 finding drawing files 198, 226 finding paramenters 747 finding raster images 1409 Network Machine view 117 predefined searches 123 Seek view 114 text search and replace 1023 underlay files 1388 user-created properties and 134 wildcard characters 121 security of files about 1441 digital ID levels 1446 Seek utility 1496 Seek view 114 selecting classification properties and 609 CP and WP selection 605 customizing object selection 613 default options for 615 deselectin
team collaboration 366 titles and tables of content 350 transmitting 361 updating 366 views 350 working without Sheet Set Manager 368 sheets in drawing sets 1258 sheets in sheet sets defined 337 layouts and 342 modifying 349 names and numbers 349 opening 349 page setups 361 properties 358 saving sheet selections 362 Sheet Set Manager 339 status 367 subsets 345 templates 342, 361 title sheets 350 views 350 working with 348 shortcut menus about 53 commands 46 shortcuts keytips 40 SHX fonts 1009, 1011, 1017 si
starting customizing program startup 183 drawings 189, 1468 starting tables 1044 static coordinate display 466 status bars 38 STB files 1193, 1215, 1228 SteeringWheels 267 stray pixels 628 stretch actions 819–820 stretch-moves 647 stretching blocks 819 grip methods for 638 objects 685 stretch-moves 647 styles annotations 869 dimensions 1064 leader objects 987 reference points 588 text 1003 subsets of sheet sets 345 substitute fonts 1008, 1011 subtracting areas 525 regions 593 sunlight geographic locations 2
formatting 1045 formulas in 1052 gridlines 1045 grips 1038 inserting blocks in 1047 merging cells 1039 previous release formats and 1427 row height 1038 selecting elements 1039 table styles 1045 text in 1047 title rows 1045 updating linked data 1042 tables (lookup tables) 823 tables of contents 350 Tablet mode 564 tabs in text 963 tangential objects arcs and lines 568 circles 571 tapering polylines 574 TARGA files 1246, 1392 teams master drawings 1279 shared tool palettes 77 sheet sets and 366 templates att
creating 1004 dimension text 1086 fields 994 fonts 1006 height 1014 modifying 1004 multiline text 947, 953 obliquing angle 1015 orientation in 1016 single-line text 942 tables 1045 text window 158 text wrap 947 TGA files plotting to 1246 thawing layers layout viewports 322 regenerating drawings 382 themes for web pages 1496 thickness of objects 853 thumbnail previews 20 thumbnails 211 tick marks for dynamic blocks 759 TIFF files attaching 1392 exporting 1422 plotting to 1246 tiling 1412 tiling images 1412 t
Dynamic Input 479 dynamic prompts 481 grips 840 settings 144 tracking object snap tracking 509 polar tracking 502 specifying points 512 tracking points 509 training 4 translating data from DGN files 1352 translation mapping setup 1354 transmittal packages creating 1486 sheet sets 361 underlays and 1390 transmittal setups (saved transmittal settings) 1489 transparency hatches 920 layers 382, 450 objects 450 palettes 65 plot options 450, 1209 raster images 1393, 1404 windows 163 transparent commands 43 triang
ribbon contextual tabs 1361 unloading 1370 undoing actions correcting mistakes 625 Quick Access toolbar 21 ungrouping groups 624 Unicode fonts 1009 Unicode text 947, 1427, 1474 unions regions 593 units of measurement about 191 converting 539 coordinate unit types 466 dimensions 1085, 1088 model space 293 plot scale 1206 QuickCalc display 535 unloaded raster images 1406 unloading raster images 1411 underlays 1370 xrefs 1320 unlocking layers 381 unnamed groups 620 unreconciled layers about 407 displaying 409
current 284 drawing in 284 layer property overrides and 394, 413 layers and 394 layout viewports 314 plot options 1185 plotting 1209 restoring layer states and 413 views 2D isometric 1513 aligning in viewports 329 changing 241 color display options 264 hiding lines 261 layout viewports 319 model space 3D views 256 modifying 309 multiple-view drawing layouts 299 OLE links and 1335 panning 241 plot options 1177 plotting 1199 preset 3D views 257 properties 253 restoring 253 rotating 332 saving 253 scaling 320
wildcard searches 121 window polygon selection 605 windows anchored 163 docking 163 interface options 143 resizing 163 selection windows 604 transparency 163 zooming to 242 Windows Clipboard 631 wipeout objects 932 witness lines 1069 WMF files exporting 1421 importing 1358 pasting 632 workflows digital design 1494 working sets of reference objects 1303, 1306 workplanes 455, 466 workspaces about 180 creating 181 samples 182 startup routines and 184 switching 181 world coordinate system (WCS) 455 WPolygon sel
